Home

R&S FSWP-K70 VSA User Manual

1. 419 Abbreviattong e 419 Predefined Standards and Settings eeeseeeeeeee 420 Predefined Measurement and TX Filters scccceseeeceseeeeeseeeeeeeessseeeeeeneeesseneeneeees 427 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data 429 Known Data File Syntax Description eeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeneneenennnenn nns 431 Formoulae 433 UO Data File Format Dog ar EEN NEEN NENNEN 447 List of Remote Commands VSA eene 453 M nected 463 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S FSWP Vector Signal Analysis User Manual provides all the information spe cific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSWP User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the VSA Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Typical applications Example measurement scenarios in which the application is frequently used e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of
2. 11 2 4 Starting the VSA Appltcatton ek EEEEEEEE EEN EEEE EENEG 11 2 2 Understanding the Display Information esee 12 3 Measurements and Result Displays eese 15 3 1 Evaluation Data Sources in VSA sesssseeeeeeeeenenen nnne nnne nnne nnns 15 3 2 Result Types In VIA enai Ee eiie traite niente rises LES 19 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA eesseeseeeeene nennen nennen nnn nnne nnn nennen 57 4 Measurement BasleS ie i ieieio sina eau ee ree ege EE 60 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing eene 60 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth eeeeusuus 67 EA MEEAUIEJnn 70 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process esee nnn 91 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors cssusss 106 4 6 Measurement RangeSiisiic sccstscccccccssccescctssecesscttseccescteciecessnuecaeeestunecesceeveeccetensdsteeeses 122 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol eene 127 4 8 Capture Buffer Display snciei iccsccccccceccvsssecescueeccecescoessovesnncescccesevesscaceenesccnnaseresdeeressnesss 128 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions sss 129 5 COCR A as oe 13
3. Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10oat32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands VSA SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation 2 cot nero te tet een entere re eh pat Rec hn e Ee errans 336 SENSe jADJust CONFIgure DURaltion MODE iran n etin eege 336 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresiel Ower 337 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS leresis UPPBber cette treten rrt eo Evene ua 337 SENSE ERT ee Late RT 338 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe DDEMOd APSKINS F te t etre tette erret o terere erp a AT ote etr Eed 283 SENSe DDEMoOGd ASIKNS Vales eege eege 283 SENSe DDEMOd ECALGC OFESGt 5 tercer hae rrt nb rh nex rene ERE ENAS EYE CEN KE ERE S CER EX FEE ida 325 SENSe DDBEMOG ECALG MODE cpu ete reto ete ete ec tegi aetna eens 324 SENSe DDEMod EPRale AU TQ oce eegene 325 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALUS 5 1 eorr reuera tech eer n Er nre ener a ere ERES EE 326 SENSe DDEMod EQUAlizer EENGILU iis ettet tente D ete eb Dp geo ees 326 SENSe DDEMod EQUAlizet EOAD 5 eco a E cuu ENSE RTI EA 327 SENSe IDDBEMod EQUalizer MODE E
4. E 365 LAYout GATalogE WINDOW ccce tti agr eret dett pr ge ce eh ea ttp eee P ea 367 Be dei rell Se WER le TR RE 367 geen E ET EE 367 EAYout REPLace WINDOW tnter rrr et ren tri eer rne ner rc trn eere exea 368 LAY OurS PILING he M C 368 TEANOUCAVINDOW lt il gt ADD M 370 LAYoutWINDowsrmn IDEN fy9 oco entre a edtetep cree tate a tiene eatin 370 MMEMory EOAD IQ S TA Te inesset tto error rt treten ra tree ko rere eir rece ve y Er o EE EHE ERU 398 MMEMory STOReshs eer el E E 398 MMEMory STORe ns IQ STAT rentre ror nn ner td nee P ra a E eU VE XI Den 398 MMEMory STOResn TRAGS inrer herren trn t er enean Ene eee ke E EO Pe PE PE DNATA VEENA 380 OUTPut IF SOURce OUTPut TRIGgersports DIRGCIOR ecrit nre eren ntn reete eerte denas 295 GEN ege ee ee ein GT 296 OUTPut TiIGgersport OT YPE eeraa cherry eE perpe ek ees u sextus eS Sue esu Y A O TEASEE E 296 OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe IMMediate rotto rnnt rrt tenens 297 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSE LENGI nani nr eere tht tercer e a cre ceret ae rre ions 297 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition essent 407 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle STATus QUEStionable ACPLimitN Range capta inicr aiaa iaiia 408 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimiE P TRAsItIQn ucauscoa rrr orna eren mee nb tr ene n penat Ei read 409 STATUus Q
5. Fig 4 53 Modulation error Phase error error vector phase The phase error is the phase difference between the measurement vector and the ref erence vector Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors PHASE ERR t PHASE yas t PHASE pep t This measurement parameter is of great importance for MSK modulation measure ments The phase error should not be confused with the error vector phase The error vector phase is the absolute phase of the error vector see figure 4 53 The effects of the different modulation errors in the transmitter on the result display of the analyzer are described in the next topics All diagrams show the equivalent com plex baseband signal Modulation Error Ratio MER The modulation error ratio MER is closely related to EVM MER 20 log EVM dB where the EVM is normalized to the mean reference power Symbol Rate Error SRE The symbol rate error SRE describes the difference between the defined reference symbol rate and the currently measured symbol rate in relation to the reference symbol rate The value is given in parts per million ppm SRE SR meas TU SRrer SRret Currently the SRE is only calculated for PSK QAM and User QAM modulation and only if compensation for SRE is activated see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Com pensation on page 179 Example For a defined symbol rate of SRge 1 MHz and a measured symbol rate of SRyeas 999 9 kH
6. 176 Biagi M 176 MOG WORE M 177 SV MMOS eee E reet ce Eee bue nce sm ER Dx E eM rex ia ness 177 BE S BLU MIR 177 Adding Symbols NONE RP 177 L Removing SYMBOS csivcsitessccsisiscsscosseissavaissieeasnestduediscandaabeieunsieahadeealdnacseviaas 177 em T A E E 177 Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 320 Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 321 Result Range Configuration Mod order The order of modulation e g 8 for an 8 PSK Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 320 Symbols The pattern definition is a symbol table consisting of one or more symbols The number of symbols is indicated as the Size to the left of the symbol table A scrollbar beneath the input area alows you to scroll through the table for long pat terns The numbers beneath the scrollbar indicate the sequential number of the follow ing symbols from left to right e the first symbol the currently selected symbol the last symbol Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 319 Symbol format Symbols Defines the format in which each symbol is defined hexadecimal decimal
7. Configuring VSA Setting parameters Data string Four values represent a symbol hexadecimal format The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation With a degree of modulation of 4 all symbols have a value range of 0000 0001 0002 0003 With a degree of modulation of 8 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Example DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00010000FFFF Defines the pattern data Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Edit on page 174 See New on page 174 See Symbols on page 177 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME Name This command selects a sync pattern for editing or for a new entry Setting parameters Name string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Edit on page 174 See New on page 174 See Name on page 176 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate lt NState gt This command selects the degree of modulation number of permitted states The pat tern must have been selected before using using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 320 The number of permitted states depends on the modulation mode Setting parameters lt NState gt numeric value Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on
8. 197 Limit and Display Lines eo reu eeretreee nuire rennen o rint iria nhan rrr nuam r rais 202 Display and Window Configuration eee enn 204 Zoom F nctions iiie irent tias tete SAAANA NESEN ora enun SEREAS 208 VQ Data Import and port iii retten tec c sesso nep aocEra pua sma Der 210 Import Export FUNCIONS siese ERR e Ren EAR RRRRERPRARINRUSERKRER RKRENERRE RANK EARS RRURRRARKRRRRR nE 210 How to Export and Import UO Data ee EEEEEE En 212 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis eeess 215 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 215 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements sees 217 How to Analyze the Measured Data eene nnns 226 Measurement Examples cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 233 Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer eene 233 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal 234 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals 241 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 250 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting esee nnne nnne 250 Explanation of Error Messages seen nennen nnne nennen 252 Frequently Asked Questions
9. See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 Query only See Modulation Mapping on page 140 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue Mapping To obtain a list of available symbol mappings for the current modulation type use the SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog query Setting parameters Mapping Example Example Example Manual operation string SENS DDEM MAPP GSM Sets mapping to GSM See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 See Modulation Mapping on page 140 SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat lt MSKformat gt This command defines the specific demodulation order for MSK Setting parameters MSKformat Manual operation TYPE1 TYPE2 NORMal DIFFerential TYPE1 NORMal Demodulation order MSK is used TYPE2 DIFFerential Demodulation order DMSK is used RST TYPE1 See Modulation Order on page 139 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat PSKformat Together with DDEMod PSK NST this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 286 Depending on the demodulation format and state the following orders are available NSTATe Name Order 2 any B
10. sse 131 Peak Sea8tOli E 201 RUN CONT entente bu xerox d cu cues 166 RUN SINGLE 166 167 SPAN not used cite ee E RR 131 Known data sisinio ina er 144 Greating files ainsi tete eine 224 Dependencies restrictions sesssussss 129 Enabling eosina toinnin AENA EO 144 EES Eed AE 431 dj c 223 Fine synchronization 186 187 Loading e S 145 Recording tool 224 Symbold cisions i coorta cett entree ome 98 WOKING WIL ass erben th Cen en eta dietas 223 L Limit lines Current mean peak values seeess 203 Default Enabling E 203 Modulation QCCUPACY neas ater ER tn tbe 202 Peak search MEC Values checking 2 niat etc ens 204 Limits COMMUNI Gist oen eese c et ent thori ek ec aieo 230 Defining remote siirroissa 356 Modulation Accuracy eessesenee 230 Retrieving check results remote 396 Linear average Formula E 439 Lines Limit Checking sot et UR tei o n rae 202 Loading Settings fllas io enhn eto 134 Low ISI filters Frequency ee E 443 Lower Level Hysteresis miiirn tees 192 M Magnitude Formula atu n 433 Magnitude absolute Gel LY DG fe P 40 Magnitude Absolute FRESUIL e x i bete doro etes ON Dx damas 40 128 Magnitude error Be le 109 Formula 433 Result type ito cor ete ite OD nd ets 43 44 RMS peak formulae essesese
11. ma L Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1000 0 mean 750 0 Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean EVM peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean center frequency deviation error Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1 kHz Default unit Hz C
12. 2 torrente nnne 142 Continuous sweep SOfIKGy rie reet Eed 166 Conventions SGPIicOMMANGS 2 2 ee Here tende 271 Copying Measurement channel remote 276 Couple Windows Markos engel Urat tetris erede 199 Coupling Input remiote ence t ttt tie ee 293 Customized Measurement performing ssessess 217 D Data acquisition Capture lenglli u a rene ta ctc tA d 160 Configuration a Sample rate cce ri etes rn ege Usable UO Bandwidth see 161 Data source Capture DUMMET esce ese rer ener pti ee 16 BIET Equalizer 5s Error vector Evaluation method osi sssini insanos 15 Meas amp REF neninn aaa adina 16 Modulation ACCUraCy eerte tete 18 Modulation errors sssrini hensii eaae 17 Multi SOUE CO uitiis iN greet ae e 18 Result type S ii ie retento eter te te den Bia 19 se 17 Decimal separator Trace io m 197 Default values lxi A S 132 SCAIING P aA 157 Deleting Settings Tiles annnars 134 Standards c 134 Delta markers DEMING er 199 Demodulation Advanced 183 Bandwidth ie rre nr ee eger ere Preis 61 Compensation 179 181 Configuration i 179 Estimation points per symbol 185 Known data oe 130 Normalization 184 Offset EVM a 187 PROCESS RS 91 REMOTE e M 324
13. DDEMod TIME 200 Programming Examples Defines the result length as 200 symbols CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the burst as the reference for the result range CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG LEFT Aligns the result range to the left edge of the burst CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG OFFS 10 Defines an offset of 10 symbols from the burst start DISP TRAC X VOFF 10 Defines the symbol number 10 as the result range start fsasasasssas Defining the evaluation range CALC ELIN STAT ON CALC ELIN1 10 CALC ELIN2 190 Evaluation range starts at symbol 10 and ends at symbol 190 LAY WIND4 REM Close symbol table display window 4 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 MODE MAXH Add a second trace in max hold mode to EVM vs Time display window 1 LAY ADD 3 RIGH MEAS Create new window to the right of capture buffer window 3 with measurement signal as data type Result 4 CALC4 FORM MAGN Set result type for window 4 to magnitude DISPlay WINDow4 TRACe2 MODE WRIT CALC4 TRAC2 REF Add a second trace in clear write mode for the reference signal CALC LIM MACC STAT ON Activates limit checks for all values in the Result Summary INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until the 10 sweeps have finished CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT EVM AVG CALC LIM MACC EVM RCUR Query the value and check the limit for the EVM RMS value in the Programming Examples result s
14. Expected Burst Length Burst Found These fields are for information only and indicate the expected burst length as defined in the Burst Settings and if a burst is detected its length Remote command CALCulate n DDEM BURSt LENGth on page 386 Pattern Search Access Overview gt Burst Pattern gt Pattern Search The Pattern Search settings define when a pattern is detected in the evaluated sig nal A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly R amp S FSWP K70 Configuration Burst Search Pattern Search Auto according to Signal Structure or Advanced Lr I Q Correlation Threshold Auto Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Information Selected pattern for Search EDGE TSCO Pattern Found Preview Mag CaptureBuffer 0 sym 1500 sym EN ei eg 171 VQ Correlation Threshold cxt rrr ran ee e xa YEN ze eye reda ta erred dans 171 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct nennen 172 Selected Pattern rel te DEE 172 eeng D eti tet PP dE EI eae 172 Enabling Pattern Searches Enables or disables pattern searches If Auto is selected pattern search is enabled only if the signal structure defines a pattern in the signal in the Signal Structure tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Pattern Settings on page 143 Remote command SEN
15. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenennene nennen nnne nennen nn 261 Remote Commands for VSA ceecceeceeeesesueeninennete nua e nun enenene 270 NNT O MU CUO Mii 270 Common SUPIKCS wie cocciciccccsseecsccccecesecie cesevsesecceeveceie cecedeeciedesvevsedseesdeeciececsdesiectesvvezices 275 Activating Vector Signal Analysis eese 275 Digital Standards iniecit eee caen AR VNA icai sna iia ao a FRE iau Een 279 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 A 1 A 2 A 3 AA A 5 A 6 A 7 Config ring VSA 281 Performing a MeaSureme nt ccceceeecceceseeeeeeeeesnenseeeesseenseeseseeeseeesseaeseeseseeaseeeeeeeaes 338 uL e 344 Configuring the Result Display eeeeeeeeeeeenneenennnn nennen nnn 364 Retrieving Results coiere eerie a isa ce stuetic ene sna Dana nena Dau EE can 377 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eese 397 Status Reporting Sy Stem avis sccccccccticescced ccceeccstitcesteeeescceeented senesseedicecesseetsscuecevedieesset 399 Commands for Compatibility eese nnne 410 Programming Exampl es nici eeienu steun nur rr Enin siia ics NA sini canina ERE DDR Rana ERE san ven 411 p Se
16. essent nennen rennen 356 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue essen eene rennen 359 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak RESult eese 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent STATe sse nennen 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue sess 359 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent RESult esee 396 CAlCulate cnz LUlMrMACCuracvOOFFserMEAN GTATe ene enemies 356 CAL Culate nzLUlMt MAC CuracvOOEFFsercMEAN VAL ue eene enne nnret nennen 359 CAlCulate nz LUIMrMACCuracy OOFFserMEANTREGu 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK STATe sse nennen nennen 356 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue essen nennen een rennen nennen 359 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK RESUult essent 396 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrenti GTATe nennen 356 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue s CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent RE Gu CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan STATe essent rennen CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue essent nennen nnne CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan RESult eese 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak STATe sse rennen
17. 8 In the Modulation tab select Modulation Type PSK gt QPSK 9 In the Filter tab select the Filter Root Cosine 10 Press the RF ON OFF key to switch the RF transmission on 9 2 2 Analyzer Settings This section helps you get your first valid measurement It starts with step by step instructions and continues with a more detailed description of further functionality Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal Frequency 1GHz Ref Level 4 dBm Modulation QPSK Symbol Rate 1 MHz Tx Filter Root Raised Cosine with Alpha BT 0 35 To define the settings on the R amp S FSWP 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz 3 Press the AMPT key and enter 4 dBm as the reference level This corresponds approximately to the peak envelope power of the signal 4 Startthe VSA application by pressing the MODE key and then selecting VSA 5 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA 6 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics a In the Modulation Settings section ensure that the Type is PSK and that the Order is QPSK The Mapping defines the mapping of the bits to the QPSK symbols It is relevant if you are interested in a bit stream measurement but does not affect the other measurement results Hence you do not need to change it here b Enter the Symbol Rate 1 MHz
18. eeeeeseeeeee eene eene 280 IENGeIDDEMod ST ANdard SAVE 280 SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue Factory This command restores the factory settings of standards or patterns for the VSA appli cation Setting parameters Factory ALL STANdard PATTern ALL Restores both standards and patterns RST ALL Usage Setting only Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 132 See Restore Pattern Files on page 132 SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard Standard This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standardized transmission method or a user defined transmission method The standardized transmission methods are available in the instrument as predefined standards Setting parameters Standard string Specifies the file name that contains the transmission method without the extension For user defined standards the file path must be included Default standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz do not require a path definition A list of prede fined standards including short forms is provided in the annex see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 420 Digital Standards Example DDEM PRES TETRA NDDOWN Switches the predefined digital standard TETRA Disconti nuousDownlink on DDEM PRES C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Switches the user defined digital standard USER GSM on Example See chapter 1
19. 01 42 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 23 3 2 24 Magnitude Relative Magnitude of the source signal the signal amplitude is scaled to the ideal reference signal Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 2 MagRel Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 14 Result display Magnitude Relative Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 377 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time Lum uoc ue ee ae User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 43 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays MAG ERR MAG yeas MAG ger Q with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 1 Mag Error ei Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 15 Result display Magnitude Error Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote com
20. 6 Ifthe pattern you require is not available continue with To add a predefined pat tern to a standard on page 219 or chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pat tern on page 220 7 Optionally select the Offset option and enter the number of symbols in the signal to be ignored during the pattern search 8 Close the Signal Description dialog box 9 In the Overview dialog box select Burst Pattern and switch to the Pattern Search tab 10 Select On to enable the search To enable a search only if a pattern is part of the signal description enable the Auto option The results of the pattern search with the selected pattern on the current measure ment data is displayed in the Preview area of the dialog box Whether a pattern was detected or not is indicated in the Information area 11 If necessary adapt the UO correlation threshold If bursts are not detected reduce the threshold if false bursts are detected increase the threshold 12 Optionally enable the Meas only if pattern symbols correct option In this case measurement results are only displayed if a valid pattern has been detected 13 Close the dialog box The selected pattern is used for a pattern search in the next measurement 8 2 2 1 How To Assign Patterns to a Standard Only patterns that are assigned to the currently selected VSA standard are available for the pattern search To add a predefined pattern to a standard 1 In
21. R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples c Inthe Transmit Filter section select RRC as Type and enter the Alpha BT value 0 35 In the preview area of the dialog you should then see a non distorted QPSK constellation diagram as shown in figure 9 3 De Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Modulation Settings Type Order Mapping Symbol Rate Transmit Filter Type Alpha BT Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 9 3 QPSK signal with RRC transmit filter 7 Close all open dialog boxes By default four measurement windows showing differ ent measurement results are displayed User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 237 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 1 0 MHz m el Att 20 4dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 800 A Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw B Result Summary Phase Err RM mm Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 2 43 Stop 2 43 C Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym Fig 9 4 Default window layout for Measurement Example 1 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration 1 To change the window layout i e the display configuration do one of the following e Select the Display Config softkey in the main VSA menu e Select the Display Configuration block in the Overview only if Specifics for option is disabled EI Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar 2 Replace window 1 by an ey
22. 174 BILL IU LL ILI 175 acil M 175 aer E 175 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Comect iioi iet eret tice segue 175 Standard Patterns selecting an assigned pattern The Standard Patterns are the patterns assigned to the currently selected standard You can add existing patterns to the standard or remove patterns already assigned to the standard The highlighted pattern is currently selected for pattern search Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 318 Burst and Pattern Configuration Removing patterns from a standard Removes the assignment of the selected patterns to the standard The patterns are removed from the Standard Patterns list but not deleted Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove on page 321 Adding patterns to a standard Adds the selected patterns in the list of available patterns All Patterns to the list of assigned patterns Standard Patterns For details see To add a predefined pattern to a standard on page 219 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD on page 321 Displaying available patterns The All Patterns list contains the patterns available in the VSA application You can assign available patterns to the selected standard edit existing or define new patterns For details on managing standard patterns see chapter 8 2 2 3 How to Manage Pat terns on page 222 The list can be
23. CALCulatesn FSK DEViation COMPENSATION BEE 410 SENSe IDDEMod NORMalize VALue 2 2 22 2 eror ene eru aaa 410 E lee e KE e EE 411 CALCulate n FSK DEViation COMPensation lt RefDevComp gt This command defines whether the deviation error is compensated for when calculat ing the frequency error for FSK modulation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For newer remote programs use SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 330 Setting parameters lt RefDevComp gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Scales the reference signal to the actual deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the entered nominal deviation for the reference signal RST 1 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue lt Normalize gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset and the compensation of amplitude droop on or off Programming Examples Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the more specific SENSe DDEMod NORMalize commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 5 8 Demodulation Settings on page 324 Setting parameters lt Normalize gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF No compensation for amplitude droop nor UO offset ON Compensation for amplitude droop and UO offset enabled RST 1 SENSe DDEMod SBANd lt SidebandPos gt This command selects the sideband for the demodulation Note that this command is maintained for compatibi
24. Markers Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Individual Marker Seuings ice eren e nr onam ex E 197 e Marker Search Gettngs A 199 e Marker Positioning FUNCHONS cede mtt certc ttr tcn tert cert t cta 200 Individual Marker Settings Access Overview Analysis Marker Markers In VSA evaluations up to 5 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Markers Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Settings All Marker Off ea 1 Code Domain Power Marker nuca C 198 El e 198 PREV E EP 198 Markor AV o gt Beene ere eer tenet eine eoe HERE eR E errr erst reer 199 Assigning the Marker to amp TS uc iaceret rtt xd fecit ide exu En 199 JU MAROES ODE ssepe tiger gente eret ext h p pev eee cag A n rud re E EA 199 Couple WNdOWS seuns ees een a 199 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 347 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 348 X value Def
25. Name lt Pattern Settings Specifies the pattern name from the list of defined patterns You can also configure new patterns see chapter 5 7 3 Pattern Configuration on page 172 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern on page 292 Pattern Configuration Pattern Settings Displays the Pattern Configuration dialog box see chapter 5 7 3 Pattern Configura tion on page 172 Offset Pattern Settings The offset of the pattern is defined with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst see Useful length on page 125 If the position of the pattern within the burst is known it is recommended that you define the offset That will accelerate the pattern search and enhance the accuracy of the burst search Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe on page 292 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue on page 292 Signal Description 5 4 3 Known Data Access Overview Signal Description Known Data The Known Data settings allow you to load a file that describes the possible data sequences in the input signal Additional information provided by the loaded file is displayed at the bottom of the dia log box This information is not editable directly Modulation amp Signal Description 3 Known Data Known Data is needed for the BER measurement and can be used for fine synchronization see Demodulation dialog lv Known Data Filename KnownData_example
26. SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete on page 319 Pattern details Pattern details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed at the upper right hand side of the dialog box You can refer to these details for example when you want to add a new pattern to the standard and want to make sure you have selected the cor rect one Pattern Search On If enabled the VSA application searches for the selected pattern This setting is identi cal to the setting in the Pattern Search dialog box see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 171 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 318 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid pattern has been found When measuring signals that contain a pattern and are aver aged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 317 5 7 4 Pattern Definition Access Meas Config Pattern Config New New patterns can be defined and then assigned to a standard Burst and Pattern Configuration Description Mod Order Symbols Format Binary Hex Decimal Remove H Size 31 Comment For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 221 jp m
27. mmm eS Equali MEAS IQ Meas Filter Filter qualer Filter Signal Compensation Function Error of Transfer Function Fig 4 48 Compensation of the transfer function s error by inserting an equalizer in the receive path For small distortions the reference signal can be determined correctly without pre equalization The equalizer can be calculated by comparing the reference signal and the measured signal and is only applied to the measured signal This is referred to as normal equalizer mode Note that the resulting equalizer function is not simply the inverted distortion function For more complex distortions the reference signal might not be determined correctly due to wrong symbol decisions Despite the resulting imperfect equalizer calculation the estimated equalizer is often good enough to improve the reference signal creation in the succeeding sweep Thus the new equalizer is improved successively This pro cessing mode of the equalizer is called tracking mode After only a few sweeps the results are sufficiently accurate and the learning phase is completed Then the equal izer can be used without additional calculations as long as the input signal remains sta ble If an unstable input has led to an unusable equalizer filter reset the equalizer with the Reset button R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics IQ Input Signal ISI REF IQ Reference Filter Filter Signal Equalizer compensate for Control MEAS Fi
28. seen 305 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RVALue sessi 306 DISPlay WINDow n TRACest Y SCALe esses eene nnne 306 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz lt SCALelb Dhvislon een 306 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 306 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue eese 307 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPAQCing iecit eer nine etnnennn kno kn nene n aha dena RENE 307 CALCulate n STATistics PRESet This command sets the x and y axis of the statistics measurement to measurement dependent default values Usage Event Manual operation See Default Settings on page 157 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram x and y axis To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted To get valid results you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process This is only possible in single sweep mode Parameters ONCE Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements Usage
29. 1 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 2 Inthe file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings you want to load To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system 3 Press the Load button The dialog box is closed and the instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard To store settings as a standard file 1 Configure the measurement as required see chapter 8 2 How to Perform Cus tomized VSA Measurements on page 217 2 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 3 In the File Name field enter the name of the standard for which you want to store settings To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system To insert a new folder select the New Folder button and enter a name in the New Folder dialog box 4 Press the Save button The dialog box is closed and the current measurement settings are stored in a standard file To delete standard files 1 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 2 Inthe Manage VSA Standards file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings file you want to delete Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and sel
30. 1 x is ger iy Hustu m with Xo 0 Xu Xidx Xu XM if Ix gt Rul M with Xu XM 1 if earl y i with Xo 0 Formulae Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSWP StdDev Ou gus zs with Xy YS m 95 ile X95 M ou Pr x x 095 Pr denotes the probability Sorting the values and giving the 95 ile A 6 4 Trace Averaging The index m represents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count The index s represents the st sample within the trace If the measurement results are represented in logarithmic domain the average opera tion is performed on the linear values The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain Measurements Calculation in R amp S FSWP RMS Average s M x e Meas Ref magnitude Error Vector Magnitude EVM Uer Linear Average s M x listed for RMS averaging e Capture Buffer magnitude Xs M M All measurements where trace averaging M B 1 x is possible except for the measurements x sM Ze M A 6 5 Analytically Calculated Filters The following filters are calculated during runtime of the unit and as a function of the operating parameter Alpha or BT Formulae Gauss ETSI TS 100 959 V8 3 0 Filter Type Setting Par
31. A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings In the Digital Standards menu predefined basic settings for standards can be selected and user defined standards stored see chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 132 The most common measurements are predefined as standard settings for a large num ber of mobile radio networks The instrument comes prepared with the following set tings for those standards e Capture length and result length e Signal description e Modulation e Transmit filter and measurement filter e Burst Pattern search configuration Result range alignment Evaluation range settings Display configuration The standard settings are grouped in folders to facilitate selecting a standard e ge ieAe s WIO ous e Jo euleu pJepueis OU WO sJeyllp 11 eeuw pepiwoJd si spueuJuJoo ejouieJ 104 JejeuleJed Le att Predefined Standards and Settings EE 3903 WvoO9L C7 YSN 3903 mue mei ASNS 3904 Wy GLivvl e o uengd Srl 3903 WVO9L pezueeur ZHM 8 0 2 WYO9L v 4 O9L 3903 13snqjeuu JON 3903 S1 3904 YSN 39d3 aN 3933 Ettel 8 7 wee 3904 E N GLivvl e o weyed Srl OOSL 3903 7 pezueeur ZHW 80 2 MSd8 8 t Sag 3903 cav WSS 8v Ws9 Jejue5 C ANON ZH WSS ysungss Gg g Oo weed 98 08v WSS 0 MSND CECR MSIAG 2999Y WSO a4 WS9 _ jsung 191095 Logs ISO 3NON ZH INSO Sesuenb vvL Oorueped 8v4 084 WS9 J CO MSND c90 c
32. Analysis Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured e Configuring Trace 344 e Working BEI 346 e Configuring Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines 355 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 360 e Zooming mt the RE ctc et v atento tc n ne dace 362 Configuring Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the Screen Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Manual configuration of traces is described in chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 193 0 Commands for storing trace data are described in chapter 11 9 1 Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values on page 378 Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe on page 306 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration CAL CGulatesn TRAGest VALus iiir ettet poll en x ERE ERR ER Rn ROSE RR UR 344 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE esee nene emen mener 345 bISPlay WINDowensTTRACeSEPESTATe iirtr aired retenu rnt cutter 346 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue l
33. Coarse Synchronization It is not only possible to check whether the pattern is part of the signal but also to use the pattern for synchronization in order to obtain the correct reference signal For details on synchronization see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Proc ess on page 91 If Auto mode is selected the detected data is used In manual mode you can select one of the following settings Data Default the detected data is used for synchronization i e unknown symbols Use this setting if no pattern is available or if the pattern is short or does not have suitable synchronization properties e g a pattern that consists of only one repeated symbol Pattern Known symbols from a defined pattern are used for synchronization Depending on the signal using the pattern can speed up your mea surement considerably and make it more robust against high carrier frequency offsets Make sure that the pattern is suitable for synchronization e g a GSM pattern Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh PATTern SYNC AUTO on page 332 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh PATTern SYNC STATe on page 332 Fine Synchronization In addition to the coarse synchronization used for symbol decisions a fine synchroni zation is available to calculate various results from the reference signal e g the EVM However when the signal is known to have a poor transmission quality or has a high noise level false symbol decisions are more
34. Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines a reference value on the y axis in the current unit The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the Y Axis Reference Position on page 156 For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 228 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 307 Y Axis Reference Position Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the position of the Y Axis Reference Value on the y axis The position is defined as a percentage value where 0 refers to the bottom edge 100 refers to the top edge of the screen The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is dis played at the reference position Input Output and Frontend Settings For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 228 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 306 Range per Division Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the value range to be displayed per division Since the display consists of 10 divisions by default the displayed range is Range 10 lt Range per Division gt Note If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result ran
35. Demodulation Patern S sin ce coe irate OS Symbol decisions AlgOrit E 97 Demodulation 97 Demodulation process na 92 Known data giess edel 98 Symbol error rate SER Fine synchronization retine 187 Symbol MAPPING E 70 140 ld dem C E 89 ASK aces 88 Differential PSK e T6 FSK caet 80 Mk seet 82 Offset TEE 78 OOK qc 88 PSK sess wl QAM isi ten Het 88 Rotating differentialPSK auf Rotating PSK wa T4 User defined ec 90 Wizard mapWiz EE 90 Symbol number RRESUIE range Stant tenes 179 Symbol rate BASICS E Display Relationship to sample rate ssssssssss 68 Semot acc ce entere 288 Symbol Rate EOT entrer aen tenni 181 Symbol Rate Error SRE BE air Le EE 110 Symbol tables PRESUME TY PO einer eee eren terria 54 Symbols RW per T 17 Format patterns 2 1 2 2 rendered 177 Highlighting 206 Patterns uec d Result tyD6S ege AE dee eb He Etpa ete 17 Window Configuration 206 Synchronization 2 107 COIS M M M 186 Demodulatiom rper ertet 183 Demodulation process ssessseesene 93 Fails troubleshooting 4261 RI 186 Known data 186 187 PalletfiS rp eet er reps 186 EE Em 324
36. Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conven tional mobile radio standards See chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 132 5 4 Signal Description Access Overview Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes burst and pattern detection and allows for the application to calculate an ideal ref erence signal The signal description consists of information on the used modulation and on the signal s structure e IMOGQGUIAUGDE Ree ee te eo eebe 137 e EE 141 S KION EE 144 5 4 1 Modulation Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Modulation The Modulation settings contain modulation and transmit filter settings A live preview of the Constellation UO trace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings The preview area is not editable directly The modulation settings vary depending on the selected modulation type in particular FSK modulation provides some additional settings R amp S FSWP K70 Configuration Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Modulation Settings Mapping FSK Ref Deviation D 0 SR Symbol Rate 3 84 MHz Transmit Filter Alpha BT Preview Preview Constellation Freq Meas amp Ref Start 30 758 MHz Stop 30 758 MHz Fig 5
37. For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range Capture Length f 1 Fig 4 63 Schematic overview of Capture Length Result Range and Evaluation Range The determined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces Result Range The result range defines the symbols from the capture buffer that are to be demodula ted and analyzed together In some cases the data in the capture buffer contains parts that are not relevant for the evaluation task at hand Thus you can exclude them from the result range see chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 177 Result range display The result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis of the capture buffer result diagrams R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics C Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 d amp m aiid i all A iM a ui G Start 0 sym Fig 4 64 Result ranges for a burst signal Result displays whose source is not the capture buffer are based on a single result range such as the EVM vs Time display or the data in the Current column of the Result Summary In this case you can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges Select Result Rng function
38. ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 198 See Marker Type on page 199 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed refere
39. Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 146 Configuring VSA INPut FILTer HPASs STATe State Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSWP in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 146 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 147 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST OFF Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 147 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSWP Parameters S
40. Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 76 sym C Mag CapBuf Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN e 1Clrw Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 76 syn C Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 dBm Start 0 sym Fig 10 13 Solution Result Summary with correct evaluation range setting Make sure that the same samples are evaluated By default the EVM trace dis plays all sample instants e g if the sample rate is 4 the EVM trace shows 4 sam ples per symbol The Result Summary does not automatically evaluate all sample User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 266 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement instants E g fora PSK modulation by default only symbol instants contribute to the EVM result Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mod Offset QPSK SR 1 0 MHz m el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 100 iere SGL ResRange Count 0 Overview ei Cirw B Result Summary a TT NETT Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Biwer Start 3 syrri Stop ivy sym C Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw D Vector I Q Error 1 Clrw Restore Factory Settings Start 2 53
41. Suffix lt ResultType gt CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FERRor Frequency error FSK only FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset UO Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho lt LimitType gt For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value Setting parameters lt LimitState gt ON OFF Activates a limit check for the selected result and limit type RST OFF Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR STAT ON Switch limit check ON Manual operation See Check on page 204 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the limit for the current peak or mean center frequency error limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical R amp S FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA H pnn
42. Symbol Rate The symbol rate also determines the UO bandwidth of the data recording and demodu lation You can change the default rate by entering a value in Hz The minimum symbol rate is 25 Hz The maximum symbol rate depends on the defined Sample Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SRATe on page 288 Signal Description Transmit Filter Type Defines the type of transmit filter An overview of available transmit filters is provided in chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 427 For more information on transmit filters see chapter 4 1 3 Modulation and Demodula tion Filters on page 62 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 288 To define the name of the transmit filter to be used SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe on page 289 To switch off the transmit filter SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER on page 289 To select a user defined filter Load User Filter Transmit Filter Type Opens a file selection dialog box to select the user defined transmit filter to be used Note If a user defined transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 188 a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used For details see chapter 4 1 5 Customized Filters on page 65 Remote command
43. Table 4 17 Optimum constellation radius ratios y and y linear channel for 32APSK Code Rate Modulation coding Y1 Y2 spectral efficiency 2 3 3 74 2 84 5 27 3 4 3 99 2 72 4 87 4 5 4 15 2 64 4 64 5 6 4 43 2 54 4 33 8 9 4 49 2 53 4 30 User defined Modulation In addition to the modulation types defined by the standards modulation including symbol mappings can also be defined according to user requirements In this case the mapping is defined and stored in a specific format vam file format and then loa ded to the VSA application Modulation files in vam format can be defined using a mapping wizard mapwiz an auxiliary tool provided by R amp S via Internet free of charge This tool is a precompiled MATLABO file MATLAB pcode To download the tool together with a detailed description see http www rohde schwarz com search term mapwiz Overview of the Demodulation Process 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process K70 Kernel Settings IQ Capture Buffer Burst Search BRESEEEEEEEEEEED optional Q Data Burst Position Demodulation amp DOREM lvl Symbol Decisions ptional Ref Signal Measurement Filtering optional Fine Estimates Demodulation Settings Display Configuration Modulation amp Signal Ref Signal Result Display Fig 4 42 Demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis o
44. The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows for IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 338 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 191 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 191 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 192 Upper Level E EE 192 Lower L vel BySIeresls e i nnd REESEN SES REN 192 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Wimdow eene 192 AO SCAG AU M 192 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is opti mized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSWP You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 192 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 338 Resetting the Automat
45. ccccsssccceecececeseeceeseeeseeceeecseesaeeeeesaneeeaes 352 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT in irona ddi aaai aii a 352 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzM AximumbRlGHt 352 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK lessen 353 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimum LEET 353 CALCulatesmn MARKersm MINImU m NEXT 2 iiti atti oiii EAR Ed 353 CAL Culate nz M bker mmz MiNimum BIG 353 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNimum P EAK esiste 353 CAL CulatesmsMARKersm siSEAROG EE 353 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz XZ SGLIMeLEFT iara nei iuui IEPEN i 354 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzX GL IMmebRIGHT 354 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XG lMitslGTaATel eneren ennnen etette ororerersrernrnnne nenna 355 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 201 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum
46. mal 8PSK EDGE GSM EDGE A Burst Slot0 e Save Recall Slots Slot Level Full Slot Attenuation 00 dB A1 Multislot Configuration Number Of Slots 174 174 C Close the GSM EDGE Burst Slot0 dialog box 6 In the General tab toggle the State to On to switch the modulation on 7 Close the GSM EDGE AT dialog box 8 Select the RF A signal output to switch the RF transmission on 9 3 2 Analyzer Settings This section helps you get your first valid measurement with a bursted signal It starts with step by step instructions and continues with a more detailed description of further functionality Frequency 1 GHz Ref Level 4dBm Standard GSM 8PSK EDGE To define the settings on the R amp S FSWP 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 7 GHz R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples 3 Press the AMPT key and enter 4 dBm as the reference level This corresponds approximately to the peak envelope power of the signal Start the VSA application by pressing the MODE key and then selecting VSA Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA Press the MEAS key then select the Digital Standards softkey woo Gr X From the file selection list select the GSM folder and then the file EDGE 8PSK Select Load Predefined settings corresponding to the selected standard are loaded The VSA ap
47. see Symbol Rate on page 140 the defined Sample Rate parameter see Sample Rate on page 161 For details on the maximum usable bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 The sample rate and the usable UO bandwidth achieved for the current settings is dis played in the Signal Capture dialog see chapter 5 6 1 Data Acquisition on page 159 Demodulation Bandwidth Measurement Bandwidth Some modulation systems do not use a receive filter In these cases special care should be taken that no interference or adjacent channels occur within the demodula R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics tion bandwidth The Sample rate parameter should be set to a low value see Sam ple Rate on page 161 Typical communication systems demand special receive or measurement filters e g root raised cosine receive filter or EDGE measurement filter If no such filtering is performed care should be taken that neither interfering signals nor adjacent channels fall within the demodulation bandwidth 4 1 3 Modulation and Demodulation Filters Sample points are required for demodulation in the analyzer where only information of the current symbol and none of neighbouring symbols is present symbol points These points are also called ISI free points ISI intersymbol interference If the trans mitter does not provide an ISI free signal after the transmit filter TX filter this condi tion
48. sss 360 Analyzing Meas red dat 5 3 nter ener 226 APSK Modulation e EE Symbol mapping ASCII Trace export orem rr ASK Modulation type rre eon 138 Symbol MAPPING EE 88 Attenuation 154 AUO e 154 Configuration remote 901 Electronic en 154 Mangal 154 OPTION E 154 Protective remote e cte 293 Audio signals Output remite ect cs 148 295 Auto adjustment Triggered measurement tege n rene 338 Auto level IHysteresis ien mee tre rnc e erae Reference level we kic X Auto settings Meastlmoe Aulo gic sre cnr rre ee reus 191 Meastime Manual 2 nee Gila ieee ticiecs 192 Automatic Configuration rr enirn Configuration remote Averaging Measurements 2 eese Bandwidth Demodag frre rr b oo epos 61 EXtensiorOpliOlls ceno tpe raa anna 69 Maximum usable Relationship to sample rate zg Signal processing 60 Usable MaX mE 68 Bit error rate BER Result YPE ei rE E ENEE 21 Burst GSM EDGE Measurement example nennen 241 Burst search Algorithm Auto configuration Configuration Beriodulation pro6ess oorr enne 92 Enabling P 169 Errors Gap WE eu EE TE UE Process Remote Robustness Tolerance P sitire Bursts T lee 13 Information
49. 0 2 3 normalized to the FSK reference deviation Symbol Mapping 1 3 1 3 Fig 4 24 Constellation diagram for 4FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers hee 1 3 1 3 Fig 4 25 Constellation diagram for 4FSK GRAY including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers EEN 1 3 Fig 4 26 Constellation diagram for 4FSK for APCO C4FM and APCO Phase 2 including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Mapping 8FSK NATURAL Symbol Numbers Fig 4 27 Constellation diagram for 8FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4 3 7 Minimum Shift Keying MSK MSK modulation causes modulation dependent phase shifts of 90 which can be shown in an Constellation UO diagram As with PSK demodulation is performed by evaluation of the phase positions Table 4 13 MSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 Table 4 14 MSK GSM Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 4 3 8 d Symbol Mapping Fig 4 28 MSK for GSM and NATURAL and DMSK Constellation Diagram including the symbol map ping Similar to PSK differential coding can also be used with MSK In this case too the information is represented by the transition of two consecutive symbols The block dia gram of the coder is sh
50. 1 1 1 m D D D D D D 1 D 1 1 1 H DH D D H D 1 i D 1 DH D DH H ee eee eee ee e ee ee e 1 D 1 D 1 D D D D D i 1 1 D D H H DH D D i D i 1 rr 1 D 1 D D ft D et ET EE p 4 1 A p 4 p A H H H E D D D D D Poo zi io H H H H eenig 3L x TT 4 M T T 4 4 H r D H E DH H i H i 1 D 1 io NC D D 1 D ke ta 1 D D 1 c i D D 1 D meme Jae L 4 m_n co E E E E E VE EE 1 DH 1 i DH Q DH 1 D 1 D D 1 D D 1 D o I i D H D D D 5 i H i g i oz AL e T 2 4 B Rp 4 KEE 2 O H H d i i i i Ce o i i Ve D D H oo DH D D D H D D 1 H 1 1 Ed H 1 D D D wo D wo 4 D 4 D d eee ee eee See eee eet d H D D i D D D D D e i D e 1 D 1 1 D 1 D D 1 D D 1 D 1 1 D 1 H D H D M E i DE E E P roses tivns H H H e DH H e D 1 1 D 1 D D D D 1 D i D DH D H D H H IN H IN ee ee eee eee eee TTTS d TR R 24 24 H D H D E D D e D 1 D 1 D 1 1 1 D D DH H H DH D D D D i D D DH H DH 1 D 1 n 1 D H D H D H e e e c e e ce ce c ea c ce aea c ce t e eo e N N e co e D i T T DH T Y 1 gp apnyubeyy gp apnyubeyy f ymbol Frequency in APCO25 H D8P SK Wide See eee eee eee ee ee eee ee ee 20 DH D D 1 D T DH D DH D H H 1 H H a 4 d 1 1 H H H H H H H 1 1 D EI EELER e 1 1 1 H H H H H H H
51. 1 Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 3 Constellation I Q diagram for QPSK modulated signal Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM CONS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 383 Constellation UO Rotated The complex source signal as an X Y plot As opposed to the common Constellation UO display the symbol decision instants including the rotated ones are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal This result type is only available for signals with a rotating modulation User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 26 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 ConstRot I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 2 Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1 859 1 859 Fig 3 4 Result display Constellation UO Rotated vs common Constellation I Q for 377 8 8PSK modulation Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM RCON to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 383
52. 2 91 Stop 2 91 d d cA 08 21 13 D Const I Q Meast amp Ref 8 1M Clrw 20 dBm 40 dBriy 60 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 2 91 Fig 10 11 User Pattern for Sync On e Choose a longer Result Range e If the signal is bursted and the bursts are short Make sure your Result Range comprises the entire burst Make sure that Run In Out is not chosen too large since the Run In Out ranges are excluded from the synchronization e If the signal is bursted and contains a pattern Only switch off the burst search if absolutely necessary If you need to switch it off align your Result Range to the pattern make sure it does not exceed the burst ramps and choose Continuous Signal as the Signal Type in the Signal Descrip tion dialog For more information see e chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process on page 91 Message Sync Prefers Longer Pattern This message can only occur if the coarse synchronization is data aided i e is based on a known pattern In case the pattern is very short pattern based coarse synchroni zation might be unstable If demodulation is stable e g you get a reasonable EVM there is no need to change anything Otherwise you have two options e Switch to the non pattern based mode by setting the parameter Coarse Synchro nization Data mum PEN CPC aS User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 260 Frequently Asked Questions see Coarse Synchronization on page 186 f possi
53. 2 91 Stop 2 91 2 Stop 2 91 Fig 4 67 Result display with different numbers of points per symbol window A 1 window B 2 window C 4 window D 16 The displayed points per symbol also determine how many values are returned when the trace data is queried by a remote command see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 381 For results based on the capture buffer one display point is displayed for each sam ple taken i e the display points per symbol are always identical to the sample rate For the Result Summary the number of display points corresponds to the estimation points per symbol By default 1 for QAM and PSK modulated signals and the sample Capture Buffer Display rate for MSK and FSK modulated signals This value also controls which samples are considered for the peak and RMS values and the power result For all other result displays the default number of displayed points per symbol is iden tical to the sample rate 4 8 Capture Buffer Display Up to 200 million symbols can be captured and processed at a time Processing large numbers of samples If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping capture ranges with a size of 256 000 samples each are created ber of samples per symbol for example for the default sample rate of 4 symbol rate the maximum number of symbols to be captured is 50 000 000 see also chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 o The maximum n
54. 2ASK binary is often also referred to as On Off Keying OOK With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Fig 4 39 Constellation diagram for 2ASK 4ASK 4ASK is a 4 ary Amplitude Shift Keying mapping type With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Symbol Mapping Fig 4 40 Constellation diagram for 4AASK 4 3 10 APSK With Amplitude Phase Shift Keying APSK modulation the information is represented by the signal amplitude and the signal phase 16APSK Fig 4 41 Constellation diagram for 16APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB S2 For DVB S2 16APSK mappings the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y R2 R1 depends on the utilized code rate and complies with figure 4 41 4 3 11 Symbol Mapping Table 4 16 Optimum constellation radius ratio y linear channel for 18APSK Code Rate Modulation coding spectral Y efficiency 2 3 2 66 3 15 3 4 2 99 2 85 4 5 3 19 2 75 5 6 3 32 2 70 8 9 3 55 2 60 9 10 3 59 2 57 32APSK For DVB S2 32APSK mappings the ratio of the middle circle radius to the inner circle radius y4 R2 R1 and the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y2 depend on the utilized code rate and comply with table 4 17
55. 80 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 100 MHz proportional up to maximum 80 MHz 100 MHz to 10 GHz 80 MHz MSRA master 100 MHz to 600 MHz 4 3 Symbol Mapping Mapping or symbol mapping means that symbol numbers are assigned to constellation points or transitions in the UO plane e g PSK and QAM In the analyzer the mapping is required to decode the transmitted symbols from the sampled UO or frequency time data records The mappings for all standards used in the analyzer and for all employed modulation modes are described in the following Unless indicated otherwise symbol numbers are specified in hexadecimal form MSB at the left 4 3 1 Symbol Mapping Phase Shift Keying PSK With this type of modulation the information is represented by the absolute phase position of the received signal at the decision points All transitions in the UO diagram are possible The complex constellation diagram is shown The symbol numbers are entered in the diagram according to the mapping rule BPSK NATURAL Fig 4 7 Constellation diagram for BPSK including the symbol mapping QPSK Fig 4 8 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for CDMA2000 FWD and DVB S2 Symbol Mapping Fig 4 11 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for WCDMA Symbol M
56. Amplitude Droop gt lt Power gt lt Symbol Rate Error gt Note that the Symbol Rate Error was appended at the end to provide compatibility to previous versions and instruments For each result type both the current and statistical values are provided The order of the results is as follows result1 current result mean lt result1_peak gt lt result1_stddev gt result1 95 ile gt result2 current lt result2_mean gt Empty cells in the table return nothing The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected PSK MSK and QAM modulation returns 85 values FSK modulation returns 55 values The unit of each value depends on the par ticular result For more details on the Result Summary see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 Equalizer For Equalizer diagrams the command returns the y axis values of the equalizer trace The number of returned values depends on the result type e For impulse response diagrams filter length sample rate 1 e For frequency response channel and group delay diagrams 4096 values You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 379 Multi Source For multi source diagrams the data for one source is provided in one trace the data for the other source in another trace By default the data for the spectrum of the Real Imag d
57. BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM IEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 Frequency Absolute The instantaneous frequency of the signal source the absolute value is displayed in Hz Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal e Capture Buffer mu EP EIN CPC RN UU Sus User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 30 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays Ell Meas amp Ref signal FREQ uas e ZMEASQ 2 z dt with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 Capture buffer l d FREQ crr r Som di ZCapt t When evaluating the capture buffer the absolute frequency is derived from the mea sured phase with Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate see Sample Rate on page 161 Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Frequency Absolute result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 This measu
58. Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSWP User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 380 UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the UO data in the entire capture buffer is exported For the maximum of 200 000 000 samples you require several Gigabytes of free space on your storage device How to Export and Import I Q Data Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSWP User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe on page 398 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 398 7 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and
59. Display Configuration button in the Overview b Select the lj Delete icon for window 4 Close the SmartGrid mode by selecting the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key 3 In the EVM vs Time display window 1 add a maximum hold trace by pressing the TRACE key and then selecting the Trace Config softkey see chapter 9 2 5 Averaging Several Evaluations on page 240 4 Re evaluate the whole capture buffer by pressing the SWEEP key and then the Refresh softkey 5 Use the Select Result Rng softkey to navigate through your capture buffer Thus you can determine which peak was caused by which burst mE HN EFC ee User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 245 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples spectrum VSA X Ref Level 25 00 dBm Std EDGE 6PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 10 GHz ResLen 148 SGL Stat Count B BURST PATTERN A EVM 1 Crw 2 Max B Result Summary Continuous 8weep 0 26 t 0 67 29 deg Continue 3 e Select Result Range eg T X Carrier Freq Error Sweep ER co Gain Imbalance 6 4 4 L Quadrature Error e Amplitude Droop VR i Vals ias ATA Wr iP M Ses IW LM unl S Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym C Mag CapBuf 1 Oe Statistic Count Auta Select Result Rng 2 Com Start 0 sym Stop 10000 sym Fig 9 9 Navigation through the capture buffer 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges The Result Length is the number of s
60. File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product
61. Frequency in EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape 1 H 4 e 1 D D DN i D D D D r D D H D D D D D uc D D D D 7 D H D D D D t D D 1 D D r H 1 D D D T J t 60 80 100 gp epniiuBejq Frequency in f ymbol EDGE Wide Pulse Shape EZE DEEN wp mm E ml mm mm D D 7 D r D D H D D D 7 D D r DH 1 D D DH gp apnyiubeyy feymbol Frequency in UO Data File Format iq tar Half Sine Magnitude dB D 4 D D D DH J 1 D DH 1 D ES D D 1 D J 1 D D D 1 E D 1 02 04 06 O86 1 12 14 16 18 2 Frequency in fsymbol Linearized GMSK ee d e wm mm wm sl wm wm mm wm de Magnitude dB Frequency in f ymbol A 7 VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools se
62. INPut GAIN STATe on page 300 INPut GAIN VALue on page 300 Input Coupling Input Settings The RF input of the R amp S FSWP can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted Input Output and Frontend Settings However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 293 RF Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF
63. Manual operation See Alignment on page 179 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet FitOffset This command shifts the display range relative to the reference time by the number of given symbols The resolution is 1 symbol A value gt 0 results in a shift towards the right and a value lt 0 results in a shift towards the left Suffix lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt FitOffset gt numeric value Range 8000 to 8000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Offset on page 179 Configuring VSA CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue Reference This command defines the reference point for the display Suffix p 1 6 Setting parameters Reference TRIGger BURSt PATTern TRIGger The reference point is defined by the start of the capture buffer BURSt The reference point is defined by the start center end of the burst PATTern The instrument selects the reference point and the alignment RST TRIGger Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Reference on page 178 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset lt VOffset gt This command defines an offset to numbering of the symbols Except capture buffer
64. NONE No limit check result available yet PASS All values have passed the limit check FAIL At least one value has exceeded the limit MARGIN currently not used RST NONE 11 10 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the VSA application can not only be measured by the VSA application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the VSA application can be exported for further analysis in external applications MMEMOory LOADNO S TA Ce T 398 MMEMoer STORES AO COMM EE 398 MMEMon STObRecnzJOSTATe enne enne senes nsns nre nen reri re rrr n nnns 398 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See 1 Q Import on page 211 MMEMory STORe n IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Inst
65. SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER on page 289 SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 288 Alpha BT Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for transmit filter is available for RC RRC Gauss and GMSK filter Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa on page 288 5 4 2 Signal Structure Access Overview Signal Description Signal Structure The Signal Structure settings describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a pattern to which the instru ment can be synchronized thus adapting the result range A visualization of the currently defined signal structure is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box R amp SSFSWP K70 Configuration 148 sig Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst CrN 148 sym 546 462 us Max Length 546 462 us Run In 3 sym 11 077 us Run Out 3 sym 11 077 us Pattern EE un Jeer contig Offset 58 sym 214 154 ps Description Signal TYDE TEE 142 Burst ae e ud ced it ve aa eto tendit e e d e dot 142 L Min Length Max Length 143 i 7 RT Oo 143 E icr NNI 143 Pattern Setll gs ecc tete cerneret ttd c td at t E n ct Ed 143 L TEE 143 L Patien ee ie 1 erecti rne hori eg eb ee doa deba 143 Las EE 143 Signal Type Deter
66. SEQuence DTME oro rtr rne tnn e reme enn pre e n Fi p e rr nas TRIGger SEQuence HOLDOoff TIME t rnt rtr terrre rrr e rennen TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HYSTeresis c ott tree n prn in t ene e 311 TRIGdge r SEQuence EL AE Te 311 TRlGoert SGEOuencelL EVelJObower ne rnn n EEn AEAEE EE NEEN ESEE 312 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsport notet ener rr nere 311 TRIGge r SEQuence el 312 TRIGger SEQUENCE SOURCE vs ccs cacsenceveencencesecassrnessevsusneesnsansevanneoscencascohennsarnesteeadesiespessdosavennetacevaaesanssentnennes 312 Index Symbols 4ASK Constellation Eeer 88 8PSK Constellation diagram ucc tr rires 73 16APSK Constellation diagram ccce cocotte rre 89 95 ile FORMU A we 438 A Aborting Rl M 166 167 ACIDE Coupling textes irte ta cec tes 146 153 Activating VSA remote ni rete cot n tein cere nates 275 Alignment FRESUIE range err eren ree nets 179 AlphalBT 5 2 rir rmt cte ede 141 189 Amplitude V el ue UCL TEE Configuration remote Distortion effect d up C M Amplitude droop Compensation rct eroe rrr eae rr rene 181 Definition Formula Analysis Bandwidth definition iocis 68 BUOM m 193 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote sssss 360 Analysis line Configuration MSRA remote
67. See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 190 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSWP automatically according to the cur rent measurement settings Manual execution of automatic adjustment functions is described in chapter 5 12 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 191 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACects lt SCALelAUlTOONCE 336 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectstSCALelAUTOALL nnns 336 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURatioh 2 2 ccrtc eee i NERVEN 336 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODERNER nennen 336 Configuring VSA SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer seeeeeeeeeee eene 337 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis Uber 337 SENSe JADJust CONFig ti TEIG euo iani kept apre rr Rein ab Reuter e eR nan decree 338 SENSE ADJusRE E Vel ccce corr enmt aaa re ket di tt cr men enne ie aan 338 SENSe DDEMod PERESSURLEWM6l iii oriretur eoe cE dai roue reco tuc itp EENEG 338 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Not available for statistical results Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window on page 156 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL Au
68. Select Result Rng SONKEY RAM SEQUGMICER UE Aborting remote i Activating remote retener retentis 342 Mode remote inet nn ta ottiene 342 Ix iter TEE 340 Settings Filename sen cit niter tote a ei aE Restoring files a Storage locatloh rennen 133 Settings files eler e ees M 134 Loading 134 Saving 134 Signal capture soe 199 Isemote control 2c etes 307 Signal description CONMMQUIATION M Configuration remote Se Elan E Signal model cre teretes ge Signal source acm 294 Signal structure Buist settings souge EES edd 142 V elle UCL ET 141 acu teeets 290 Signal type Continuous Burst Signal ssssssss 142 Single sweep TE 166 SINGIS ZOOM ET 208 Slope Efe 165 312 Softkeys Auto level EE 153 191 Capture Offset 165 GENTET apristas gees 3490 Continue Single Sweep a 167 Continuous SWEEP eee ei nete 166 Display configuration nnns 204 Export ee 4 211 External 163 Free Run 5 163 UO Power 164 164 211 IF Power 2211 192 Marker to Trace 199 Meastime Auto we 191 Meastime Manual 192 Mii Lorient 2 201 ModAcc Limits 203 Nesbitt titre eee Pet eere 201 Next Peak nete etit t br tein 201 Norm
69. Setting parameters lt VOffset gt numeric value Range 100000 to 100000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Symbol Number at Reference Start on page 179 SENSe DDEMod TIME lt ResultLength gt The command determines the number of displayed symbols result length Setting parameters lt ResultLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 64000 RST 800 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Result Length on page 178 Configuring VSA 11 5 8 Demodulation Settings During demodulation of the vector signal some undesired effects that may occur during transmission can be compensated for Furthermore you can influence the synchroni zation process Manual configuration of the demodulation process is described in chapter 5 9 Demod ulation Settings on page 179 SENSe DDEMod ECALC MODE ecce tt te ent te ettetettttnns 324 I SENSe uDDEModIEGALc OF ESOl aei epue eter ebat d ine pora re dte aate ENEE EES EES ee 325 SENS amp IDBEMod EPIater AUTO cadit iacere eee eoe pesi eee pea p Do bd 325 SENSeJDDEMod EPRale F VALUE ei otorga ES 326 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGnm enema 326 SENSeTDDEMed EQUalizeiL ORE 1 cento ttt tat tier
70. Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym 3 To go back to a previously evaluated result range within the same capture buffer press the SWEEP key and then the Select Result Rng softkey By selecting dif ferent result ranges for example using the rotary knob you can move the high lighted blue area through the capture buffer and choose your currently demodula ted result range Se acc M iJ 239 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples Select Result Range x C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym The results for this range are displayed in the Current column in the Result Sum mary in the eye diagram and in the symbol table Note Generally all Clear Write traces and the are affected by this selection 9 2 5 Averaging Several Evaluations By default all measurement windows are displayed with a single trace which is the Clear Write trace This trace displays the result of the current evaluation i e the high lighted blue area from the example in chapter 9 2 4 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer on page 239 However for most real world measurement tasks you need to obtain a result that is averaged over a certain number of evaluations or a worst case result of a certain number of evaluations This section explains how to achieve this To evaluate EVM vs Time 1 Configure win
71. Symbol error rate SSES 187 Syntax Known data files ier renes 431 T Trace Export ConfiguratiOh sares ree nodes i restent EN 196 Data mode 196 Header information sax 197 Storage locatio sex moe esci EE 197 e 195 Averaging formulae 439 Capture Buffer remote 382 Cartesian Diagrams remote 383 Configuration s oerte 2 193 Configuring remote control 344 Equalizer remote AAA TIU piecace Export format Exporting Exporting data Measurement signal ModE ottico tns uu Mode remote tire reete erepta deuten eet Multi Source remote AA Polar Diagrams remote Reference signal 00e0ea Result Summary remote Retrieving data remote Selecting scs oes toe enitn ipa Settings remote control ssssssses Settings predefined oett rr ore Symbols remote ei Troubleshootlng enn die tento erret rens Transmit filler cios x cat red ban nager ene extensa seti tet dnt Alpha BT Predefined Type retis User defined Using as measurement filter Trigger Configulatioti EE 161 Drop OUt tifTie geseet eere treten tene 165 External remote EE 312 OIG OPE iiec etc Ee 165 HyStEreS S M 165 OMSET eegen Eden esa Iesu vss COL ates 164 OUTPUT eX 149 R rmo
72. Synchronization in the VSA application is performed in two stages coarse synchroni zation that precedes the reference signal generation and fine synchronization based on the reference signal The coarse synchronization stage can work data aided i e based on a known pat tern or non data aided i e based on the unknown data symbols The default is a non data aided coarse synchronization In the case that a pattern is part of signal the user can switch to data aided synchronization The fine synchronization stage always works data aided Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols indicates that one of the synchronization stages has too few symbols to ensure that the synchronization is robust The message is given if e Coarse Synchronization Non Data Aided User Pattern for Sync Off Estimation range shorter than 40 symbols see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 107 e Fine Synchronization Estimation range shorter than 10 symbols User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 259 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement JEE see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 107 Solution e If the signal contains a pattern set Coarse Synchronization Pattern see Coarse Synchronization on page 186 Example measurement of a GSM EDGE pattern that has a length of 26 symbols C Mag CapBuf 1 Crw D Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw erter EE TUSTTRE RINT VT 20 dBm 40 d m 60 dBm Stop 200 sym Start
73. Table 4 21 Phase transfer functions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortions analyzer Phase Transier Function Tranemtier Phase Eno ae o M 48 5 u 2 40 8 S 4 2 0 Input Power log Phase Tianster F unetoe Anayzer Phase Eat in Bb E 14 2 m 6 4 2 0 Input Poser Gog A logarithmic display of the phase transfer functions is shown in table 4 21 The ana lyzer trace is shifted by the phase described above as against the transmitter trace Noise Noise Ardyze Imaginary Fig 4 58 Additive noise A 64QAM signal with additive noise is shown in figure 4 58 only the first quadrant is shown The symbol decision thresholds are also shown The noise signal forms a cloud around the ideal symbol point in the constellation dia gram Exceeding the symbol decision boundaries leads to wrong symbol decisions and increases the bit error rate Similar displays are obtained in case of incorrect transmitter filter settings When an incorrect filter is selected crosstalk occurs between neighbouring symbol decision points instead of the ISI free points The effect increases the more the filtering deviates from actual requirements Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The two effects described cannot be distinguished in the Constellation UO diagram but in statistical and spectral analyses of the error signal Channel transmission distortion Durin
74. XTIM DDEM MEAS Selects the meas signal CALC FORM PHAS Selects the phase measurement CALC DDEM SPEC STAT ON Selects the spectral display of the phase Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 206 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Feed gt Selects the signal source and for the equalizer also the result type for evaluation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 8 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 365 Only for the Equalizer Impulse Response and Equalizer Frequency Response this command is required Configuring the Result Display Setting parameters Feed string XTIM DDEM MEAS Measured signal XTIM DDEM REF Reference signal XTIM DDEM ERR VECT Error vector XTIM DDEM ERR MPH Modulation errors XTIM DDEM MACC Modulation accuracy XTIM DDEM SYMB Symbol table TCAP Capture Buffer XTIM DDEM IMP Equalizer Impulse Response XFR DDEM RAT Equalizer Frequency Response XFR DDEM IRAT Equalizer Channel Frequency Response Group Delay CALCulate lt n gt FORMat Format This command defines the result type of the traces Which parameters are available depends on the setting for the data source see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 and table 3 1 Whether the result type shows absolute or relative values is defined usin
75. always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 278 DISP FORMAL e 364 DISPlayEWINDBoewstns SIZE cri aeo eee ase eaae ou vo Saa aee 365 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL Configuring the Result Display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 368 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 8 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters fo
76. fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Sp
77. it is not used for synchronization Otherwise the results would be strongly distorted If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 328 Offset EVM The offset EVM is only available for shaped or normal Offset QPSK modulated sig nals Unlike QPSK modulation the Q component of Offset QPSK modulation is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain The symbol time instants of the and the Q component therefore do not coincide The offset EVM controls the calculation of all results that are based on the error vector It affects the EVM Real Imag and Vector I Q result displays as well as the EVM results in the Result Summary EVM and MER You can configure the way the VSA application calculates the error vector results If Offset EVM is disabled the VSA application substracts the measured signal from the reference signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period one that corresponds to the component and one that corresponds to the Q component If Offset EVM is enabled however the VSA application compensates the delay of the Q component with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector That means that the er
78. lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 208 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 362 R amp S FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA p yu 72 mes Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 208 See Restore Original Display on page 209 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 209 11 7 5 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 363 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple z0oomzGTATe nnne ne 363 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoo
79. tings on page 142 and Min Gap Length on page 170 Refer to figure 4 43 for an illustration of the three parameters The detected bursts in the capture buffer for the current burst search settings are indi cated by blue lines in the preview area of the Burst Search configuration dialog box see chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 168 Information Expected Burst Length 148 4 sym Burst Found Preview Preview Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym rere User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 95 Overview of the Demodulation Process Power Averaged Calculate Average Filter Length Calculate Threshold Find Next Rising amp Falling Edge Calculate Acceptable Burst Lengths Burst Length Okay Add to Burst List Fig 4 44 Burst search algorithm 4 4 2 IQ Pattern Search The I Q pattern search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped The main benefit of the UO pattern search is that it enables an alignment of the result range to the pattern Furthermore this stage can function as a filter If the burst search and UO pattern search are switched on and the parameter Meas Only If Pattern Symbols Correct is set to true only bursts with the correct pattern are demodulated see Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct on page 172 During the UO pattern search stage the capture buffer is searched for an UO pattern by trying different time and frequency hypo
80. value in the modulation settings see Alpha BT on page 141 Remote command Measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa on page 333 Transmit filter SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa on page 288 Evaluation Range Configuration Access Overview Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which range of the result is to be evaluated either the entire result range or only a specified part of it The calculated length of the specified range is indicated beneath the entries A visualization of the evaluation range in relation to the result range with the current settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box The green bar below the trace indicates the defined result range indented red lines indicate defined start and stop symbols see Evaluation range display on page 126 The visualization is not editable directly Evaluation Range Configuration Result Range Evaluation Range Evaluation Range Entire Result Range 0 sym 148 sym Start 3 0 sym Stop 144 75 sym Length 142 0 sym 524 308 ps Visualization Pattern For details on the evaluation range see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 122 For an example on setting the evaluation range see chapter 9 3 5 Setting the Evalua tion Range on page 247 Evaluating the Entire Result Range irte dried selenide 190 SEDENS A EE 190 Evaluating the Entire Result Range If enabled the entire result range is
81. 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Enabling Pattern Searches on page 171 See Pattern Search On on page 175 11 5 6 3 Configuring Patterns New patterns can be defined and assigned to a signal standard Useful commands for configuring patterns described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog on page 291 Remote commands exclusive to configuring patterns ISENSe IDDEMod SEARCh S YING COMME ihe 42 tuner ct a ESA SEENEN 318 SENSe IDDDEMod SEARch S d ee e EE 319 I SENSeJDDEMod SEARGh S YNO DElgle niii heu ntes rata rena eed aai ta 319 SENSe DDEMod SEAR CHS d Le ER EE 319 I SENSe IDDEMod SEARCMSYNONAME itu rato Rue Eee eere eon nue 320 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate eeceeeseesesessesssses eene h nnne nn nnn nnn nnn 320 SENSe DDEMod SEARcCh SYNC PATTem ADD iocur ua accu ica oto eire d ee 321 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMowve essere nennen 321 SENSe DDEMod SEARGhIS YINCETEXT cccgeecetecsepecseteasee tere ecran t t Egan o eee a arkanai 321 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent Comment This command defines a comment to a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 320 Setting parameters Comment string Configuring VSA Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Patte
82. 279 Restore Pattern Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the pattern files predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 279 Configuration According to Digital Standards Access Meas Config Overview Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 420 For detailed instructions see chapter 8 1 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards on page 215 Eigital Sta ANS e tereti ddr tte ene tite eae pe Deum nece dd coe denen 133 Configuration According to Digital Standards L Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files eee 133 ei du ORO 133 Ml uu NET 133 L Comma amas it M pedit eo dca ent dis D 134 L Load Standard tici etes SCHEER 134 L Saye Slada PEERS 134 EE E o EE 134 L Restore Standard Elles 134 Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conven tional mobile radio standards Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Digital Standards Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive
83. 3 4 Parameters for PSK QAM and MSK modulation Parameter Description SCPI Parameter EVM RMS Peak Error Vector Magnitude normalized to mean reference EVM power by default see Normalize EVM to on page 184 MER RMS Peak Modulation Error Ratio SNR Phase Error RMS The phase difference between the measurement vector and PERR Peak the reference vector Magnitude Error The average RMS and peak magnitude error in The MERRor RMS Peak magnitude error is the difference of the measured magnitude to the magnitude of the reference signal The magnitude error is normalized to the mean magnitude of the reference signal Carrier Frequency The mean carrier frequency offset in Hz CFERror Error Symbol Rate Error Difference between the currently measured symbol rate and SRER the defined symbol rate in ppm Only for PSK QAM or UserQAM modulation and only if compensation for SRE is activated see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation on page 179 Rho RHO UO Offset Offset in the original input OOFFset UO Imbalance Not for BPSK IQIMbalance Gain Imbalance Not for BPSK GIMBalance Quadrature Error Not for BPSK QERRor Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter ADRoop Power The power of the measured signal MPOWer Table 3 5 Parameters for FSK modulation only FSK deviation erroris the difference of the FSK deviation of the measured signal
84. 333 Type Defines the measurement filter type if the Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto setting is not enabled Predefined An overview of available measurement filters is provided in chapter A Filter gt 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 428 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 188 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration User User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For more information on user defined filters see chapter 4 1 5 Cus tomized Filters on page 65 None No measurement filter is used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe on page 333 To turn off the measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER on page 334 To use a user defined filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on page 333 To define the name of the measurement filter Load User Filter Type Opens a file selection dialog box to select the user defined measurement filter to be used This setting is only available if User is selected as the Filter Type Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER on page 334 Alpha BT Type Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor or filter bandwidth are available for RC RRC and Gauss filters If the measurement mode is automatically selected according to the transmit filter this setting is identical to the Alpha BT
85. 384 Capture Buffer Results For the result displays based on the capture buffer the command returns the y axis values of the data that is stored in the capture buffer The number of returned values depends on the size of the capture buffer and the sample rate For example a capture buffer size of 500 symbols in combination with a sample rate of 4 would return 2000 level values The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for UO input The unit is dBm Note that the trace results return only the values for the currently displayed capture buffer range see also chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display this command returns a maximum of 25 000 values corresponding to the displayed trace points Retrieving Results You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 379 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams For cartesian diagrams magnitude phase frequency real imag eye diagrams the command returns the y values of the trace The number of returned values is the product of the Result Length and the display points per symbol The unit depends on the specified unit See chapter 11 5 2 7 Scaling and Units on page 302 You can query the x val
86. 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 164 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 164 Configuring VSA TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 164 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt This command selects the trigger slope Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 165 This command selects th
87. 417 Manual operation See Symbol Rate on page 140 SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa Alpha This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters Alpha numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 141 See Alpha BT on page 189 SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME Name This command selects a transmit filter and automatically switches it on For more information on transmit filters refer to chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 427 Configuring VSA Setting parameters Name string Name of the Transmit filter an overview of available transmit fil ters is provided in chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 427 Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 141 See Load User Filter on page 141 SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe lt TXFilterState gt Use this command to switch the transmit filter off To switch a transmit filter on use the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command Setting parameters lt TXFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF Switches the transmit filter off ON Switches the transmit filter specified by SENSe DD
88. A em e e e nodu nacho mm em e dm mm em nnn VI gp apnyubepy 100 feymbol Frequency in w Narro Low Pass 20 X eee d e mm cht eet ee mr A a mm mr mm mm ee ba mm e mm mm de mm mm mm ms ei D AE Aesmeme ale eseseebeseemedeeesee sali eoo eee eee eee eee G eeng gp apnyiubepy eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee BD L D 4 056 08 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 8 feymbol 0 2 100 Frequency in Formulae Low Pass Wide 20 OA 0L L BZ O ET Ag eee gp epniiuBey eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee BO L 100 14 16 1 6 1 2 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in f ymbol Rectangular 20 E VI 1 8 1 6 1 4 1 2 fsymbol 0 8 0 6 0 4 ee ees elleie Seier o ei Cee ee Cee ee eee M E eee et Ae mme e e ele eeeeebemee me dee 2 D aM Hs 60 80 100 gp apnyiubepy Frequency in ISI Filters Low The following frequency responses are obtained when using a low ISI measurment fil ter and the Transmit filter indicated in the title of each diagram Formulae APCO25 CAFM q 4 2 2 pBp 2 2 24 2 2 22 2Bp 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 24 2 2 2 2 2 2p 2 22 24 20 N N i aaa H D D 7 1 D D D D D D 1 D o o Sm e eq ioo einn m uim mm sys seen quen m mi Tr
89. All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 151 Note In MSRA mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA Master For MSRA applications only the query command is available 11 5 2 5 Configuring VSA Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 151 Amplitude Settings Amplitude and scaling settings allow you to configure the vertical y axis display and for some result displays also the horizontal x axis Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 293 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 338 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel eese 299 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eeeesesssseses 299 SENSe DDEModi PRESSEBREENVGl 2 inpune nutrit ctun appe nene ARENS 300 INPat GAIN ADU usus ead rte taa d lai ee e htnc edges 300 eise e E TAM Em 300 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt Ref
90. BER error bits number of analyzed bits As a prerequisite for this measurement the VSA application must know which bit sequences are correct i e which bit sequences may occur This knowledge must be provided as a list of possible data sequences in xml format which is loaded in the VSA application see chapter 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions on page 129 Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the R amp S FSWP VSA application is provided in the instrument free of charge See chapter 8 2 3 2 How to Create Known Data Files on page 224 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays If such a file is loaded in the application the BER result display is available Available for source types e Modulation Accuracy Note that this measurement may take some time as each symbol decision must be compared to the possible data sequences one by one The BER measurement is an indicator for the quality of the demodulated signal High BER values indicate problems such as e inadequate demodulation settings poor quality in the source data e false or missing sequences in the Known Data file result range alignment leads to a mismatch of the input data with the defined sequences A BER value of 0 5 means that for at least one measurement no matching sequence was found See also chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and
91. CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM ccccccccsesccessseeceneeees 387 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispcF Ebror 388 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift ccceeeeees 389 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic cFSK DERROr 389 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation 390 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation 390 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance 390 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance 391 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc MERor 391 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer eseuse 392 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset ssuuue 393 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc PERor 393 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc OERor 394 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepchRHO 394 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic NR 394 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc GbRtror 395 CALCulate lt n gt BERate Format Queries the Bit Error Rate results The available results are described in chapter
92. CAT CURR Query the names of all defined patterns assigned to the current standard D D Enable pattern search D D DEM SEAR SYNC SEL EDGE TSC CUST Programming Examples Select a pattern DDEM STAN SYNC OFFS 10 Ignore the first 10 symbols of the signal before comparing pattern DDEM STAN SYNC OFFS STAT ON DDEM SEAR SYNC STAT ON DDEM STAN SAVE C TEMP CustomizedBurstMeas INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until it has finished ie Retrieving Results TRAC3 DATA TRACEI Query the trace results of the capture buffer display Results TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Query the results of the result summary Results A Annex Abbreviations The following sections are provided for reference purposes and include detailed infor mation such as formulae and abbreviations Abbreviations A 1 Abbreviations Predefined Standards and Settings Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data Known Data File Syntax Description gni UO Data File Format iq tar The following abbreviations are commonly used in the description of the R amp S FSWP K70 option Abbreviation Meaning See section FSK Frequency Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted in the fre quency Frequency Shift Keying FSK ISI Inter symbol Interference ISI free demodula
93. DDEMod TIME on page 323 Reference Defines the reference for the result range alignment The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Capture the capture buffer Burst the detected burst Pattern the detected pattern Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue on page 323 5 9 5 9 1 Demodulation Settings Alignment Defines the type of alignment of the result range to the reference source The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Remote command CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment DEFault on page 322 Offset Defines the offset of the result range to the alignment reference The result of the cur rent setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Note Note the following restrictions to this parameter e An offset lt 0 is not possible if you align the result range to the left border of the capture buffer e An offset that moves the pattern outside the result range is not allowed For exam ple if you align the result to the left border of the pattern only offsets S 0 are allowed Otherwise you would never be able to find the pattern within the result range Remote command CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet on page 322 Symbol Number at Reference Start Defines the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment refer ence so
94. DDEMod SEARch MBURSt CALC lt SelResRangeNr gt Sets the result range to be displayed after a single sweep e g a burst number Setting parameters SelResRangeNr numeric value Range 1 to 1000000 RST 1 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 11 5 6 Configuring VSA Manual operation See Select Result Rng on page 168 SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue lt SweepCount gt This command sets the statistics count For more information see Statistic Count on page 167 Setting parameters lt SweepCount gt numeric value 0 activates Auto mode numeric value gt 0 Activates Manual mode and sets the statistics count to the cor responding number Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Statistic Count on page 167 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent lt Counter gt This command queries the current statistics counter value which indicates how many result ranges have been evaluated For results that use the capture buffer as a source the number of used capture buffers can be queried Setting parameters lt Counter gt CAPTure STATistics STATistics Returns the number of result ranges that have been evaluated CAPTure Returns the number of used capture buffers evaluated RST STATistics Configuring Bursts and Patterns The burst and pattern search setting
95. Displays 3 GroupDelay Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 CALC FORM GDEL to define the group delay result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 384 3 2 16 Frequency Response Magnitude Magnitude of the frequency response of the current equalizer Note that the frequency response of the equalizer is not a pure inverted function of the channel response as both functions are calculated independantly The frequency response is calculated by determining an optimal EVM for the input signal User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 36 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 17 1 FreqRespMag Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 CALC FORM MA
96. EVM Mag meas ref The default result type is EVM The following result types are available chapter 3 2 7 Error Vector Magnitude EVM on page 27 e chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag UO on page 47 chapter 3 2 34 Vector I Q on page 56 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL EVEC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 Modulation Errors The difference between the modulated complex samples in the measurement and the modulated reference signal Modulation measurement signal Modulation reference signal For example Magnitude Error Mag meas Mag ref The default result type is Magnitude Error The following result types are available chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 chapter 3 2 25 Phase Error on page 44 chapter 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute on page 33 chapter 3 2 14 Frequency Error Relative on page 34 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays El Modulation Accuracy Paraeters that characterize the accuracy of modulation The default result type is Result Summary The following result types are available chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 e chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured
97. FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance type This command queries the results of the UO imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation Query parameters type none IO imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average UO imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak UO imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of UO imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of UO imbalance error Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor type This command queries the results of the magnitude error measurement of digital demodulation Retrieving Results Query parameters type none RMS magnitude error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS magnitude errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps PCTL 9596 percentile of RMS magnitude error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum magnitude errors over several Sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of magnitude errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer type This command queries the results of the power measurement of digital demo
98. MINimum lt MinGapLength gt This command defines the minimum time between two bursts A minimum time with decreased level must occur between two bursts The default unit is symbol The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MinGapLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Min Gap Length on page 170 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that a measurement is performed only if a burst is found The command is available only if the burst search is activated see SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe on page 316 11 5 6 2 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt MEAS BURS MEAS Measurement is always performed BURS Measurement is performed only if a burst is found RST MEAS Manual operation See Measuring only if burst was found on page 169 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe lt SearchState gt This command switches the search for a signal burst on or off Setting parameters lt SearchState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance lt SearchTolerance gt This command controls burst search tolerance Setting parameters lt SearchTolerance gt numeric value Range 0 to 100000 RST 4 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Search Tolerance on page 170 Pattern Searches The pattern search commands d
99. MSIG 314 Weg G aS WS9 bag jsunguon Jee C ANON ZH NSO eziuoJy o vvL Oorueped 8v4 08S WSO CO MSND t c90 c MSING UAS Weg ZOSL WS9 ee Jejuo E ANON ZH WSO jsungrew Gt LvL GO o Wweped Srl 0oSL WSS 0 MSND t 80 2 MSING ON Weg ws J93 Spam abuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sang Jet 9je1 Budden Idd uonenjeaq jueuiuBiv ynsey ulayed 10 UE 104 YOIeAS l1g eudiv juusueJ Joquis uone npoIN pyepuejs Jopjo4 sBuijes pue spsepuejs peuyoepoud Jo SI L Laigpt Predefined Standards and Settings e ge ieAe s WO4 ous e JO SWEU pJepuejs OU WO SJOYIP 11 eSeuw pepiwoJd si spueuJuJoo ejouieJ Jo 1ejeureJed Le att 2 LOSL Weg MSH 3503 bester C XSH 3903 esingepiM euer me Wvo9 edeug esind 3903 usu wy g Z4i v o wened LLL V ueu 3933 ep 2001 zHMSze WvOOSI v L po 3903 EN asing bOSL VOS MOJJEN MSH 3503 eae on E edeus MOJJEN 49 U99 me Wope asind wo 3904 usu wv S Z4i v o wened LLL V ueu 3533 ueNdOQ3 zHisze Wepgt ei O91 3903 LU LOS Sd YSH 2007 esind epi C Heu 3903 esingepiM euer _ 0081 Sd edeug esind 4004 usH s SLZA o wened LL D SH 3903 ep 200 zHisze SdO viuc dO 3933 Z esind ALS Sd ROLEN ySH 3903 er C edeus esingMoue euer _ 00S1 Sd asind wo 3903 vue ys SLZA Y o wened LLL O SH 3903 ueN3OQ3 zHisze SdO viuc dO 3603 Jet a907 Wvoze 7 YSN 3903 Lotu
100. OQPSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 2 Quadrature e Quadrature Inphase Inphase Offset QPSK reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal with respect to nor mal QPSK and therefore the demands on amplifier linearity by avoiding zero cross ings A distinction is made in the analyzer display In the Vector I Q result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is not compensated for The display corresponds to the physical diagram shown in table 4 12 In the Constellation UO result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is compensated for The display corresponds to the logical mapping as in figure 4 22 pru PE KCN ee User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 79 4 3 6 Symbol Mapping OQPSK Fig 4 22 Constellation diagram for OQSK GRAY including the symbol mapping Frequency Shift Keying FSK To illustrate symbol mappings for FSK modulations the symbol numbers are marked in the logical mapping diagram versus the instantaneous frequency An instantaneous frequency of zero in the baseband corresponds to the input frequency of the analyzer 2FSK NATURAL With 2FSK the symbol decision is made by a simple frequency discriminator Symbol Numbers Fig 4 23 Constellation diagram for 2FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4FSK With 4FSK the symbol decision is made by a frequency discriminator with 3 decision thresholds 2 3
101. Off set the linear values are averaged Peak value In the Peak column the maximum value that occurred during several evaluations is displayed Note that when the value can be positive and negative e g the phase error the maximum absolute value maintaining its sign is displayed The peak value of Rho User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 50 Result Types in VSA is handled differently since its minimum value represents the worst case In that case the minimum value is displayed Standard Deviation The value for the standard deviation is calculated on the linear values and then conver ted to the displayed unit 95 percentile The 95 percentile value is based on the distribution of the current values Since the phase error and the magnitude error can usually be assumed to be distributed around zero the 95 Percentile for these values is calculated based on their absolute values Again the Rho value is handled differently Here the 5 Percentile is displayed since the lowest Rho value represents the worst case Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC to define the required source type see 1L AYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM RSUM to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 381 and chapter 11 9 2 5 Result Summary on page 383 CALC MARK FUNC DDEM STAT parameter to query individual p
102. PAVG Average of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PCTL 9595 percentile of RMS SNR value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 9595 percentile of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum SNR values over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of SNR values over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SRERror lt type gt This command queries the symbol rate error Query parameters lt type gt PEAK AVG SDEV PCTL TPEak RPEak PAVG PSDev PPCTI lt none gt Symbol rate error for current sweep AVG Average symbol rate error over several sweeps RPE Peak symbol rate error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of symbol rate error PCTL 95 percentile value of symbol rate error Usage Query only R amp S FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA EH 11 9 4 Retrieving Limit Check Results The modulation accuracy parameters can be checked against defined limits The fol lowing commands are required to query the results of these limit checks CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent RESult CALCulate
103. QUEStionable SYNC registers For some subregisters there may be separate registers for each active channel Thus if a status bit in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel o The STATus QUEStionable register sums up the information from all subregisters The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 11 11 9 Querying the Status Registers on page 405 Status Reporting System g QD sogea OR of all Lits s DI DigtallQ D specific for ESW K70 13 One register for each active channel D ACPLimit SYNC SYNC BURSt D UMARgn STATus QUEStionable S YNC n T o mn CALibration s UNCAL MODulation D FREQuency D FDEPeak TEMPerature D FDEMean POWer D FDECurrent STATus QUE Stionable PFEPIK PFEMean PtQOffset H PFECurrent MIQOfset D ClIQOffset PPEsk RFEPesk PCURrent 3 9 RFEMean PRHo DH RFECurrent MRHo D CRHa RPEak D STAT QUES MOD FSK RMEan STB IQRHo STAT QUES MOO IOR RCURrent STAT QUES MOO CFR MAGNitude STAT QUES MOO MAGN oe STAT QUES MOD PHAS A STAT QUES MOD EVM STATus QUEStionable MODulation n Fig 1
104. REF t Formulae Test parameter Formula Frequency l d FREQ ug sf wg M 1 d FREQprr C sg REF Magnitude error MAG _ ERR t MAG yas MAG pur Phase error PHASE _ ERR t PHASE ypas t PHASE pep t STEE FREQ _ ERR FREQ uras PREO FSK Modulation The trace based results for FSK signals are the same as those available for linear modulation types However as the signal processing for FSK signals is performed on the magnitude and instantaneous frequency the I Q based results first require a recon struction of the reference and measured UO waveforms as illustrated in Reconstruc tion of the reference and measured UO waveforms for FSK modulation The dashed outline of the compensate blocks indicate that these operations are optionally de activated depending on the corresponding user settings With respect to FSK measurements the optional compensation parameters are e FSK Reference deviation Carrier frequency drift Formulae Figure 3 Compensate i Reference i Ref deviation Frequency frer n ee Compensate Frequency Reference Ref deviation Modulator Measured Frequency fugas Q1 P Compensate Frequency Measured iming e EE Carrier drift Modulator UO Carrier offset i Compensate Auras Timing Gain Fig 1 1 Reconstruction of the reference and measured I Q waveforms for FSK modulation Note that a reference deviatio
105. Range Alignment By defining the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment ref erence source burst capture buffer or pattern you can define an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the signal structure see Offset on page 143 For example if you align the result to the center of the pattern and set the Symbol Number at Pattern Start to O you can easily find the pattern start in the EVM mea surement simply by moving a marker to the symbol number 0 When you define the Symbol Number at Reference Start remember to take the off set defined for the signal structure into consideration see Offset on page 143 If you define an offset of the pattern with respect to the useful part of the burst in the signal description and align the result to the pattern the Symbol Number at Pattern Start refers to the first symbol of the useful part of the burst not the first symbol of the pat tern Run In Run Out Time The parameter Run In Out can be used to influence the range over which the EVM is minimized The internal synchronization range is the overlapping area of the result range and the burst excluding its Run In Out areas Hence this parameter also allows for demodulation of bursts with mixed modulations e g Bluetooth because it can be used to explicitely exclude symbols from influencing the synchronization Useful length The burst excluding its Run In Out areas is sometime
106. Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 337 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window If enabled both the x axis and y axis are automatically adapted to the current mea surement results only once not dynamically in the selected window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Auto Scale All function Remote command For statistics result type transformation CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 303 For all other results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 336 Auto Scale All Adapts the x axis and y axis to the current measurement values only once not dynamically in all measurement windows Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL on page 336 Trace Settings 6 Analysis Access Overview Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured They are identical to the analysis functions in the base unit except for the special window functions Window specific configuration o The settings in the Analysis dialog box are specific to the selected window Thus the Analysis button is only available in the Overview if the Specifics for option is enabled To configure the settings for a different VSA window select the window out side the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box e Trace Seltgs
107. Se Length MIN MAX A 143 Programming example Seisoene 413 Reference for result range erre 178 AUDENT 143 leie 142 BET iom 125 C Capture buffer RR ee 16 Display Length Navigating p ee Reference for result range KesulbtyD8S occae E E DI cO RERO es Capture Buffer DIE ME M tai 127 Capture length Data acquisition DIE rM Capture offset MSRA applications Remote seed SOfIKGy irren err trn ee erit Capture oversampling see Sample rate cert trees 67 Capture ranges neret ente Peter e Tipus 128 Carrier frequency drift Compenhsatlor EE 182 Definition Formula Carrier frequency error Formulae ete eet Center frequency Softkey D Step S ZE c Channel Frequency Response Group Delay Result tyD amp 1 ecrire te ea 23 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude Result type cernit aeii 23 Closing Channels remote sireni uinie eres Windows remote Coarse Synchronization Compatible Patt rris c epe th veal tare cera atten 174 Compensation Demodulatiom isisisi orden Modulation errors REMOTE E Constellation Frequency result type isisisi enisi ig 24 Constellation UO Result type i crit eter te erneut Rotated Result type Constellation points Symbol MAPPING yrhai aiaee 70 Continue single sweep eelere ees E 167 Continuous sigrial
108. Search The burst search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped It is recommended that you switch the burst search on if the signal is bursted This ensures that all internal estimators are operated in time ranges where the burst power ramping is up In order to eliminate amplitude variations caused by noise or the modulation itself the instantaneous power of the whole capture buffer is computed and then a moving aver age filter is applied The length of this filter is automatically determined with the help of the user settings The filtered power of the capture buffer is subsequently compared to an automatically chosen threshold and the rising and falling edges of bursts are identified With the help of the detected edges and some further processing it is possible to decide whether the burst candidates comply with the user settings All bursts must have a length between Min Burst Length Search Tolerance and Max Burst Length Search Tolerance to be accepted See Burst Settings on page 142 and chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 168 for a more detailed description of these parameters Min Burst Length Min Gap Length Max Burst Length Fig 4 43 Burst Search parameters R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics You can influence the robustness of the burst search directly by entering the correct o minimum gap length minimum burst length and maximum burst length see Burst Set
109. Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 197 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt Header gt This command defines if a file header including start frequency sweep time detector etc is created or not A small header with the instrument model the version and the date is always transferred Setting parameters lt Header gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Header on page 197 FORMat DEXPort MODE lt Mode gt This command defines which data are transferred raw I Q data or trace data Setting parameters lt Mode gt RAW TRACe RST TRACe Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Data Export Mode on page 196 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode Retrieving Results In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB
110. Symbol Mapping Fig 4 20 Constellation diagram for D8PSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 APCO25 Phase 2 GRAY NATURAL and TETRA Table 4 5 D8PSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 Table 4 6 D8PSK GRAY Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 135 90 270 315 225 180 Table 4 7 D8PSK VDL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 135 90 315 270 180 225 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation Phase differential modulation is frequently combined with an additional phase shift e g 1 4 DQPSK id phase shift modulation differential modulated 4PSK The logical mapping diagram corresponds to the diagram for DPSK The physical constellation diagram shows the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation Symbol Mapping Fig 4 21 Constellation diagram for 7 4 DQPSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 Phase 2 NADC NATURAL PDC PHS TETRA and TFTS the 77 4 rotation is already compensa ted for Table 4 8 77 4 DQPSK NADC PDC PHS TETRA Logica
111. Synchronization 183 186 Diagram footer information siteisiin sirin 14 Differential PSK DPSK Symbol MAPPING ET 76 Digital standards Assigned patterns 73 Assigning patterns 174 Configuration errem 132 Performing measurement according to 4 215 Predefined torre 420 R molte oneiemc etes sc279 Removing assigned patterns ssssssss 174 Selecting w133 Softkey ec 5 a133 VSA measurements TEE 132 Display Configutratioti EE 204 Tuteur 12 Points per symbol 127 207 433 435 Drop out time Bie EE 165 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 276 E EDGE Filters frequency response eeeesess 441 Measurement example Electronic input attenuation Equalizer Eelere Tae oe ede Peu Yee escasa x eeu Data SOUE e Forte mec E Result types iini E Error messages Explanation secet ihn eed vae ecu Rua 252 Error model FSK ee edges 118 e 106 Error vector Data SOURCE RR 17 Definition Formula Result TY DES eerie tete etr mieten 17 Error Vector Magnitude EVM DDGfIDIt OE iode rod a E teen 109 Formula 433 PRESUME type mre een tet rec erre 27 RMS peak formulae esses 436 Errors IFOMED e Sen teet bm redde edes 152 Estimation leet Lu 106 e hailed al eee 120 Points per symbol 107 127 185 PSK Q
112. Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSWP User Manual Parameters Trace Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace ASCII Export on page 197 See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 211 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst STARt This command queries the start of the current result range within the capture buffer Return values lt StartValue gt Symbol or time at which x axis starts Example INIT CONT OFF switch to single sweep mode INIT WAI perform single sweep SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC 1 switch to first result range SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR START query start of current first result range in the capture buffer SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC 2 switch to second result range SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR START query start of current second result range in the capture buffer Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA Trace This command queries the trace data Which data is returned depends on the result disp
113. UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSWP UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO import is not available in MSRA mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 398 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Note that only the trace data in the currently displayed result range of the capture buf fer is exported For the Magnitude Absolute Overview result display the trace contains a maximum of 25 000 points Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the
114. Z5 T I Fig 4 2 Measurement filter in the block diagram MSK PSK QAM and UserQAM TX Filter Any QAM Any PSK bits UO perd Map bits to TX Filter instantaneous frequency frequency pulse f k Magnitude 1 Fig 4 3 Modulator with Transmit filter in detail As the measurement filters of the VSA application have low pass characteristics they suppress high frequency distortion components in the Meas Ref Error signal The errors are weighted spectrally Thus turning off the measurement filter can have an influence on the numeric and graphical error values However the measurement filter should be switched off if non linear distortions have to be measured they usually pro duce high frequency components Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Predefined measurement filters The most frequently required measurement filters are provided by the VSA application see chapter A 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 428 The frequency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 441 4 1 5 Customized Filters The analytical filter types RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and GAUS SIAN as well as the most important standard specific filters are already integrated in the VSA application In addition it is possible to use user defined measurement and transmit filters Customized filters may be useful for the foll
115. adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly 11 5 3 Configuring VSA Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Y Axis Reference Position on page 156 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces t is irrelevant For external generator calibration measurements requires the optional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters Value RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Y Axis Reference Value on page 156 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 159 Signal Capture The signal capture commands define how much how and when data is captured from the input signal Configuring VSA The tasks for manual operation are d
116. ai appropriate trigger offset Go back to fac DO Make sure your Result Range Alignment reference is Pattern Waveform Range Setting Dialog Go back to 10 2 Explanation of Error Messages The following section describes error messages and possible causes Message Burst Not Found rtt ERR Vete RR A Message Pattern Not Fournd iaces cneteese nte eter ente te kennt Penne Message Result Alignment Failed Message Sync failed Check for all zero signal Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Gelected 258 Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range eene 258 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fal 258 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols eese eecieeetseenne 259 Message Sync Prefers Longer Pattern cene nn hinten nts 260 Message Result Ranges COverlap nennen 261 Message Burst Not Found The Burst Not Found error message can have several causes Burst search is active but the signal is not bursted Fig 10 1 Example for active burst search with continuous signal Solution Select Continuous Signal as the signal type For more information see Signal Type on page 142 Signal is bursted but bursts have not been captured completely The burst search can only find bursts that start
117. an elliptic shape The gain imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the gain imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal o Preconditions for Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Error measurements The distortions gain imbalance and quadrature error can only be measured without ambiguity if the following two conditions are fullfilled a pattern is detected e the modulation is a non differential non rotating QAM or PSK Otherwise only the measurement parameter IO Imbalance which is a combination of the gain imbalance and the quadrature error is significant Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Quadrature Error Quadrature Fig 4 56 Effect of Quadrature Error The quadrature error is another modulation error which is shown in figure 4 56 In this diagram the and Q components of the modulated carrier are of identical ampli tude but the phase between the two components deviates from 90 This error also distorts the coordinates In the example in figure 4 56 the Q axis is shif ted Note that the quadrature error is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal UO Imbalance The effect of quadrature error and gain imbalance are combined to form the error parameter UO imbalance e Bo eil Bain le 8 e where
118. and analyze the indi vidual result ranges in separate windows The currently displayed result range is indi cated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display You can change the position of the result range quickly and easily by dragging the blue bar representing the result range to a different position in the capture buffer Continuous and discrete result ranges Depending on the type of signal and your result range definition the result ranges may be continuous or discrete Bursted signals commonly have several discrete result ranges at the bursts with intervals during the noise periods which should not be inclu ded in the results see figure 4 64 Continuous signals on the other hand have result ranges that cover the entire or a specific part of the capture buffer without intervals C Mag CapBuf MO Ab af IK AR A AR E SE 40 dBm 60 dBm 80 dBm Fig 4 65 Result ranges for a continuous signal Result Range Length The result range length is defined by the number of symbols that are to be demodula ted All traces over time are displayed over the result range For example if you have a User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 124 4 6 2 Measurement Ranges burst of 100 symbols and you define the result length as 200 symbols you can exam ine the burst ramps in detail by selecting the alignment Burst Center The maximum result length is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 sam ples Result
119. as information on maintenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSWP is not included in the application manuals 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes Application Notes Application notes application cards white papers and educational notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa tion The latest versions are available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at www rohde schwarz com appnote Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands
120. carrier frequency offset This has already been compensated for in the measurement signal This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but o can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the UO plane in this case you might notice uncriti cal spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero has in fact limited significance but still influences the result of the current fre quency measurement R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 14 1Freq Error Abs Clrw 349 sym Fig 3 10 Result display Frequency Error Absolute Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 Frequency Error Relative Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol r
121. configuration Starting the VSA Application 2 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application The R amp S FSWP K70 is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform Vector Signal Analysis VSA to the R amp S FSWP The R amp S FSWP VSA application performs vector and scalar measurements on digi tally modulated single carrier signals To perform the measurements it converts RF sig nals into the complex baseband The R amp S FSWP VSA application features e Flexible modulation analysis from MSK to 1024QAM e Numerous standard specific default settings Various graphical numerical and statistical evaluations and result displays e Spectrum analyses of the measurement and error signal Flexible burst search for the analysis of complex signal combinations short bursts or signal mix Availability of Vector Signal Analysis The Vector Signal Analysis application becomes available when you equip the R amp S FSWP with the optional Spectrum Analyzer hardware R amp S FSWP B1 and firm ware application R amp S FSWP K70 This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the Spectrum appli cation and are described in the R amp S FSWP User Manual The latest version is availa ble for download at the product homepage Installation You can find detailed installation instruction
122. eerie 138 Symbol MAP PIN Gers ocio tin teeth Lr entre ees 83 QPSK COmMUNUOUS nr Measurement example in SI M 78 Offset symbol mapping sisine aien 78 Programming example cocher eerte tae 412 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation sea QAM nudus nest n s e aec Ee eo 83 Quadrature error arsi Ee M jr ecc Bel nonc etenim Preconditions for measurement Quick Config Dc e HM 195 R Range PRAXIS ss Eege ege 158 Range per division hcc 157 Raw data EPOD g iE 196 Real Imag 1 Q Result type cited ert erant hens i nido aed 47 Receive E 62 Record length Definition eite Relationship to sample rate Recording tool Known dala nid eredi ree rudem eren 224 Reference FRes llrange eere ettet reete 178 Reference deviation Il ue 118 ESI Loss 140 Iefererice filtel TEE 62 Reference EE 152 Auto level 153 191 Offset 152 Unit 4 152 bU 152 Reference position POI i a 158 Y axis usse 156 Reference signal eseeeen 107 Demodulation process sssesssseenee 93 Evaluating 195 Generating M 93 Reference value X axis Y axis Refresh SOfIKGy enmarca des 167 Refreshing MSRA applications ote MSRA applications remote s SOflKGy E Remote commands Basics On SyntaK sesinin enisinia 2
123. evaluated If disabled you can define a specific part of the result range to be evaluated Remote command CALCulate n ELIN startstop STATe on page 334 Start Stop Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is started and stopped The start and stop symbols themselves are included in the evaluation range Note Note that the start and stop values are defined with respect to the x axis includ ing an optional offset defined via the Symbol Number at Reference Start parameter Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 335 Adjusting Settings Automatically 5 12 Adjusting Settings Automatically Access AUTO SET Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSWP automatically according to the cur rent measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The dura tion of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available D Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R amp S FSWP should behave e default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger
124. for each data source This allows you to compare the errors to the captured or measured data directly in the diagram mum EP EIN CC ae User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 18 Result Types in VSA The default result type is Spec Meas Error The following result types are available chapter 3 2 30 Spectrum Capture Buffer Error on page 53 chapter 3 2 31 Spectrum Measurement Error on page 53 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MCOM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 3 2 Result Types in VSA The available result types for a window depend on the selected evaluation data source The SCPI parameters in the following table refer to the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 Table 3 1 Available result types depending on data source Evaluation Data Result Type SCPI Parameter Source Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Real Imag UO RIMag Frequency Absolute FREQuency Vector HO COMP Magnitude Overview Absolute MOVerview Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Magnitude Relative MAGNitude Phase Wrap PHASe Phase Unwrap UPHase Frequency Absolute FREQuency Frequency Relative FREQuency Real Imag 1 Q RIMag Eye Diagram Real I IEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q QEYE Eye Diagram Frequency FEYE Constellation UO CONS Constellation UO Rotated RCON Vector I Q COMP Constellation Frequency CONF Vector Frequency CO
125. frequent which may cause spikes in the EVM results In this case you can restrict the synchronization to a known symbol sequence or pattern if available For details on synchronization see chapter 4 4 5 Synchronization and the Reference Signal on page 101 If Auto mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use the known data sequences are used Otherwise the detected data is used Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in refer ence to the evaluated data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed see If SER lt on page 187 Detected Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected sym Data bols Known Data The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data Pattern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO on page 328 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE on page 329 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult on page 329 5 10 Measurement Filter Settings If SER S This setting is only available if Known Data is selected for Fine Synchronization You can define a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the evaluated data Thus if a wrong file was mistakenly loaded or the file proves to be unsuitable
126. in second window Data section for individual trace A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description When you load a Known Data file the R amp S FSWP K70 application checks whether the file complies with the following syntax Table 1 6 Known Data File Syntax Syntax Possible Values Description RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE as specified File Header Version 01 00 gt lt Comment gt lt Comment gt arbitrary Optional file description lt Base gt lt Base gt 2 16 The base used to specify the lt Data gt values binary or hexa decimal For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use binary 2 lt ModulationOrder gt lt Modulation Order gt 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 Number of values each symbol can represent order of modu lation e g 8 for 8 PSK For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use lt Base gt 2 the exact number also depends on available memory space Known Data File Syntax Description Syntax lt ResultLength gt lt ResultLength gt Possible Values 1 up to 2000 Description Number of symbols in each Data element The number must be identical to the Result Length setting in the Result Range dialog box i e the number of symbols to be demodulated Data Data One character per symbol in the sequence Possible characters are 0 to n 1 where n is the lt ModulationOrder gt Spaces tabs and line breaks are i
127. input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 301 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 301 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSWP you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenu ation may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 302 INPut EATT AUTO on page 302 INPut EATT on page 301 Input Output and Frontend Settings 5 5 4 2 Scaling Access AMPT g
128. least squares criterion is minimized Crreo B fo fast 3 Suras B fee ht fo f ap with respect to the model parameters B fo f and 7 The term denotes the reference instantaneous frequency with a possibly fractional delay of samples Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors For FSK modulation the default sampling period used for estimation is the capture sampling period 4 5 2 3 Modulation Errors A 2FSK signal is generated using a GMSK frequency pulse Examples of carrier drift and reference deviation are shown in figure 4 61 and figure 4 62 respectively Carrier frequency drift A carrier frequency drift is modeled as a linear change in the carrier frequency with respect to time The effect of carrier drift on the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is illustrated in figure 4 61 Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation 15 o a Frequency Ref Deviation e Freq Ref Freq Meas 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 4 61 The reference and distorted instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with a carrier fre quency drift FSK deviation error The FSK deviation error is the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 140 The evidence of a deviation error in the instantaneous fre quency of an FSK signal is demonstrated in figure 4 62 Measurement Ranges Insta
129. limited to PSK and QAM modulation schemes as the optimi zation criterion of the algorithm is based on minimizing the mean square error vector magnitude Thus it cannot be used for FSK modulation User defined equalizers Instead of tracking equalizer values repeatedly for different input signals you can store existing values to a file and load them again later This is useful if signals from the same input source are measured frequently In this case you only have to perform a calculation once and can use the same equalizer filter again and again Filter length The length of the equalizer can be defined in symbols The longer the equalizer the higher the resolution in the frequency domain is and the more distortion can be com pensated The shorter the filter length the less calculation time is required during the equalizer s tracking or averaging phase Estimation points per symbol You can define how many sample points are used for the equalizer calculation at each symbol Estimation points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 105 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 1 1 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Points per Symbol on page 127 Typically this is one point per symbol symbol rate or a factor of 2 Channel EVM The equalizer not only compensates for distortions in the measurement signal but also improves the accuracy of the estimated ideal reference signal Thu
130. measurements The individual measurements are in logical order and are meant to familiarize you gradually with the measurements required of general vector signal analysis The following equipment is required in addition to the R amp S FSWP with option R amp S FSWP K70 e 1 test transmitter GSM compatible for Measurement 2 preferably R amp S SMW200A 1412 0000 02 with the digital standard option GSM EDGE order number 1413 3684 02 e 1RF cable with 2 male N connectors e 2 power cables Transmitter operation is only described as far as required for performing the measure ments For more details on the measurements refer to the test transmitter documenta tion 9 1 Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer In order to perform measurements with the R amp S FSWP K70 you require a test trans mitter to emulate a DUT For Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals the test transmitter needs to be GSM compatible Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMW200A with the RF input of the R amp S FSWP Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal RF Output Signal and Spectrum SEIN Analyzer FSWP Fig 9 1 Connection to a test transmitter for example R amp S SMW200A 9 2 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal In this measurement example a continuous QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying signal will be measured and evaluated QPSK is used in several standards such as DVB S2 APCO25 W
131. n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal mum EP EIN CF ee User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 45 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays pem EEE EEL EEL EL ELE EEE ESS aes 1 PhaseWrap Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 17 Result display Phase Wrap Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL REE to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM PHASe to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 3 2 27 Phase Unwrap The phase of the signal the display is not limited to 180 180 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal mum EP EIN CF C I RN UU ae User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 46 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 28 1 Phase Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 18 Result display Phase Unwrap Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM UPHase to define the result type see CALCulLate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results s
132. nnns 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue sessi rennen 359 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak RESult 396 CAlCulate nz LUlMrMACCuracvPERborbRCUrentG ATe nent nennen 356 CAL Culate nzLUlMt MAC Curacv PERRorRCUb rent VAl ue 359 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent RESult essen 396 CALCulate lt sn gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan Gate 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue sess nennen 360 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan RE Gu 396 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak RESUuIt 0 cece eee eee e eee sense seeeeneeseeeeseeeeeeenees 396 CAlCulate nz UM MACCuracv RO CUbbentG7ATe nennen nennen neret nennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent RE GO 396 CAL Culate nz LUIMMACCuracvRHOMEAN SGTATe eaii anikdanadi rennen 356 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VALue essent nennen nenne tn rentre senes 360 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN RESUIt eese nenne 396 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK STATe sess nnne esent enne 357 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK VALue sess eren ee nennt nnns CA
133. of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 41 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays pee Pr EEE SESS eee Note that for very large numbers of samples gt 25 000 the samples are mapped to 25 000 trace points using an autopeak detector for display Thus this result display is not suitable to detect transient effects or analyze individual symbols closely For these purposes use the Magnitude Absolute result display instead The Magnitude Overview Absolute is only available for the source type e Capture Buffer 1 Mag Overview CaptureBuffer 220000 sym Fig 3 13 Result display Magnitude Overview Absolute for capture buffer data Restrictions Note the following restrictions that apply to this result display e Only one trace is available e Only the trace modes Clear Write and View are available See also chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 193 Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL CBUF to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM MOV to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 382 mum EP EIN CPC NI RN UU User Manual 1177 5685 02
134. or binary Adding symbols Symbols Adds a new symbol in the symbol table to the left of the currently selected symbol Removing symbols Symbols Removes the currently selected symbol in the symbol table Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 318 5 8 Result Range Configuration Access Overview gt Cut Result Ranges The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is dis played For more information see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 122 A visualization of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visuali zation area at the bottom of the dialog box Result Range Configuration Result Range Evaluation Range Length Result Length 148 sym 546 462 ps Result Range Alignment Reference k Capture Burst Ee Pattern Waveform Alignment Left o Center Cal Right Offset o sym Visualization 58 0sym 26 ELE Le VE 178 i o M HU M 178 elo DAS LEER TO IL OLLI LL a eee 179 arl E M 179 Symbol Number at Reference Start entre rnt etc ave 179 Result Length Defines the number of symbols that are to be demodulated All traces over time are displayed over the result range Remote command SENSe
135. page 178 For more solutions see chapter 10 1 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting on page 250 Problem Synchronization seems to fail for all zero all one 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit sequence See Problem Synchronization fails despite correct settings on page 261 Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement window Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the AUTO key e 3 Press the Y Axis Auto Scale softkey Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement win dow the trace of the reference signal is not Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the TRACE key e 3 Press the Trace Config softkey e 4 Select a second trace choose Clear Write as Trace Mode and toggle to Ref in the Evaluation column Trace Wizard Screen Trace Trace Mode Evaluation Trace 3 Blank Meas Ref _ _ _ Trace 4 J Blank Meas f Ref is f Meas Traces _ Blank r Yd Trace 6 rank a Preset Select Select All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min is Problem The measurement window does not show average results Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the TRACE key e 3 Press the Trace Config softkey e 4 Select a second trace and choose the preferred Trace Mode e g Max Hold or Average R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooti
136. page 417 Manual operation See Mod order on page 177 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD lt AddPattern gt This command adds a pattern to the current standard Using the DDEM SEAR SYNC SEL command only those patterns can be selected which belong to the current standard see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 318 Setting parameters lt AddPattern gt string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Adding patterns to a standard on page 174 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove This command deletes one or all patterns from the current standard Usage Setting only Manual operation See Removing patterns from a standard on page 174 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT lt Text gt This command defines a text to explain the pattern The text is displayed only in the selection menu manual control This text should be short and concise Detailed infor mation about the pattern is given in the comment see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 318 Setting parameters lt Text gt string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Edit on page 174 See New on page 174 See Description on page 176 11 5 7 Defini
137. parameters type none Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the reference deviation of FSK modulated signals Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance lt type gt This command queries the results of the Gain Imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Retrieving Results Query parameters type none Gain imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average gain imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak gain imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of gain imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of gain imbalance error Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m
138. period one that corresponds to the component and one that corresponds to the Q component RST 1 See Offset EVM on page 187 SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO lt LinkMode gt Defines how many sample points are used at each symbol to calculate modulation accuracy results automatically If enabled the VSA application uses the following settings depending on the modula tion type Configuring VSA Modulation Est Points PSK QAM 1 Offset QPSK 2 FSK MSK Sample rate see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 308 Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 185 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue lt EstOverSmplg gt Defines how many sample points are used at each symbol to calculate modulation accuracy results For more information see Estimation points per symbol on page 127 You can also let the VSA application decide how many estimation points to use see SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on page 325 Setting parameters lt EstOverSmplg gt 1 the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account 2 two points per symbol instant are used required for Offset QPSk 4 8 16 32 the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture settings is used see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 308 i e all sample time instants are weighted equally RST 1 Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on
139. pss 411 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSEtAUTO ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt nd 315 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURStCONF igure AUTO ettet 315 SENSe DDEMod SEARCch BURSEGLENGth MlINimum cents 315 ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch BURSCLENGgn M ximum ttt SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimum ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch BURSCHODE nsara SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIP FALLing ettet SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIP RISing ettet ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch BURSrST ATe ttt ttt ood SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance ettet ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURSt CALC s sssssssssssesssssseessssseesssssseessssevecsssusessssivessssueessssseesssssuessesseeeseese ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch M URst STAR 381 ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch PATTemCONFloure AUTO 316 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO ccccssssseessssssessssssvessssusessssisessssuesessstieesssstessssuesssaseeeen 332 ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch PATTem SvMCtSTATel 332 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent cett ttt ttt 318 ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch SY 319 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA ettet ttt ttt ttt ttc od 319 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete ttt ttti 319 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold ttt ttt 317 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE ISENSe IDDEMod SEARCh SYHCNAME ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEM
140. result range cece eects eee eeeee 178 Removing from standard sesesssss 174 Restoring Selected Standard Symbol check EE 100 Symbol check demodulation process 2 99 Symbol format nn adi seg a 177 WOFKING WIE 2er et tr emen at 218 Peak search Mc m 201 LIMITS ege 200 oec 200 Peaks ee 201 Formula Marker positioning ege riot eret 201 p pem 201 ec T M 201 Phase Distortion effect VE 115 Formula 433 Wrap result type EE 45 Phase error Definition Formula 433 Result type siiis 44 RMS peak formulae ssseseeseeieeeieeieeernererrnernen 436 Phase Error Isesult type unter rer AER 45 Phase shift keying See PSK e M M 74 Phase unwrap Unwrap resull type deter 46 Preamplifier GU E 147 153 Softkey Prefix Patten pee 174 Presetting Channels etie terrre re nr eren 136 Default values a 182 Lee Te e 165 Programming examples Burst GSM EDGE signal Continuous QPSK signal Protection RE input remote nee reete e 293 PSK Blau ied E 76 Error model 106 Mixed fortis EE 77 Modulation type 138 Rotating nee 74 Rotating differential f Symbol MAPPING WEE 71 Q QAM Ertormodel rci tinis ege 106 Modulation VDE ie ioci o esto ni nett
141. rne ci DG Tele WE Multiple mode Multiple mode remote Remote ees Restoring original display Single mode sissies s Single mode remote AAA
142. see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 228 10 Optionally check the modulation accuracy against specified limits see chap ter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy on page 230 11 Optionally export the trace data of the measured signal to a file see chapter 8 3 3 How to Export the Trace Data to a File on page 231 R amp S9FSWP K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 8 3 1 8 3 1 1 How to Change the Display Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling func tions are available to adapt the result display to the current data How to Scale Time and Spectrum Diagrams The range of the displayed y axis for time and spectral diagrams can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining the range size reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results To define the scaling manually using a reference point With this method you define a reference value and a position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis 1 Focus the result window Select AMPT YScale Config Y Axis Reference Value 2 3 Enter a reference value for the y axis in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Reference Position 5 Enter the position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis The position is a percentage of the entire length where 100 refers to the to
143. select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the E Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name oN o mF o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension ig tar Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the Ell Open icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey g P o mw Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension How to Export and Import UO Data 6 Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the I Q data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip amp or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser gt xzy xml How to Export and Import UO Data 4 Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser al gt Hei ay xml e D x xzy xml xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV I
144. several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of phase errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor type This command queries the results of the Quadratur error measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type none quadrature error for current sweep AVG Average quadrature error over several sweeps RPE Peak quadrature error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of quadrature error PCTL 95 percentile value of quadrature error Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO type This command queries the results of the Rho factor measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type none Rho factor for current sweep AVG Average rho factor over several sweeps RPE Peak rho factor over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of rho factor PCTL 95 percentile value of rho factor Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR type This command queries the results of the SNR error measurement performed for digital demodulation Retrieving Results Query parameters type none RMS SNR value of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS SNR values over several sweeps
145. the UO Analyzer application if available and then analyze that data later using the R amp S FSWP VSA application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSWP UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications UO data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e gett PUlgCUOfIS eet eate reete te etre ete e e exe ute eu eed ines 210 e Howto Export and Import VQ Data erecti nnne 212 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSWP User Manual Import Export Functions sop MEER 211 L Export Trace to ASCII File isciasicaiiciekz tenia aat tek cercana nza tt 211 Li EEN 211 Import Provides functions to import data
146. the detected data RST DDATa Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 186 SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe lt KnownDataState gt This command selects the Known Data state The use of known data is a prerequisite for the BER measurement and can also be used for the fine sync Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt KnownDataState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Known Data on page 144 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME lt FileName gt This command selects the Known Data file Setting parameters lt FileName gt string Manual operation See Load Data File on page 145 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop lt CompAmptDroop gt This command switches the compensation of the amplitude droop on or off Setting parameters lt CompAmptDroop gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 181 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift lt CarrFreqDrift gt This command defines whether the carrier frequency drift is compensated for FSK modulation Setting parameters lt CarrFreqDrift gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for FSK on page 182 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel lt TransmitChannel gt This command switches the channel compensation on or off With equalizer only Setting parameters lt TransmitChannel gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 181 SE
147. the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command e UO Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data How to Perform Measurements in VSA The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e Remote Commands for VSA Remote commands required to configure and perform VSA measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSWP User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes Annex Reference material List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Documentation Overview e Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSWP consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual Online Help syste
148. the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards function see Restore Standard Files on page 132 Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete on page 280 Restore Standard Files Digital Standards Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 279 Configuration Overview 5 3 CR EI Be Overview Configuration Overview Access Meas Config gt Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview Overview 0 Std d SR 3 94 tz mm Vector Signal Analysis Modulation Input Capture Length Symbol Rate Center Freq Sample Rate Tx Filter Ref Level Trigger Mode Signal Type A Trigger Offset Signal Description Input Frontend Signal Capture Estimation RPS Result Length y alignment Pattern EJ lation Cut Result Ranges Meas Filter Start Stop w Meas Filter Evaluation Range Display Config La Specific Settings for In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire meas
149. to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH SYMB Adds a Symbol Table display to the right of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Capture Buffer on page 16 See Measurement amp Reference Signal on page 16 See Symbols on page 17 See Error Vector on page 17 See Modulation Errors on page 17 See Modulation Accuracy on page 18 See Equalizer on page 18 See Multi Source on page 18 See Signal Source on page 206 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 Table 11 2 WindowType parameter values for VSA application Parameter value Data source default result display CBUFfer Capture buffer Magnitude absolute MEAS Meas amp Ref Magnitude relative REF EQualizer Equalizer EVECtor Error vector EVM MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy Result Summary MCOMbination Multi Source Spec Meas Error MERRor Modulation Errors Magnitude error SYMB Symbols Hexadecimal Configuring the Result Display LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active win
150. trace modes For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only the trace modes Clear Write and View are available For the Magnitude Absolute result display the trace modes Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual result ranges and thus may not provide useful results Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default setting EH User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 194 Trace Settings Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSWP saves each trace point in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSWP saves each trace point in the trace mem ory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several measurements The Statistic Count determines the number of averaging procedures View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 345 Evaluation Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the refer ence signal if Meas amp Ref Signal is used as the evaluation data source see Signal Source on page 206 For multi source results the evaluation for ea
151. uscc ENEE 193 e Trace Export Getings AE 196 e Uu e 197 e Limtand Display EE 202 e Display and Window Copnfiouratton n 204 e ZOOM PUMCUOMS ees 208 6 1 Trace Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed in the window Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 6 2 Trace Export Settings on page 196 R amp SPFSWP KTO RUNE Mode Evaluation I Clear Write View Blank Quick Config Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode Ee Ce l Const I Q Meas amp Ref D Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace Gifracep 194 Trace fj 194 IU iuo MT 195 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config essences nenatis 195 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Ttace 4 Softkeys sees a 195 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 346 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt t gt commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces The available trace modes depend on the selected result display Not all evaluations support all
152. value 8 9 These bits are not used 10 Error in current Frequency Deviation value 11 Error in mean Frequency Deviation value 12 Error in peak Frequency Deviation value 13 15 These bits are not used 11 11 9 Querying the Status Registers The following commands query the contents of the individual status registers STATusOUEGuonable AC mmt COhNfDiton ener 407 STATus QUESHBonable DIQ CONDIBIOR EE 407 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDiition esses nennen 407 STATus OUEGuonable LUlMit zmz CONDiton nennen enne nnne nnns 407 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt CONDItION cececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaaeeaeeeenenenes 407 STATus OUEGtonable MODulaton nz CONDiton 407 STATusOUEGtonabie MODulatton nz CFReouencv CONDitton rrenen 407 STATus OUEGuonable MODulaton nz EVMCONDion 407 STATus OUEGuonable MODulaton nz FSkCGONDmon eren 407 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz JORHo COhNfDiton 407 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz M ACGhNtude CONDiton 407 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz DHAGe CONDitton na 407 Status Reporting System STATus QUESUonable POWerCONDIEOI aiunt rne mre de xn ur e aoii 407 STATus QUESItionable SYNC CONDIIOn errean ia ean aE ped RAT Ea 407 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVEN 407 STA TUS QUESHomable DIOREVEN ua duecd oer a 407 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENI 2 22 iiic ro oco tere peus hace 407 STATus QUEStionable LIMitemo EVEN eh poche eonun nh
153. violation of defined limits automatically see Modulation Accuracy on page 18 Display lines are currently not available Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines Access LINES ModAcc Limits Config The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically see Modulation Accuracy on page 18 Limit Checking On wine Set to Default Current Mean Peak Limit Value Check Magnitude Error Peak Carrier Frequency Error Rho 0 999 I Q Offset 40 0 dB Note Limits for Current and Peak are always equal For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 230 Limit and Display Lines Checking Modulation Accuracy nits aac eerte aed eee ne s 203 Set n EE enee eter Eeer geen ee 203 Curenu Me TP OE cociacocidenae Ee ces ina rr A a evt eer 203 Lun ct lace ase Tt 203 EEN 204 Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits Activates or deactivates evaluation of modulation accuracy limits in the result sum mary For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 230 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy STATe on page 355 Set to Default Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault on page 355 Current Mean Peak Defines and activates the limits for the currently measured value the
154. xml Load Data File Additional Information Result Length 148 Number of Sequences 5 Modulation Order 8 Base Hexadecimal Comment Standard EDGE_8PSK Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge OW ISl RECTE TETTE IUE 144 Load Data UE 145 Known Data Activates or deactivates the use of the loaded data file if available When deactivated the additional information from the previously loaded data file is removed Any referen ces to the known data in the Demodulation dialog box are replaced by the default parameter values see chapter 5 9 2 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization on page 183 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 1 1 Input Output and Frontend Settings Note When a standard is loaded the use of a Known Data file is automatically deacti vated Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe on page 329 Load Data File If Known Data is activated this function displays a file selection dialog box to select the xml file that contains the known data Once a file has been selected any additional information provided by the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME on page 330 Input Output and Frontend Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend The R amp S FSWP can
155. 01 0101 0111 Fig 4 31 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for EDGE hexa decimal and binary 1011 1001 0010 0011 1010 1000 0000 0001 1101 1100 0100 0110 1111 1110 0101 0111 Fig 4 32 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary 11010 11110 01011 01111 Fig 4 33 Constellation diagram for 32QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary Symbol Mapping e e e e 001000 001001 001101 001100 e e e 001010 001011 001111 001110 e e e 000010 000011 000111 000110 e e e 000000 000001 000101 000100 Fig 4 34 Constellation diagram for 64QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary the binary form shows the upper right section of the diagram only H H H H 0011010 0011011 0001011 0001010 e D H D 0011000 0011001 0001001 0001000 H H D e e D 0010000 0010001 0010101 0010100 0011100 0011101 0010010 0010011 0010111 0010110 0011110 0011111 0000010 0000011 0000111 0000110 0001110 0001111 0000000 0000001 0000101 0000100 0001100 0001101 Fig 4 35 Constellation diagram for 128QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal and binary the figure shows the upper right sections of the diagram only Fig 4 36 Constellation diagram for 256QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the
156. 1 5 1 Restoring Factory Settings for Vector Signal Analysis 132 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards eeeee 132 53 Configuration Overview n ertet retento tran e RENEA EE ONENE NEE SREE E ANAE 135 5 4 Signal Descrip UON eira nenen RE EEEE 137 5 5 Input Output and Frontend Settings eeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeere 145 5 6 Signal ST irte ane iiie 159 5 7 Burst and Pattern Configuration eeeeseeeeeeeeeeneee nennen nennen nnn nnn nnn 168 5 8 Result Range Configuration eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeennnnnnen nennen nennen nennen 177 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 3 R amp S FSWP K70 Contents 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 7 1 7 2 8 1 8 2 8 3 9 1 9 2 9 3 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 Demodulation Settings ssrriirrsrrrasrinnrarssrsantrns inuuna vraS Snin NEENAKE ERONEN NAVARE NEEN 179 Measurement Filter SettingS cccsssseeeeeseceeeeeessseeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseseeeeeensesseeneees 187 Evaluation Range Configuration cesses 189 Adjusting Settings Automatically eee nnns 191 DLL e 193 Trace SeQteinG e 193 Trace Export Setting iccciccccccccccecscecccceccccctscecessetceceesseaescecessastececseeetcccetesetcccecessesstere 196 Lac c
157. 1 Signal modulation settings for FSK modulation Modulation Type Defines the modulation type of the vector signal The following types are available e PSK e MSK e QAM User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 138 Signal Description FSK ASK APSK User Modulation Uses the selected user defined modulation loaded from a file For more information on these modulation types see chapter 4 3 Symbol Mapping on page 70 Remote command SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 283 Load User Modulation Modulation Type This function is only available if the modulation type User Modulation is selected Opens a file selection dialog box to select the file that contains the user defined modu lation vam file For details on user defined modulation files see chapter 4 3 11 User defined Modula tion on page 90 Remote command SENS DDEM FORM UQAM see SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 283 SENSe DDEMod USER NAME on page 289 Modulation Order Depending on the Modulation Type various orders of modulation are available Type Available orders PSK BPSK 3Pi 4 QPSK Pi 8 D8PSK QPSK 8PSK DQPSK Offset QPSK 3Pi 8 8PSK Pi 4 DQPSK D8PSK Pi 4 QPSK MSK MSK DMSK QAM 16QAM Pi 4 32QAM 256QAM Pi 4 16QAM 64QAM 512QAM 32QAM 128QAM 1024QAM 2048QAM 4096QAM FSK 2FSK 4FSK 8FSK Signal Description Type Available orders ASK 2ASK 4ASK APSK 16AP
158. 1 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Load Standard on page 134 SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent Comment This command enters the comment for a new standard The comment is stored with the standard and is only displayed in the selection menu manual operation When remote control is used the string is deleted after the standard has been stored allow ing a new comment to be entered for the next standard In this case a blank string is returned when a query is made Setting parameters Comment string Manual operation See Comment on page 134 SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete lt FileName gt This command deletes a specified digital standard file in the vector signal analysis The file name includes the path If the file does not exist an error message is displayed Setting parameters lt FileName gt string File name including the path for the digital standard file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Delete Standard on page 134 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue This command restores the default settings of the currently selected standard Usage Event SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE lt FileName gt This command stores the current settings of the vector signal analysis as a new user defined digital standard If the name of the digital standard is already in use an error message is output and a new name has to be sele
159. 1 2 Overview of VSA specific status registers e STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt Reoisier nnn rnnerannreertn nenene 402 e STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register 402 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register 402 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Heoisier ennnen 403 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 403 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register 404 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO Register 404 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register 405 e Querying the Status E 405 Status Reporting System 11 11 14 STATus QUEStionable SYNC n Register This register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection for each window in each VSA channel It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 407 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 408 Table 11 4 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for R amp S FSWP K70 Bit Definition 0 Burst not found This bit is set if a burst could not be detected 1 Sync not found This bit is set if the sync sequence pattern of the midamble could not be detected 2to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always O 11 11 2 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register This register comprises information about any limit v
160. 1177 5685 02 01 52 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays IEN 3 2 30 Spectrum Capture Buffer Error This display combines two diagrams in one The first trace displays the spectrum of the real image data in the capture buffer The second trace displays the spectrum of the real image data of the error Optionally the data source of the traces can be switched Which source is currently displayed for which trace is indicated in the window title bar see also figure 2 1 1 Spec Realimag CaptureBuffer un 2 Spec Capture Buffer vs E 1C rw 2E lee 3 Spec Realimag Error 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MCOM to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM TCAP ERR to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 CALC TRAC TCAP CALC TRAC2 ERR to define trace1 to be based on the capture buffer data and trace 2 on the error default see CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 344 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results for capture buffer data see TRACe n DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 4 Symbols on page 383 TRAC DATA TRACE2 to query the trace results for error data 3 2 31 Spectrum Measurement Error This display combines two diagrams in one The first trace displays the spectrum of the real im
161. 145 147 IF source remote iiss cases eros 295 Sample rate definition A 68 e EP 147 hale GT 149 VE 148 295 Overload RF input remote ite e entente 293 Oversampling issue 207 Overview COnTIgUratiOD ssec rei cest eO Re ER DINE ede 135 P Parameters DeSctiptlOfi ioci alin aa 57 58 ij e 58 PSK QAM MSK zaol Retrieving results remote sssssssss 384 SCPliparametets cies ees 57 58 Pattern search ele le Lee EE 170 Demodulation process eterne 92 DEI Enabling EMMONS ise EE ere Found Pattern 5 nee reti 172 UO correlation threshold sss 171 Performing TEEN 218 Process 2496 REMOTE M 316 Selected patter cec beni tpet tton 172 uin RP emm 143 Adding to standard eene 174 Assigning to standard sionerien 219 EILER 174 Coarse synchronization ssoi 186 V elle TEE 174 Configuration 143 172 jeep 174 Creating zen ee eter e nee be e etat 174 Jen OT uisi oce toi ot Cp eeneg 175 Definition remote eet 318 pri 175 prc 175 IJisplayiFig EE 174 EGitinig wesc erie tite eere e EO ens 174 EMADIING ecco E 172 175 Fine synchronization encor tette 186 MAMAQIING e 222 Name 143 176 rp 143 PRCT EAE ER E 174 Reference for
162. 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 352 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 351 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 351 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 350 EF Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum APEak on page 352 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 353 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 351 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 353 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 353 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 353 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 351 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 351 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 352 Limit and Display Lines 6 4 Limit and Display Lines 6 4 1 Access LINES gt Lines Limits The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for
163. 2 Estimation The estimation of the distortion parameters listed previously is performed separately for the magnitude and phase frequency distortions as illustrated in figure 4 60 It is noted that the estimation of the timing offset is performed only on the frequency of the signal as the reference magnitude is assumed to be constant over the estimation range For details on the estimation range see Estimation ranges on page 107 Compute Reference Waveform Estimate Timing Ref deviation Carrier offset Carrier drift Compute i Frequency i Filter MEAS Measured Signal Estimate Gain Amp droop Compute Magnitude Fig 4 60 FSK Estimation Strategy In figure 4 60 MEAS n denotes the sampled complex baseband measured signal waveform The magnitude samples are denoted Ameas N while the instantaneous fre quency samples of the measured and reference signals are denoted by Lucas and fage n respectively The dashed outline of the Meas Filter block indicates that this operation is optionally de activated based on the corresponding user settings see Type on page 188 For the estimation of the magnitude parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized 2 Cyac K si gt ae n Kets with respect to the model parameters K and a where Tg denotes the sampling period used for estimation see Estimation Points Sym on page 185 For estimation of the frequency parameters the following
164. 241 Continuous QPSK i e 234 Measurement examples Burst GSM EDGE signal remote 413 Continuous QPSK signal remote 412 Measurement filter 234098 ANABI geesde dees tte te 189 Config latiotl EE 187 Configuration remote 332 Demodulation process entere 93 Enabliiig reete trennen eren etes 188 Loading Predefined iii etre etae 188 428 Ux M 188 RE El E WEE 189 Measurement ranges Comparison EH ccce cos o eot teh Peptide Measurement signal Evaluating icit eter deett en 195 Measurement time Auto settings uci e ees 191 192 Min Gap Length sir m 170 Min max values Ol 156 MIU eicere reiten cere occa eed tpe deed Ded 201 Marker positioning cu 2 certc iter rts 201 DD ae ect ke ate te cles ese 201 Minimum shift keying MSK Symbol MAPPING mere terere rts 82 MKR gt Mc o M 200 MOdAGCC Elmits 2 ocio ce tod 203 Modulation ConfigulatiOri EE 137 Display nud Errors EE 121 Inverted UO remote seen 309 Inverted ANEN 161 MappiNg EE 140 Order P S Remote lee NEE 140 D 138 Wser detined oit e ts 90 Modulation accuracy Data SOUC TRE Individual results Limit checking 5 Limit checking enabling sees 203 Limit lines remote A 355 Limi
165. 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 Query parameters Format Specifies a particular BER result to be queried If no parameter is specified the current bit error rate is returned The parameters for these results are listed in table 11 3 Retrieving Results Table 11 3 Parameters for BER result values Result Current Min Max Acc Bit Error Rate CURRent MIN MAX TOTal Total of Errors TECurrent TEMIN TEMAX TETotal Total of Bits TCURrent TMIN TMAX TTOTal CALCulate lt n gt DDEM BURSt LENGth This command queries the length of a detected burst Note that since the R amp S FSWP VSA application has no knowledge on the ramp length there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm Return values lt Length gt integer Number of symbols Example INIT CONT OFF switches to single sweep SENS DDEM SIGN VAL BURS switches bursted signal on INIT IMM WAI starts single sweep and waits for result CALC DDEM BURS LENG returns detected burst length Usage Query only Manual operation See Expected Burst Length Burst Found on page 170 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop lt type gt This command queries the results of the amplitude droop error measurement per formed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on p
166. 3 2 7 Error Vector Magnitude EVM Displays the error vector magnitude as a function of symbols or time EVM t p with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 The normalization constant C is chosen according to the EVM normalization By default C is the mean power of the reference signal c x Xen and T duration of symbol periods Note that k 0 5 n T for Offset QPSK with inactive Offset EVM User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 27 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays ei Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 5 Result display Error Vector Magnitude Available for source types e Error Vector Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EVEC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 3 2 8 Eye Diagram Frequency The eye diagram of the currently measured frequencies and or the reference signal The time span of the data depends on the evaluation range capture buffer Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout
167. 340 Je IRCH OT 1 ori oett rri ertet etre cente ea ecc inen 340 ll 341 Nipate sns REPIRBSI BE 341 INITiate n SEQuencer REFResh ALL eeeeeee eene nennen nennt nnn anii 341 INI Tiate lt n gt SEQuencerABOR aicci N seicsnaasvacesceansinaiacaeevaneans 342 INITiatexn SEQuencer IMMediate esses eene enne nnne nnn 342 INI ates SEQuencer MODE mentenie ege eeu ee oe E oer er a ent a tle rada 342 SN KEE 343 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system Performing a Measurement To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSWP User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSWP is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSWP on a parallel channel to clear all curren
168. 5 Stop 2 535 Start 0 254 Stop 0 254 Tri tal 1203 2010 Cas 09 44 29 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSWP K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S FSQ K70 Solution The FSK deviation error in the R amp S FSWP K70 is calculated as the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 140 What is referred to as the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is calculated differently see the R amp S FSQ K70 Software Manual and is comparable to the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSWP K70 However while the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is given in Hz the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSWP K70 is given in percent i e relative to the FSK Meas Deviation User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 267 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result dis play Spectrum VSA Ref Level 22 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 10 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz ResLen 200 SGL TRG EXT A Freq Error Abs 1Clrw B Phase Error Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw a Sea B Stop 5 13 did 09 30 16 Solution These spikes are usually uncritical and are caused by zero transitions in the I Q Plane Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal
169. 69 us Min Gap Length 3 692 us Min Gep Length 10 sym E 36 923 us Related Settings Related Settings i Signal Description Signal Description Trace Mag CapBuf 1 Cir Mag CapBuf Fig 10 6 Example for adjusting the minimum gap length For more information see Min Gap Length on page 170 The pattern search is switched on fails and the alignment is with reference to the pattern In case the pattern search is switched on and the reference for the alignment is the pattern and not the burst a non detected pattern causes the result range to be positioned at the beginning of the capture buffer Hence if a the burst does not start right at the beginning of the capture buffer you will see a Burst Not Found Message Solution Refer to Message Pattern Not Found on page 255 Switch the pattern search off Choose Burst as the reference for the result range alignment Message Pattern Not Found The Pattern Not Found error message can have several causes The burst search has failed User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 255 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement EH If burst and pattern search are active the application looks for patterns only within the found bursts Hence in case the burst search fails the pattern search will also fail Solution Try one of the following Make sure the burst search is successful Deactivate the burst search but keep the pattern search
170. 7 235 507 476 330 522 177 717 717 111 615 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 Data 341 366 632 073 607 A 6 A 6 1 Formulae 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 67 Data lt RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE Formulae e Trace based E E 433 e Result Summary Evaluations 2 niii dede ed eee dein 435 e Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary 438 e Traee Averaging reroncen reno teh enn n ane E ERE ERR aeaa LER RENTE H EUR RR REN ARR Ke n 439 EE ae E BEE 439 e Standard Speciflo Filt ts 1n e ect oT Ere ER La inert 440 Trace based Evaluations The trace based evaluations all take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter Test parameter Formula Error vector EV MEAS REF t Error Vector Magnitude EVM EV t EVM t ive with the normalization contant C depends on your setting By default C is the mean power of the reference signal c EY err T duration of symbol periods Magnitude Mag yas t MEAS o Mag peg t REF Phase Phase meas Z MEAS t Phase pgp t Z
171. 7 Ve ten Ee 56 i em HR 56 Results Retrieving remote ecce Updating the display Updating the display remote ssssse 341 RF attenuation UNO oiseau tic antl rap ete eee etus rend 154 Manual P 154 signer ie areire aa 145 Overload protection remote ussssss 293 I i o 293 294 RHO FORMULA RE 436 RMS average Formula uc ett eee bene cepas 439 Roll off factor Alpha Measurement filter sisinsdiran 189 Transmit flor 2 etie e eese ted 141 Rotating Differential PSK Symbol MAPPING 2 ort rerit 7T Rotating PSK Symbol MAPPING ET 74 RRG leede eendeitege 62 RUN CONT Mc M 166 RUN SINGLE cop M 166 167 Run in Nj p An ere Eege 143 S Sample Tale scit exeo E d Eelere eeneg dtes rere Deed us aedi Du NN educ IJefinitlori zx xcti Max usable UO bandwidth MAXIMUM ccc oe knees Relationship to bandwidth Relationship to symbol rate is ciem E i r Saving e TN 134 Scaling Automatically ecc coco n neat te etes Diagrams changing X axiS eier edel X axis automatically sissen aeina X axis y axis default TEE Y axis remote control Y axis Statistics iecit retento teet rent Search Direction Real or Imag see 200 Tolerance Burst Search AAA 170 Search limits ACUValLITIg WE 200 Secure user mode Storage e E 133
172. 70 Boolean values 274 Capitalization 272 Character data d s Data blocks 275 Numeric values 213 Optional keywords Parameters Strings 2275 SITES M M 272 Resetting RF input protection rrr rtr 293 Restoring Channel settings ve LS Factory settings 132 Patt rtifiles iternm tr eee 132 Ee lee 132 134 Result display Configuration remote Troubleshooting rentre Result displays RER 15 Result length 124 Display EE 13 Known data 130 QAM modulatio ee 2 rrt oerte rer 83 RANGES e niini eas 178 Result range AGED ocio eti one Eggs 125 179 Alignment known data seen 130 Configuration us EE Defining 2 225 Definition rez 123 Demodulation process erret eren 92 Display Evaluating Length sur p Overlapping elek 261 Reference ve 178 Remote i921 Run In out s 129 Selecting einer eee orien 168 Result Summary Ile Cu LTE 51 Display points per symbol eeeessees 127 Evaluations ei ell Formulae PSK i E 437 STEE 48 Result type Display ettet tete ene 14 Transformation 206 Window configuration sissioni srities 206 Result types Bit error rate BER eed teet 21 Capture buffer eterne 16 Channel Frequency Response Group De
173. 83 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe on page 283 Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to configuring measurement filters SENSe DDEMaogSMFILter ALPES iir ree e n ntt n otra c 333 5ENS amp DDEModMEIBlat AUTO scie breeders ier netted eI aee e ecu eda eed crea 333 I SENSe DDEMeod MEILlter NAME aiii oc st nau oaa exea RU SES NENNEN 333 SENS amp IDDEModg MFIEtet S TATE arcta aae rent nbn naL eye dna p here ne rhet nhe 333 SENSe JDDEMGGd MFlkter USER iecit naue nte nuu ennt tnr ea era ea nnum 334 SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt This command sets the alpha value of the measurement filter Setting parameters MeasFiltAlphaBT numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 189 SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO lt MeasFilterAuto gt If this command is set to ON the measurement filter is defined automatically depend ing on the transmit filter see SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 288 Setting parameters lt MeasFilterAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST ON Manual operation See Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 188 SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME Name This command selects a measurement filter and automatically sets its state to ON Setting parameters Name Name of the measurement filter or User for a user defined filter An overview of available measurement fi
174. A TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 3 2 29 Result Summary The Modulation Accuracy results in a table For details on the parameters see chap ter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 57 Basis of evaluation The majority of the values that are displayed in the Result Summary are calculated over the Evaluation Range see chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 189 They are evaluated according to the setting of the Display Points Sym parameter For example if Display Points Symbol is 1 only the symbol instants contribute to the result displayed in the result summary Table 3 2 Results calculated over the evaluation range PSK MSK QAM FSK EVM Frequency Error MER Magnitude Error Phase Error Power User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 48 Result Types in VSA PSK MSK QAM Magnitude Error FSK Rho Power The following results that are based on internal estimation algorithms see chapter 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 106 are calculated over the Estimation range see also chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 107 Table 3 3 Results calculated over the estimation range PSK MSK QAM FSK Carrier Frequency Error Symbol Rate Error FSK Deviation Error Symbol Rate Error UO Offset FSK Measurement Deviation UO Imbalance Carrier Frequency Error G
175. ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM FEYE User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 28 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 9 to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 Eye Diagram Imag Q The eye pattern of the quadrature Q channel the x axis range is from 1 to 1 sym bols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 2 Eye O Meas amp Ref eo iM Clrw Fig 3 6 Result display Eye Diagram Imag Q Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM QEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 29 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 10 Eye Diagram Reali I 3 2 11 The eye pattern of the inphase I channel the x axis value range is from 1 to 1 sym bols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 1 Eye I Meas amp Ref e iM Clrw Fig 3 7 Result display Eye Diagram Real I Remote commands LAY ADD 1
176. ALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean frequency error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 358 R amp S FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA This command is available for FSK modulation only Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 mean 1 0 Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean magnitude error peak or RMS limit No
177. AM MSK riti ee te ads 107 Ranges e 107 Evaluation Seu e 167 Specifi rage rene te reris 168 Bcc c 195 Evaluation methods Data SOUNGE eret ror Ree este enr etn 15 Remote Evaluation range Configuration rti re Pe rrr rra eae 189 Configuration remote esee 334 Definition x i iei e eerte aes Display eee Entire result range Start stop values eet der EE Exporting VO data 2 s VQ data remote ende Softkey Trace data Traces External trigger af Level remote aedi eed Eye diagram Frequency result type icici arenen iniaa 28 Imag Q result type Real I result type ceeecesseeecesseeeeeeteeeseeateneeeaeeees 30 F Factory settings IReSIOLIFIQ icut iss an ete A E 132 File name fuer 133 Files Format Q data cn tdt ceavenotens 447 UO data binary XML ek Q parameter OT 448 Filter bandwidth BT Measurement filter nasennnananneennnianneeeenennnnreeenen ee 189 Transmit filler euer ddEegen EUREN AER EdRede 141 Filters De ModulatiOl 3 2 awed n toit er tarnen rns 62 Customized sii Customized creating ssiru inn anesan 65 Customized selecting A 218 Formulae 439 High pass remote High pass RF input Measurement 62 63 428 Measurement formulae AAA 441
178. AT 1 MHz Set the symbol rate DEM TFIL NAME RRC DEM TFIL ALPH 0 35 Select the RRC transmit filter D D D Query the available symbol mappings for QPSK modulation D 7 D D D LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVEC Create new window to the right of I Q constellation window 1 with error vector as data type Result 5 CALC5 FORM MAGN Set result type for window 5 to magnitude EVM DISPlay WINDow5 TRACe2 MODE AVER Add a second trace in average mode DISPlay WINDow5 TRACe3 MODE MAXH Add a third trace in max hold mode SWE COUN 10 Calculate an average over 10 sweeps 11 13 2 Programming Examples INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until the 10 sweeps have finished DISP WIND1 SIZE LARG Display the I Q Constellation result display window 1 in full screen HCOP DEST MMEM Define the destination of the screenshot as a file HCOP DEV LANG BMP Select bmp as the file format MMEM NAME C R_S INST USER IQConstellation bmp Select the file name for the printout HCOP ITEM ALL Print all screen elements HCOP Store the printout in a file called IQConstellation bmp DISP WIND5 SIZE SMAL Restore the I Q Constellation result display to one subwindow FORM DEXP HEAD ON Include a header in the trace export file FORM DEXP MODE TRAC Export the trace data not raw I Q data MMEM STOR4 TRAC 1 AverageEVM Save
179. Absolute result display these trace modes are not available at all Furthermore only one trace can be configured in the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions Remote commands Remote commands are provided to determine the first and last values currently dis played in a particular window DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 379 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STOP on page 379 And to determine the position of the current result range within the capture buffer SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst STARt on page 381 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions For various vector signal analysis functions the measured signal is compared to a defined ideal reference signal The more precise the reference signal the more precise the results become In the best case the possible data sequences within the signal to analyze are known in advance and can be used to compare the measured data to This is similar to defining a pattern for the entire result range Thus a falsely estimated reference signal due to false symbol decisions is avoided and does not influence the error calculation You can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the VSA application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine synchronization during the demod
180. C CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable L MARgin m EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 407 R amp S FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes
181. CDMA CDMA2000 etc For the description characterization of a continuous QPSK signal the following parameters are the most important Carrier Frequency Level e Symbol Rate e Transmit Filter 9 2 1 Transmitter Settings This section summarizes the necessary transmitter settings It contains a list of the parameters and step by step instructions for the R amp S SMW200A If you are interested in a more detailed description or background information refer to the user manual of the R amp S SMW200A which can be downloaded from the Rohde amp Schwarz website www rohde schwarz com downloads manuals smw200A html Frequency 1 GHz Level 0 dBm Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal Modulation QPSK Symbol Rate 1 Msym s Filter Root Raised Cosine with Roll Off 0 35 To define the settings for the R amp S SMW200A 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz Press the LEVEL key and enter 0 dBm Press the DIAGRAM key Select the Baseband A block Select Custom Digital Mod noo mc 5 o m In the General tab define the following settings Custom Digital Modulation A Set acc to standard User ament 3 Power Ramp Control Off Cosine 1 00sym Fig 9 2 R amp S SMW200A Custom Digital Modulation Dialog a Toggle the State to On b Enter the Symbol Rate 1 MHz c Set the Coding to Off
182. CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onDDEMod SGSTATlsnchHRHON 394 CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz FEUNGCion DDEMod GTATlepe NH 204 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SRERror sss 395 Ee BN CALCulate n2 MARKer m MAXimum APEAK esses eene nnne nnne renes nennen nennen nnn CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum LEF T terapeuta e rd sacs CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz MAximum HIGH GALGulate n MARKer m MAXimumy PEANK 26i tnr n a en enn CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINimUMILEF T 1 iet roe necem er er rea ari CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MiNimumNENT CALCulate n MARKer m MINimumt RIGE ucieeee einer e tete tacite edu pe ecc nn aae e Ep RR CALGulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt M Nim m PEAK iiinis eniradis adai Enia CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch CALCulate lt n gt iMARKer lt m gt e CAL Culatesns MARKGESInP X aic eie rcr eee ED Ur EY e eee eset eo Eve Tape e E bd vag irate ce 348 CAL Culate cnz MAh kercmz SX GUMmelEET eene enne NAE UE nenne rsen nne 354 CALCulatesn MARKer m X SLIMits RIGLELT uoc te E tpe eta ce et goes 354 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits S TAT6 aont itr na tacent itane eicere tob acit aper b data abd 355 CAL Culatespnz MARKOFSIp2Y EE 379 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe D CAL Culatesn gt IMSRA ALING SHOW versie eege eeu e oce cop pa aes tatnen
183. Delta 199 Outputs Config we 147 SE 201 Preamp 147 153 Ref TEE 152 Ref Level tegt esst 2 en medina 152 IROeffGS EE 167 RF Atten Auto we 154 RF Atten Manual Single Sweep Trace 1 2 3 A Trace Config ius Trigger OffSet TE 164 Upper Level Hysteresis AA 192 Window configuration eseeeeeeeeee 204 Specifics for ele le ele EE 136 Spectrum Result type transformation sssrinin 206 Spectrum Capture Buffer Error Res lttype eere treten a 53 Spectrum Meas Error FResultitype curent dre reed 53 SR see Symbol rate siesena 13 Standards see Digital standards geed ker mies 132 GE UE ee EE 167 DISPIAY 13 Statistics FOlmi lde 2 inset Rta ee teed cele ds 438 Oversatmiplifig retener romero 207 Result type transformation suuss 206 Status registers DescriptiOri etre idees Querying STAT QUES POW Status reporting system siirinsesi etade StdDev FORMU eee ME 438 Storage location Secure ser mode ertet erts 133 iso M 133 Suffixes Common Remote commands Swap UO Ee EE 309 Swap lQ E 161 Sweep ADOMMIAG iii ite e a ite 166 167 Configuration remote 913 338 Count see Statistic count esses 167 a EE 166 Symbol check fele M
184. E 148 295 Ww Window configuration eeeeeeee Data SOUNGE EE REMOTE TEE R sult type e Result type transformation i Window title bar information eeeeeeeees Windows Adding remote Rte tete 365 Closing remote aerem 367 370 GConfiguritiQ i ener ee rrr eite Layout remote z Maximizing remote A 365 Querying remote 2 aeree 367 Replacing remote e Splitting remote 965 Types remote X X axis QUAN ZO cast etico e eee Range Reference position Reference value Scaling Scaling default T Scaling automatically esesessesess Scaling e EE Scaling auto all windows Units ooo ca eee dosi tact ee etia EH E Los X value Mattes ceu OC CN aaah ole 198 Y Y axis Mix max IT 156 Eine 230 Range per GIVISION i nente toten t ttr 157 Reference position 156 228 Reference value 156 228 Scalihng n tes aa 155 Scaling Statistics seisis niet tet 156 Scaling auto 156 192 228 230 Scaling auto all windows sssrin arannira 192 B de 159 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eene Activating Deactivating remote Z Zooming Activating remote etin trente nnde Area Multiple mode remote es Area emote isi eet boten eee seeded
185. E 327 SENS amp DDEMod EQUalizer RESE h Are den gege Eegeregie Eo eroe Me PS Eege 328 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE 928 SENSe IDDBEMod EQUalizer S TATe tuer ne ertet co Gece kb e eer eta cre be S EA 328 SENSe DDBEMod FACTory VALUS rainse tnr dee EES 279 SENS amp IDDEMOG FIETOr AEPEIa icc toe c scott A 283 SENSe IDDEMOG FIETFer S TEE enges degen tee eer E Eed 283 SENSe IDDEMOGQ FORMAaL itur tede a ea eot Hd tear eti eco ocu SENSe HDBDEMOG ESISINS Tate su roten pea a etna ioi EE Ee we SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel SENSe HDDEMod F de ET 329 SENSE DDEMod F SY No E Oe ET EE 329 SENSe DDEMod KDA Ta S TAT6 ttt eite e repete tnt nan ro tt ha Pe ERE Rec a en ERR Rene 329 SENSe DDEMod KDA etc 330 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog cuerno erri the tnn n tke ere hen Eaa iiai 285 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue us SENSe HDDEMod MElbter ADPEIa iet chop ex rote i eni Cerca e e Codec Eu od Cre OE Ve EE eR RR de SENSe DDEMod MElIEter AU TO rcr tr rettet rr et ineo tha nach cer ti eoa TES oce kat SENSe DDEModq ME Iter NAME risiini narai asri ehe Pe ene Eee deren Rhe e EDI gerenda SENSe DBDEMod MElIbter USER oco ees SENSe DDEMod MEWIbter S TATe eiecit ner entere etn ern ce etn iet ne teer tne in SENSe DDEMod MSKF ORMaL 1 t reote etr e dre hh re DRE d Fa a eee EE Ta e era SERES ades SENSe DDEMod NORMalIZe ADIOOD isnt ente ep exo ere ehe ertet
186. EE SENSe DDBEMod NORMalize CF DRIft nero eren hr retener t t tihi three Eaa SENTES SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANF6l ia toti e tanien eor ra ether Eurer th Pa ENEE SENSe H DDEMod NORMalize PDERLEOE sii cene eee as tue entier Pera eve cui be tue EE ee A UA Dave pua Pedes SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance vs SENSe DDEMod NORMaliz IQOFfset ote ert ttt rte dE See SENSeHDDEMod NORMAaIIZe SRERTEOFE o intr dei rie to palea ck RR SEES R Ce RARE Nee UEaE SENSe DDEMod NORWMalize VALUe 6222 nin et n etu ect er rn trt heh tnn tinere rrr TOTEE SENSe DDEMod OP Timizatiori c 2 rtt tnr ince hereto Ere rere Ere a e TUR Eo e dove ei a SENSe DBEMOG PRA Eeer eege SENSe DDEMod PRESetRLEVel ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt 300 SENSe DDEMod PRESetRLEVel estt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 338 SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard ttt ttt itt 279 SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat ttt ttt ttt ttt a neran a ernan an SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate ttt ttt ttt ttt s ssbds ISENSe IDDEMoOAMFORMat tekk t kkas kenaa Ahna a a AAL nae nanas aaan ra anena a nena aa annae ane SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate ettet ttt ttt tots oobis SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat ttt ttt ttt ttt ttes dd SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue ttt ttt costis 308 SENSe DDEMOd SBANG ctt ttt ttt ttt tss s
187. EMod TFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command automati cally switches the filter on RST 1 Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 141 SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects a user defined transmit filter file Setting parameters lt FilterName gt The name of the transmit filter file Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 141 See Load User Filter on page 141 SENSe DDEMod USER NAME lt Name gt Selects the file that contains the user defined modulation to be loaded Setting parameters lt Name gt string Path and file name of the vam file 11 5 1 2 Configuring VSA Example SENS DDEM FORM UQAM Define the use of a user defined modulation SENS DDEM USER NAME D MyModulation vam Select the file name to be loaded Manual operation See Load User Modulation on page 139 Signal Structure The signal structure commands describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a pattern to which the instrument can be synchronized thus adapting the result range IGENSGeIDDEMod GEARch BURGCLENGb MA vimum cece cece ceca nennen nennen 290 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSEtLENGth MINimum eese 290 I SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIP FALELIYBIG utt ettam iubet oen o EEN E AANER 291 SENSe IDBEMod SEA
188. Evaluation Range b Enable the Entire Result Range option The displayed constellation diagram is no longer clear it contains additional points This is due to the fact that the constellation diagram now displays symbol instants that are beyond the burst C Const 1 Q MeaskRef 1M Ciw D MagAbs Meas amp Ref Stop 174 sym Fig 9 12 Evaluation lines not properly adjusted small red lines in the title bar o All measurement windows that consider the evaluation range are marked with two A Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 9 3 6 Comparing the Measurement Signal to the Reference Signal You have seen that it is possible to add different traces such as maximum hold or aver age to each window When evaluating the measurement signal it is also possible to display the ideal reference signal as an additional trace This can be a significant help when troubleshooting since it allows for an immediate comparison 1 Boo N Start from the configuration described in chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 246 Select window 4 to set the focus on it Press the TRACE key and then the Trace 2 softkey Select Clear Write as the Trace Mode and Evaluation Ref This adds a sec ond trace to your result display This trace is the ideal reference signal that can now be compared to the measurement signal see figure 9 13 mum EP EIN CPC ee ed User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 248 R amp S FSWP K70 Measure
189. Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 365 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does n
190. Event Manual operation See Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window on page 156 See Adjust Settings on page 157 Configuring VSA CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X BCOunt lt StatNofColumns gt This command defines the number of columns for the statistical distribution Setting parameters lt StatNofColumns gt numeric value Range 2 to 1024 RST 101 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Quantize on page 157 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Defining Min and Max Values on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the upper vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 5 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See Defining Min and Max Values on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 159 Configuring VSA CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe U
191. GES Offset Start 0 sym Stup 1900 Syiti Fig 10 9 The red circle shows the place where you can specify a pattern Solution Select an existing pattern or create a new pattern that you expect to be within the signal For more information see e Pattern Settings on page 143 chapter 8 2 2 How to Perform Pattern Searches on page 218 Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range A pattern can only be found if it is entirely within the result range Therefore this error message always occurs with a Pattern Not Found error Solution Choose the pattern as reference of your result range alignment Then the pattern will be forcefully part of your result range and the pattern search can succeed For more information see e chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 177 e chapter 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range on page 225 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fail The R amp S FSWP performs the pattern search in two stages e Stage 1 involves the generation of an UO pattern waveform by modulating the pat tern symbol sequence The l Q pattern is then correlated with the measured signal User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 258 R amp S9FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement At positions where the correlation metric exceeds the I Q Correlation Threshold the UO pattern is found e Stage 2 demodulates the measured signal at the I Q pattern location and the trans mitted sy
192. GN to define the magnitude result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 384 Frequency Response Phase Phase of the frequency response of the current equalizer Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 SSS epus quoe ee User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 37 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 18 CALC FORM UPH to define the unwrapped phase result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 384 Impulse Response Magnitude The Impulse Response Magnitude shows the magnitude of the equalizer filter in the time domain 3 ImpRespMag Equalizer Start 5 sym Stop 5 sym Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type see CALCulate lt n
193. H H H H H 1 1 1 D D DH T ETC TT TEE 4 T R H H H H H H H 1 D 1 D D D H D H H H H H H H H La N D D H H 1 D H H H H H R 4 L 1 DH H LU H H H H H H H H co See ee d 1 ee H H H H H H 1 D H H em e e e el o e e e bh e e e e alle e e e e A e e e e ebe e wm e ue H H i e 1 D D L H H H BEE seset SEEN VE SOTE EM t D e 1 H H H CH e mr mm le mm e KETTEN H H ea H H H H H H H H HL 1 a e c ce e ce ce N t e co e d T T 1 ap epnyiubeyy feymbol Frequency in Formulae APCO25 H CPM D D q 4 2 2 pBp 2 2 24 2 2 2 2 22 2Bp 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2224 2 2 2 2 2 2p 2 22 24 20 gp apnyiubeyy FETT EE TEE DEET EE TEE E e 4 2 2 R 4 J7 Jg Pessac de shades niin dodi Jee Mitis icc acci eet deer eendeiteg dace viet 80 12 14 16 18 f ymbol 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 100 Frequency in APCO25 H DQPSK H DH 1 1 D ee ee ee ee ee eee ne 20 D 1 D D D D D D D D 1 1 4 D D D D D D D 4 D 1 D D D 4 D D D D D J 1 D D D 1 1 D 4 D 1 D D D E D 1 D D D H D D i i c eN 0 8 6 D 0 4 D rr M PME D D D r D 1 D 1 D D D 1 D 1 D D r 1 D 1 D r 0 2 p O 4 p 2 24 pRp
194. In symbol tables the evaluated symbols are indicated by red square brackets D Symbol Table Hexadecimal Tc E cs d E sr oec ez T 1E OE oef os 15 1E 15 0 In other result displays that are based on the evaluation range only two red vertical lines are displayed in the diagram header to indicate a limited evaluation basis B Result Summary User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 126 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol Estimation points per symbol During synchronization the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal and various signal parameters are calculated as well as the optional equalizer You can define how many sample points are used for this calculation at each symbol Typi cally this is one point per symbol symbol rate or a factor of 4 sample rate Display points per symbol The number of points per symbol used for calculation may vary from the number of points used to display the results of the calculation If more points per symbol are selected than the defined sample rate the additional points are interpolated for the dis play The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes as illustrated in figure 4 67 I Q Vector Meas amp Ref 6 iMcCirw BI Q Vector Meas amp Ref amp 1M Cirw Stop 2 91 Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 imMClrw DI Q Vector Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw S XA Kei Start
195. LCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMIt MAC Curacy STAT 6 wvscseccacccctecsesnenecessasenesscnncesvecscaseenhiactbenescescesesabsazsavivsevscesavnaeactasibaes CAL Culatesn gt MARKEr lt lm 2A CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADROOD 0e cee ee cee teee eens eeeeeteeeeeteeeee 386 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onDDEMod STATS Al 387 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATlete CFERror ens 387 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onDDEMod STATS EVM 387 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC on DDEMod SGSTATlstteFDEbRror 388 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRIft eeen eerren 389 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onDDEMod STATistckGk DE RbRor 389 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onDDEMod STATisncEGk MDEViation eenen 390 CAL Culate nz MAh ker mz FEUNGCion DDEMod GTATlspeEGkRDEViaton eeren 390 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance sss 390 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onDDEMod GSTATlstteIOlMbalance 391 CAL Culate nz MAh ker mz FEUNGCion DDEMod GTATlsgcMERbord 391 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer sss 392 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onDDEMod STATlsticOOFFset 393 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATietcbERbor 393 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onDDEMod STATS OERbor 204 CAL
196. Mapping 4 3 3 Differential PSK With differential PSK the information is represented in the phase shift between two consecutive decision points The absolute position of the complex sample value at the decision point does not carry information In the physical constellation diagram the constellation points at the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation are shown as with common PSK meth ods This diagram corresponds to the display on the analyzer The position of the con stellation points is standard specific For example some QPSK standards define the constellation points on the diagonals while other standards define the coordinate axes In table 4 4 the symbols are assigned to phase shifts The QPSK INMARSAT map ping corresponds to simple QPSK with phase differential coding Tables table 4 5 and table 4 6 show two types of differential BPSK modulation Differential coding according to VDL is shown in table 4 7 It can be used for modula tion types with 3 bits symbol e g 8PSK Other types of modulation using differential coding method are described in chap ter 4 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation on page 77 Fig 4 19 Constellation diagram for DQPSK INMARSAT and NATURAL including the symbol map ping Table 4 4 DQPSK INMARSAT Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 90 90 180 4 3 4
197. Min Optimization goal is the minimization of RMS of the error vector EVMMin Optimization goal is the minimization of the EVM Configuring VSA Setting parameters Criterion RMSMin EVMMin RMSMin Optimizes calculation such that the RMS of the error vector is minimal EVMMin Optimizes calculation such that EVM is minimal RST RMSMin depends on selected standard Manual operation See Optimization on page 185 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO lt UseWfmForSync gt This command selects manual or automatic synchronization with a pattern waveform to speed up measurements Setting parameters lt UseWfmForSync gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 186 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe lt FastSync gt This command switches fast synchronization on and off if you manually synchronize with a waveform pattern Setting parameters lt FastSync gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 186 11 5 9 Measurement Filter Settings You can configure the measurement filter to be used Manual configuration of the measurement filter is described in chapter 5 10 Measure ment Filter Settings on page 187 For more information on measurement filters refer to chapter 4 1 4 Measurement Fil ters on page 63 Useful commands for defining measurement filters described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa on page 2
198. NSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror lt RefDevComp gt This command defines whether the deviation error is compensated for when calculat ing the frequency error for FSK modulation Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt RefDevComp gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Scales the reference signal to the actual deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the entered nominal deviation for the reference signal RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for FSK on page 182 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance lt ComplQImbalance gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ imbalance on or off Setting parameters ComplQImbalance ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 181 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset lt ComplQOffset gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset on or off Setting parameters lt ComplQOffset gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 181 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror lt SymbolClockError gt This command switches the compensation for symbol rate error on or off Setting parameters lt SymbolClockError gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 181 See Compensate for FSK on page 182 SENSe DDEMod OPTimization lt Criterion gt This command determines the optimization criteria for the demodulation RMS
199. NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency P
200. P K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis B Result Summary Current Mean Peak StdDev _95 ile 100 00 Gain Imbalance 0 00 Quadrature Error 0 00 Amplitude Droop For details on the limit check functions and settings see chapter 6 4 1 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines on page 202 To define a limit check 1 Configure a window with Modulation Accuracy as the Source see chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 204 2 Press the LINES key 3 Press the ModAcc Limits Config softkey in the Limits menu 4 n the Current tab define limits that the current value should not exceed for any or all of the result types Note the limits for the current value are automatically also defined for the peak value and vice versa However the limit check can be enabled individually for cur rent or peak values 5 Enable the Check option for each result type to be included in the limit check 6 If necessary define limits and enable the limit check for the mean values of the dif ferent result types on the Mean tab 7T f necessary enable the limit check for the peak values of the different result types on the Peak tab 8 Toreset the limits to their default values press Set to Default 9 Enable the Limit Checking On option or press the ModAcc Limits On softkey in the Limits menu The limit check is performed immediately on the current modulation accuracy mea surement resu
201. PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Analysis Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operatio
202. PSK 8 NORMal 8PSK 8 DIFFerential D8PSK 8 N3Pi8 3pi 8 8PSK EDGE 8 PI8D8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Setting parameters lt PSKformat gt NORMal DIFFerential N3Pi8 PIBD8PSK RST NORMal Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 139 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate lt PSKNstate gt Together with DDEMod PSK FORMat this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 286 Setting parameters lt PSKNstate gt 2 8 RST 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 139 SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat lt QAMformat gt This command defines the specific demodulation order for QAM Setting parameters lt QAMformat gt NORMal DIFFerential NPI4 MNPI4 NORMal Demodulation order QAM is used DIFFerential Demodulation order DQAM is used NPI4 Demodulation order 11 4 16QAM is used MNPI4 Demodulation order 11 4 32QAM is used RST NORMal Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 139 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate lt QAMNState gt This command defines the demodulation order for QAM lt QAMNSTate gt Order 16 16QAM 16 Pi 4 16QAM 32 32QAM 32 Pi 4 32QAM 64 64QAM 128 128QAM 256 256QAM 512 512QAM 1024 1024QAM Setting parameters lt QAMNState gt numeric value RST 16 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 139 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat lt QPSKformat gt This command defin
203. Predefined e 427 RECEIVE p M 62 hog cuape m ias 62 Signal processing 60 Standard specific formulae sssse 440 Transmit 62 427 Transmit formulae eee 440 Typcial combinations iei t 429 YIG remote EE 294 EIETWIZ chi i cr vector e ten re 65 Fine Synchronization sessist aaien i 186 Folders Digital standards annt tet 133 Formulae Analytically calculated filters 439 Evaluatiom nn Measurement filters Parameters nre Result Summary parameters sssss 436 Result Summary parameters FSK 437 Standard specific filters sessssssss 440 uuu 438 Trace averaging 2 riter reet 439 Transmit filler rrt tt 440 Free Run BI 163 Frequency Absolute result type A 30 Configuration 150 Configuration remote sssi siiis 297 eu UE 433 cc 151 Relative result type eesseeee 32 Frequency error Absolute result type A Formula 2t Relative result type ie RMS peak ormulael sees Frequency response Channel result type seeeeeeee 23 EDGE filters ettet Low ISI filters e Magnitude result type 2 eer 36 Phase result tyb8 n
204. Put TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix lt port gt Selects the used trigger port lt 2 gt selects trigger port 2 on the rear panel Configuring VSA Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 1 2 on page 149 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with oUT Put TRIGgereport 0TYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 1 2 on page 149 See Level on page 149 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 rear panel Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSWP has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RS
205. Q Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 8 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 8 1 Using the VSA option you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using pre defined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the mea surement settings to your specific requirements Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings in a file How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standarde 215 e How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements sese 217 e Howto Analyze the Measured Data 226 How to Perform VSA According t
206. R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Real ImpRespRealimag Equalizer 1 Imag ImpRespReallmag Equalizer Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 CALC FORM RIM to define the real image result type see CAL Culatecn FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 384 3 2 24 Magnitude Absolute Magnitude of the source signal in an individual capture buffer range max 256 000 samples If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping result ranges with a size of 256 000 samples each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Magnitude Absolute result display To scroll through the samples in different ranges use the Sweep Select Result Rng function or directly after a sweep turn the rotary knob When you scroll in the dia gram the right edge of the current range or the selected result range is displayed in the center of the next range if possible To display the entire capture buffer with all ranges in one diagram use the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display Note that trace modes that
207. R amp SSFSWP KT70 Vector Signal Analysis User Manual Start 0 sym 25000 sym S 1177 5685 02 01 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual describes the following R amp S9FSWP models with firmware version 1 10 or higher R amp S FSWP8 1322 8003K08 R amp S FSWP26 1322 8003K26 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSWP K70 1325 4280 02 requires R amp S FSWP B1 The software contained in this product makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgment on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSWP is abbreviated as R amp S FSWP R amp S SMW200A is abbre viated as R amp S SMW200A Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz e
208. RA application channels CALOulate n MSRA ALINe SHOW sisse etes i enne nnn aane ama aX aaa a nnana R san ARAS 361 CAL Culatesn MSRA ALINE WT E 361 CAL Culate nzMSbRA WlNDow cnz MAL 361 SENSe MSRA CAPTureg OPESel 2 reiten eheu a ere drei onda qu Ne Eo e RAE RART 361 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart g
209. RCR BURSESKIP RISIng caedi uo seite RRE EEN ege 291 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATal og nri eren internen kann hann enar eina 291 ISGENZGe JDDEMod SIOhNalPATTem nenne rere he tenete nene 292 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue eccentric 292 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATC sccecseceeeeceeeeeeeceeseeeesaeeeeeeeeaeees 292 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VAL ue 292 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAXimum lt MaxLength gt This command defines the maximum useful length of a burst Only those bursts will be recognized that fall below this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MaxLength gt numeric value Range 0 to 32000 RST 1600 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Min Length Max Length on page 143 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimum lt UsefulLength gt This command defines the minimum useful length of a burst Only those bursts will be recognized that exceed this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Note the difference to manual operation lt Min_length gt anuai Min Useful Length lt Run In gt lt Run Out gt Setting parameters lt UsefulLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 32000 RST 100 Default unit SYM Configuring VSA Manual operation See Min Length Max Length on page 143 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP FALLing lt RunO
210. RN AEVM 1 Clrw B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Gain Imbalance De I Q Capture Amplitude Droop Start 26 sym i i n Stop 174 sym d C Mag CapBuf D MagAbs Meas amp Ref i i I ji r I j Pattern Search Start 0 sym i Stop 10000 sym Start 26 sym 07 10 2010 13 32 07 Fig 9 10 Result range that exceeds the burst length 9 3 5 Setting the Evaluation Range In some scenarios such as in Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges the result range contains symbols that are not supposed to be considered for the EVM or other calculated parameters that are displayed in the Result Summary Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range To change the evaluated data 1 Start from the configuration described in chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 246 2 Display the UO constellation diagram of the signal in window 1 Source Meas amp Ref Signal Result type Constellation I Q see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration on page 238 A clear 8PSK constellation is displayed C Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clew D MagAbs MeastRef Stop 2 535 Start 26 sym Stop 174 sym Fig 9 11 Evaluation lines properly adjusted User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 247 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples In order to understand the effect of an incorrectly set evaluation range change the evaluation range to include the entire result range a Inthe Overview select
211. Rch SYNC MODE lt MeasOnlyOnPatt gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that the measurement is performed only if the measurement was synchronous to the selected sync pattern The command is available only if the pattern search is activated see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 318 Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnPatt gt MEAS SYNC MEAS The measurement is performed independently of successful synchronization SYNC The measured values are displayed and considered in the error evaluation only if the set sync pattern was found Bursts with a wrong sync pattern sync not found are ignored If an invalid or no sync pattern is found the measurement waits and resumes running only when a valid sync pattern is found RST 0 Manual operation See Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct on page 172 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect Select This command selects a predefined sync pattern file Setting parameters Select string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Selected Pattern for Search on page 172 See Standard Patterns selecting an assigned pattern on page 173 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe lt PatternSearch gt This command switches the search for a sync sequence on or off Setting parameters lt PatternSearch gt ON OFF 1
212. Result Displays Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available Which result types are available depends on the selected data source You can define which part of the measured signal is to be evaluated and displayed The determined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces For background information on the result and evaluation ranges see chapter 4 6 Mea surement Ranges on page 122 e Evaluation Data Sources Im MS i coni ec tet e cete te itid oe et do eo teat cea eee ven 15 e Result Types In VSA uei cce renes e ratos etae resa Haa d ea 19 e Common Parameters in VGA nennen nen nnn nnnnss nens n esas aane 57 3 1 Evaluation Data Sources in VSA All data sources for evaluation available for VSA are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The data source determines which result types are available see table 3 1 For details on selecting the data source for evaluation see chapter 6 5 Display and Win dow Configuration on page 204 In diagrams in the frequency domain Spectrum transformation see Result Type Transformation on page 206 the usable UO bandwidth is indicated by vertical blue lines 3 Spectrum RealImag CapBuf usable IQ Bandwidth Start 7 68 MHz Stop 7 68 MHz Capt UMC M 16 Measurement amp Reference Signal oci seis dietas 16 STO rr error v
213. Rotated scienna aaae 26 Error Vector Magnitude EVM cccccecsetecsecccnseesedecsseetecseateetesececnseesesenseeneee 27 Eye Diagram Fire ue y cecideee rete ene cnet OEN cts 28 Eve Diagram Imag OQ e E 29 Eye Diagram Real I erret dee Reti ud tr e E RISE 30 Frequency ioo fcc E 30 Ree EE M 32 Frequency Error Absolulg i te A ixs 33 Frequency Error Relative itii Repetitio ener 34 FREQUENCY Response Group MEET 35 Frequency Response Magntitude cd ere nte ero esca Rau edt 36 Frequency Response Phase 37 Impulse Response Magnitude 38 Impulse Oe 39 Impulse Response Heallmag eren enne 39 Magnitude Absolilte 2 aee eec iceepn edat neca itp nein kan LER gn anta bep u e 40 Magnitude Overview Absolute et cce er tem Gti n roce dace deb ced 41 Magnitude REV M 43 MEG IIe EE 43 e CE 44 Phase Wrap EUIS 45 Phase WEAN EE 46 Real Imag UG ccccccecates sey ecetectenig s cernerent nitride hr Lebe dunt eg 47 Recul SUMMAN cried deed ed D eet get eed ege cbe e gr vnd e deve etus 48 Spectrum Capture Buffer ETror iniecto eficaz een 53 Specium Measurement eg E 53 uelle C MMS 54 Vector Js pg 56 i e EE 56 Bit Error Rate BER A bit error rate BER measurement compares the transmitted bits with the determined symbol decision bits
214. S FSQ K70 R amp S FSWP K70 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSWP K70 or Why do I have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSWP K70 When generating an MSK FSK reference signal the R amp S FSQ K70 automatically replaces the Dirac pulses generated by the frequency mapper with square pulses with the length of one symbol In the R amp S FSWP K70 however this replacement is part of the transmit filter routine Thus the R amp S FSQ and the R amp S FSWP require different transmit filters for measuring the same FSK MSK signal Example e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was NONE you need to choose Rec tangular as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSWP e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was GAUSS you need to choose GMSK as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSWP Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is signif icantly different Solution e Make sure that the position of the Evaluation Lines is reasonable The Result Summary only evaluates sample instants that are within the evaluation lines Hence in the case the Result Range covers the burst ramps it is important to adjust the Evaluation Range appropriately mE HN CPC RI RN UU User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 265 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Spectrum VSA
215. SA MSK PSK QAM QPSK FSK ASK APSK UQAM QPSK Quad Phase Shift Key PSK Phase Shift Key MSK Minimum Shift Key QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation FSK Frequency Shift Key ASK Amplitude Shift Keying APSK Amplitude Phase Shift Keying UQAM User defined modulation loaded from file see SENSe DDEMod USER NAME on page 289 RST PSK SENS DDEM FORM QAM See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 See Modulation Type on page 138 See Load User Modulation on page 139 SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate lt FSKNstate gt This command defines the demodulation of the FSK modulation scheme Setting parameters lt FSKNstate gt Manual operation 2 4 8 2 2FSK 4 4FSK 8 8FSK RST 2 See Modulation Order on page 139 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog This command queries the names of all mappings that are available for the current modulation type and order A mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols Return values lt Mappings gt Example Example Usage Manual operation A comma separated list of strings with one string for each map ping name SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog Result CDMA2K FWD DVB S2 GRAY NATURAL WCDMA
216. SE ele SENSe MSRA GAP Ture EEN Seed eege EE ET EE SENSe SWESp COUNECGURRGLEiL concernent rees etr erret deeg eor equ dap EEE AEE SENSe SWEep COUNI VAL iret teret rettet eta E rtp ved EENG CAL Culatesn DDEM SPECltmum STATe cin rci catt Er corte ee co iere ucla 372 GALCulate lt n gt DEL E ET EE E 348 CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MANimum APE ak enne i 350 CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MAXimumM LEF T tice uncia korr e tear cetera er eca NIAE 350 CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker mz MANimum NENT 351 CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MANimum RICH 351 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK essent nnne nnns 351 CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MihNimum LEET 351 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT A 351 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt 4352 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK esent 351 CALGCulate n DELTamarkeremo T RAO acres roe ete trt anne weve teur t d pd gta te a eats 349 CAL GCulate r DEETamarkerstri X ire cerei ride e et Pr vic ce ae rect E Due teg 349 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarkercmz X AbBGolute AA 378 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkeremo XRELaltive cerent cct cori edet pa gei e Cen e tau ue 378 CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarkersin gt GE 349 GAL Culatesn DELTamarkerems iS TAI KE 348 GALGulate n ELINsstartstop S AT6 ret rte rrr nh ce
217. SK 32APSK Remote command PSK SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 286 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 286 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat on page 287 MSK SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat on page 285 QAM SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat on page 286 SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate on page 287 FSK SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate on page 284 ASK SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate on page 283 APSK SENSe DDEMod APSK NSTate on page 283 FSK Ref Deviation FSK only The FSK Reference Deviation sets the deviation to the reference frequency In case of 2FSK it indicates the distance from the reference frequency to the positive negative deviation frequency and in case of 4FSK the distance to the outer positive negative deviation frequency To set the deviation as a multiple of the symbol rate x SR select Relative mode To set the deviation as an absolute value in Hz select Absolute mode Note that this parameter is available only for FSK modulated signals Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue on page 282 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative on page 282 Modulation Mapping The available mapping types depend on the Modulation Type and Modulation Order For more information on the modulation mapping refer to chapter 4 3 Symbol Map ping on page 70 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue on page 285 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog on page 285
218. SPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 299 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is opti mized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSWP You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 192 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 338 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For information on other input settings see chapter 5 5 1 Input Settings on page 145 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSWP26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSWPS the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command
219. Se DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch on page 317 JTO UO Correlation Threshold The WO correlation threshold decides whether a match is accepted or not during a pat tern search see also chapter 4 4 2 I Q Pattern Search on page 96 If the parameter is set to 100 only UO patterns that match totally with the input signal are found This is only the case for infinite SNR SSS gt ccpupees ea User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 171 Burst and Pattern Configuration If the threshold Auto option is enabled the default value of 9096 is used As long as the pattern is found there is no need to change this parameter However if the pattern is very short approximately 10 symbols or if the signal is highly distorted tuning this parameter helps the pattern search to succeed To define a threshold manually dis able the Auto option Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold on page 317 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO on page 316 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid pattern has been found When measuring signals that contain a pattern and are aver aged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 317 Selected Pa
220. Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 340 Signal Capture Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of evaluations set in Statistics Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 339 Refresh non Multistandard mode Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Remote command INITiate REFMeas on page 341 Refresh MSRA only This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated b
221. Symbol Decisions on page 97 2 Bit Error Rate Current Accumulative Bit Error Rate 0 499 021 530 Total of Errors 510 Total of Bits 1022 The following information is provided in the BER result display e Bit Error Rate error bits number of analyzed bits Total of Errors number of detected bit errors known data compared to symbol decisions Total of Bits number of analyzed bits For each of these results the following values are provided BER Result Description Current Value for current result range Minimum Minimum Current value during the current measurement Maximum Maximum Current value during the current measurement Accumulative Total value over several measurements for BER Total of Errors Total of Bits similar to average function Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM BER mE E KNEE C XC RN a User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 22 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 2 3 2 3 to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 CALC BER to query the results see CALCulate lt n gt BERate on page 385 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay The Frequency Response Group Delay of the channel is the derivation of phase over frequency for the original input signal It is a measure of phase distortion 4 ChanGroupDel
222. T Peak max FREQ ERR n T Magnitude Error RMS 1 MAG_ERR a Tp Y Peak max MAG_ERR n T Formulae FSK Deviation Error A ERR A rrr A yeas x A per B 1 i A per Estimated FSK deviation error Hz FSK Measurement Deviation A MEAS Aygas B A REF Estimated FSK deviation of the meas signal Hz FSK Reference Deviation A REF FSK reference deviation as entered by the user Hz Carrier Frequency Error fo j E The carrier frequency error of the measured signal Hz Carrier Frequency Drift fa D 2 z T The drift in the carrier frequency of the measured signal Hz Sym d A 6 3 Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary The statistical evaluations in the result summary are based on the measurement results that are displayed in the Current column Hence the index m here repre sents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count If the measurement values are represented in the logarithmic domain the linear values are averaged The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain The linear values are indicated by the subscript lin in chapter A 6 2 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 436 Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSWP idx arg max x m m Mean 8 1 2 M
223. T DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 149 11 5 2 4 Configuring VSA OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 149 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 rear Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 149 Frequency SENSE FREQUSINCY NEE 297 SENSe FREQuency CEN Ter STEP ii cocti ades Las ONES X RYE AE E ER ERR IRE 298 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO 2 22 2cecccecceeceteneccnentececsenchedeceanecetaneneneraeceesens 298 SENS ere Et ose cce kem Drei ce eee ines a e e eased 298 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MH
224. TRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo PTRansition BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude PTRansition BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 409 11 12 Commands for Compatibility STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Commands for Compatibility The following commands are maintained for compatibility reasons with previous R amp S analyzers only Use the specified alternative commands for new remote control pro grams
225. To make sure you realize once the problem is fixed Switch on the EVM trace and keep an eye on it Center frequency Reference Level overload Symbol rate Transmit filter Check the Modulation Type measurement Sideband inversion Swap IQ Mag CapBuffer e colored bar Result Range in a range where you expect the signal to have the set modulation no Try to increase Run In and Run Out in the Signal Description gt Signal Structure dialog 260 417 ns 260 417 ns See part 2 yes Is your signal bursted C Sync prefers more valid symbols Is Sync prefers more valid yes symbols displayed in the status bar his can be problematic If you have a pattern you can try to use it for synchronization i e use the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern Demodulations Advanced dialog an you increase the length of your Result Range Is your burst possibly larger Coarse Synchr Increase the Result Range to at least 8xModulation Order Go back to Do you transmit uncor related random bits on the physical level your Result Range large than 8xModulation Order e g 8x4 32 for QPSK no i Try to switch on the equalizer in the Demodulation dialog and compensate for the channel Y Try to compensate fo
226. UEStionable AGPLimit GA EE 407 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRarSILOT sitire torte rtp erret eerte a tpe gta oe et oes 408 STAT S QUESti able DIQ GA E le EE 409 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENIt uenerit n pne revue eoe pen nonae set ey qe xta Leo rn eee ke ERNER EREE 407 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDiitiori nene tren ntt nn tert n toe 407 STATus QUEStionable FREQUuerncy ENABIe eer roe rea hire taEURES Re ra e ri Y ea TE Pra i eTA ENANAR 408 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition 408 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency P TRansitioh terno trn natur tene then tini no cann 409 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EMENIt crono rn nr t n i erre entrate ter rne 407 STATus QUEStionable LIMitsm EFEMENI J ciacic rt rcnt er ttr dere tree 407 STATus QUEStionable LIMit m CONDition aout rn ntu tr n etre na tnn tias 407 STATus QUEStionable LIMitsm ENABIe rena aterert cene ee generen npn ib Ceo SES ta TEEN ergeet 408 STATus QUEStionable LIMit amp m NTRariSItIOn cito t rr ent trt t n t nente rente 409 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m NTRansition eese emen nennen 409 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m PTRansition esee nennen enne 409 STATus QUEStionable EMARginsm EVENI J nint pte erret prend tee 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency CONDition
227. User Manual of the R amp S FSWP Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSWP follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric valu
228. VF Result Types in VSA Evaluation Data Result Type SCPI Parameter Source Symbols Binary Octal z Decimal Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM MAGNItude Real Imag l Q RIMag Vector I Q COMP Modulation Errors Magnitude Error MAGNItude Phase Error PHASe Frequency Error Absolute FREQuency Frequency Error Relative FREQuency Modulation Accuracy Bit Error Rate BERate Result Summary RSUM Equalizer Impulse Response Magnitude MAGNItude Impulse Response Phase UPHase Impulse Response Real Image RIMag Frequency Response Magnitude MAGNItude Frequency Response Phase UPHase Frequency Response Group Delay GDELay Channel Frquency Response Magni MAGNitude tude Channel Frequency Response Group GDELay Delay Multi Source Spectrum Real Imag Capture buffer RIMag query only Error Spectrum Real Imag Measurement RIMag query only Error For details on selecting the data source and result types for evaluation see chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 204 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 e BLEN Bale BER ena drerit ia ties 21 e Channel Frequency Response Group Delai 23 e Channel Frequency Response Magnitude 23 e Constellation Frequency iuieeeeseseeceeeeecece nennen teint Epp innu nap nn tna ERES nnn nun E nan 24 3 2 1 Result Types in VSA Gonstellatio V i S EA 25 Constellation UO
229. X Axis Reference Value AA 157 L X Axis Reference Position 158 L Range per DIVIBION ies iinan eunadan pet tnt rat nit ch nunc d 158 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window If enabled both the x axis and y axis are automatically adapted to the current mea surement results only once not dynamically in the selected window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Auto Scale All function Remote command For statistics result type transformation CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 303 For all other results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 336 Defining Min and Max Values Indicates the current range borders according to the current settings for information only For statistical evaluations only defines the displayed range using minimum and maximum values Values in the range 1e lt value lt 0 1 are allowed The y axis unit is defined via the Y Axis Unit on page 159 setting The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 304 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 304 Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the displayed range using a reference point and the size of the divisions For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 228 Y Axis Reference Value
230. YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available e VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 294 Preamplifier If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSWP26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSWPS the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 300 INPut GAIN VALue on page 300 5 5 2 Output Settings The R amp S FSWP can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSWP Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters 5 5 2 1 Input Output and Frontend Settings e General Output Configuration rege oreet ere ede mete enun 148 DC Power Output eut LEE 150 e Signal Source Output Configuraton enne 150 General Output Configuration To configure general output Output settings can be configured via the Output dia
231. active For more information see Message Burst Not Found on page 253 chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 168 The offset of the pattern within the burst is incorrectly set It is possible to set a pattern offset to speed up the pattern search The offset of the pattern would be the offset of the pattern start with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst However if the entered offset is not correct within about 4 sym bols of tolerance the pattern will not be found ectrun VSA Ref Level 22 00 dim Mod Modulation amp Signal Description m el Att 10 0d8 Freq 1 0GHz Cap Ler SGL TRG EXT BURST PATTERN Modulation Signal Description A EVM Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 Max Length 148 sym 546 462 Run In B sym 211 077 f Run Out B sym 211 077 I w Pattern E 1 J Start 3 sym Stop 151 sym C Mag CapBuf 1 Cirw Name DGE_TSCC Pattern s 0 0 s Descriptio e Burst Lengthi Offset Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym 09 09 26 Fig 10 7 GSM EDGE burst Pattern is actually located in the middle of the burst The correct value for Offset here would be 58 Solution Try one of the following Remove the offset unknown Enter the correct offset within about 4 symbols of tolerance For more information see Offset on page 143 e The specified p
232. adaquate number of uncorrelated random bits to ensure correct demodulation 4 Select the Input Frontend button to define the input signal s center frequency amplitude and other basic settings 5 Select the Signal Capture button and define how much and which data to cap ture e Capture length the duration or number of symbols to be captured e Sample rate how many points are to be captured for each symbol 6 Optionally select the Trigger tab and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted 7 For bursted signals select the Burst Pattern button and define the criteria to detect the individual bursts within the input signal see chapter 8 2 2 How to Per form Pattern Searches on page 218 8 Select the Cut Result Ranges button and define which of the captured data is to be demodulated see chapter 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range on page 225 8 2 1 8 2 2 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 9 Select the Demodulation button to configure and optimize the synchronization process 10 Select the Meas filter button to select a different or user defined measurement fil ter to improve the accuracy of the error vector see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 218 11 Select the Evaluation Range button to define which part of the demodulated data is to be evaluated and di
233. age 48 Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Amplitude droop in dB symbol for current sweep AVG Amplitude droop in dB symbol evaluating the linear average value over several sweeps RPE Peak value for amplitude droop over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of amplitude droop PCTL 95 percentile value of amplitude droop Retrieving Results Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL The command queries all results of the result summary as shown on the screen Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the carrier frequency error measurement per formed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Carrier frequency error for current sweep AVG Average carrier frequency error over several sweeps RPE Peak carrier frequency error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency error PCTL 95 percentile value of frequency error Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM lt type gt This command queries the results of the error vector magnitude measurement of digital demodulation The output va
234. age data from the measured signal The second trace displays the spectrum of mum PEN CF ad User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 53 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays IEN the real image data of the error Optionally the data source of the traces can be switched Which source is currently displayed for which trace is indicated in the window title bar see also figure 2 1 1 Spec Realimag Meas amp Ref IMClrw 2 Spec Meas vs Error 1M Clrw 2E Clrw 3 Spec Realimag Error 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MCOM to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS ERR to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 CALC TRAC MEAS CALC TRAC2 ERR to define trace1 to be based on the measurement data and trace 2 on the error default see CALCulate n TRACe t VALue on page 344 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results for measurement data see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 4 Symbols on page 383 TRAC DATA TRACE2 to query the trace results for error data 3 2 32 Symbol Table Symbol numbers are displayed as a table Each symbol is represented by an entry in the table The symbols can be displayed in binary octal hexadecimal or decimal for mat Selected symbols using markers are highlig
235. ain Imbalance Carrier Frequency Drift Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Current value In the Current column the value evaluation for the current evaluation is displayed For example the EVM Peak value in the current sweep corresponds to the peak of the trace values within the evaluation range for the current sweep as indicated by marker 1 in figure 3 20 R amp S9FSWP K70 2 Result Summary EVM MER Phase Error Magnitude Error RMS Peak RMS Peak RMS Peak RMS Peak Carrier Frequency Error Symbol Rate Error Rho I Q Offset I Q Imbalance Gain Imbalance Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Power Measurements and Result Displays Current 0 36 1 32 48 90 37 59 0 21 0 84 0 14 0 50 1682 29 0 999 987 68 55 65 86 0 01 0 01 0 000 00 27 95 Peak 0 36 1 347 48 90 37 59 0 21 0 84 0 14 0 50 1682 29 0 999 987 68 55 64 39 0 01 0 01 0 000 00 27 95 M1 1 1 320 9 o 760 000 sym Fig 3 20 Example for result summary with current EVM peak value marked ftt If you want to compare the trace values to the results of the Result Summary make sure to match the displayed points per symbol of the trace and of the Result Summary Refer to Mean value on page 207 for details In the Mean column the linear mean of the values that are in the Current column is displayed Note that if the values are in a logarithmic representation e g the I Q
236. al levels above this value may not be measured correctly This is indicated by an IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSWP is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 299 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSWP so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Input Output and Frontend Settings The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSWP must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DI
237. algorithm is used in order to obtain estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error phase error UO offset gain imbalance quadrature error and the amplitude droop Alterna tively it is possible to disable the estimation algorithm For FSK modulated signals estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error FSK deviation error and the carrier frequency drift are calculated The measurement signal is subsequently corrected with these estimates Compensation for FSK deviation error and carrier frequency drift can be enabled or disabled For more information on synchronization see chapter 4 4 5 Synchronization and the Reference Signal on page 101 chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 107 chapter 5 9 2 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization on page 183 Result Display The selected measurement results are displayed in the window s Configuration of the windows can be performed via the result window configuration dialog see chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 204 Overview of the Demodulation Process BUSES ARC uc ceste onde e ombre de eo ha dtt ea id bu cae Ls uec ux 94 Q Palter E E 96 e Demodulation and Symbol Decelons sse 97 e Patom Symbol Check ua eee cett pee rat etae te er be eg dee da 100 e Synchronization and the Reference Gong 101 e The EgualiZer RERO RE RENE ISSN SRRNNSINRRAR ERE R TEN ARSRR EE ATE 103 4 4 1 Burst
238. ame Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Modulation order Number of values each symbol can represent e g 8 for 8 PSK Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ 5 Define the format used to define the individual symbols of the pattern 6 Define the symbols of the pattern a Select the symbol field you want to define If necessary add a new symbol field by selecting Add b Enter a value using the keyboard Depending on the Modulation Order lt n gt the value can be in the range 0 to n 1 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements C Select the next symbol field or insert a new one and continue to define the other symbols To scroll through the fields for long patterns use the scrollbar beneath the input area The number beneath the scrollbar at the right end indi cates the sequential number of the last symbol field the number in the center indicates the sequential number of the currently selected symbol field To remove a symbol field select it and press Remove 7 Select Save to save the pattern under the specified name The pattern is stored on the instrument as an xml file named Name ml under Installation directory NvsaNMPattern If you copy this file to another location you can restore the pattern at a later time e g af
239. ameter Impulse Response Raised cosine RC Alpha a RH E sin T cos T bit PX 2 Z 1 4 n T Root raised cosine Alpha a in 1 m RRC cos a at T a SEL 4a a zT 4at TY Gaussian filter BT wi MM 2z pT with re 2aBT A 6 6 Standard Specific Filters A 6 6 1 Transmit filter EDGE Tx filter ETSI TS 300 959 V8 1 2 Linearized GMSK 3 aite S i7 for O lt t lt sT ONS i 0 0 S un Is E Jan dt 0 ett Ad else for else t 5T 2 _ SE cl d 0 O lt t lt 4T for 4T lt t lt 8T l 3237 2 rot Formulae O t a f e dr C t is the impulse response of the EDGE transmit filter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter EDGE Measurement filters RC filter Alpha 0 25 single side band 6 dB bandwith 90 kHz Windowing by multi plying the impulse response according to the following equation l 0x 1 57 wlt 40 5 cos e 1 57 2 257 1 57 y e3757 0 Saa The following figure shows the frequency response of the standard specific measure ment filters EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Magnitude dB DH 1 D D DH DH D DH DN D H D D D 1 H L D i 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 1B 2 Frequency in fsymbol Formulae EDGE HSR Wide Pulse 20 gp epniuBej Am mm mm mm ale E 100 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in kamt EDGE NSR 20 em mm e e elle aaa e e be e me e ms de e em ms mm e eck ms n e e e
240. ample for a failed burst search due too a burst that is too short mum EPI EFC RI RN NUUS User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 254 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Solution try one of the following Switch on the Magnitude Capture Buffer result display Move a marker to the start of the burst Move a delta marker to the end of the burst and compare the burst length to the settings in the Signal Description dialog Increase the search tolerance in the Burst Search dialog Keep an eye on the green red field If the burst search succeeds you can see the length of the found bursts Setthe minimum burst length to 50 and the maximum burst length to 5000 For more information see Burst Settings on page 142 Burst Configuration on page 170 The signal is highly distorted and or has modulation noise One possibility to enhance the robustness of the burst search is to increase the minimum gap length If the bursts within your capture buffer are not closely spaced it makes sense to increase the value of this parameter Burst amp Pattem Search Burst amp Pattern Search Durst scorch fleri ours scorch Damp N Auto according to Signal Description Burst found N Auto according to Signal Description Burst found Meas only if Burst was found Meas only if Burst was found Auto Configurabon Auto Configurabon Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 ys Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 7
241. and elimi nated if a pattern was successfully detected at symbol level see also chapter 4 4 4 Pattern Symbol Check on page 100 If modulation types are used where the information is represented by the phase transi tion e g differential PSK or MSK the absolute phase position is not an issue Thus the ambiguity of the starting phase does not have an influence on the symbol deci sions If the measurement signal contains a known pattern it is also possible to use a data aided DA estimator at this stage This means that the estimator operates on a known data sequence i e the pattern If the signal contains a pattern it is possible to choose between the above described non data aided estimator and the data aided estimator with the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern If the data aided estimator is employed the phase ambiguitiy can be resolved at this stage Overview of the Demodulation Process Demodulation amp Symbol Decision Senge IQ Samples From Result Range Extract Result Range IQ Meas with corrected timing IQ Meas with corrected timing phase frequency offset scaling Symbol Decision IQ Meas corrected IQ Symbols Passed on to Pattern Symbol Check Fig 4 45 Demodulation and Symbol Decision algorithm Overview of the Demodulation Process 4 4 A Pattern Symbol Check This stage performs a bit by bit comparison between the selected pattern a
242. and end within the capture buffer It ignores bursts that are cut off c Man CapBuf orn 20 dam Start Osym Fig 10 2 Example for incomplete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 159 e The current measurement is being performed on a burst that has not been captured completely User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 253 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw NI Start 0 sym 01 04 2010 14 43 12 Fig 10 4 Example for measurement on complete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings or increase the result length Note however that in this case the results are actually correct and the message can be ignored e The settings do not match the signal In order to allow you to select certain bursts the burst search only searches for bursts that have a length between Min Length and Max Length plus a tolerance that you can set in the Burst Search Dialog In case the burst is e g shorter than the Burst Min Length the burst search fails C Mag CapBuf 3 Modulation amp Signal Description Modulation Signal Description Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 738 462 Max Length 300 sym 1 108 m Start 0 sym i Ll 1300 sym Run In S sym 211077 Gsym 2 J 211077L Fig 10 5 Ex
243. and interferers are effectively suppressed Only for very wide signals FSK no TX filter used it can be necessary to try higher values for the sample rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 increasing the UO bandwidth The UO data delivered to the DSP section has no considerable amplitude or phase distor tion and a suitable bandwidth The Signal Capture dialog box Data Acquisition tab shows the sample rate and the usable UO bandwidth achieved for the current settings see Usable UO Bandwidth on page 161 e After the optional measurement filter The measurement signal and the reference signal can be filtered by various mea surement filters which have different bandwidths The filters described above are the ones that directly affect the bandwidth of the cap tured UO data and the final measurement signal and reference signal Note however that several other filters are also involved in the DSP section but are not mentioned above Receive filter to prevent ISI intersymbol interference e filters necessary for various estimators e others UO Bandwidth The bandwidth of the UO data used as input for the vector signal analysis is filtered as described in chapter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 60 Its flat usable bandwidth no considerable amplitude or phase distortion depends on e the used sample rate which depends on the defined Symbol Rate
244. and the FSK referencedeviation you have set Parameter Description SCPI parameter Frequency Error RMS The average RMS and peak frequency error in 96 The FSK DERRor Peak frequency error is thedifference of the measured fre quency and the reference frequency The frequency error is normalized to the estimated FSK deviation FSK Deviation Error The deviation error of FSK modulated signals in Hz The FDERror FSK Meas Deviation The estimated deviation of FSK modulated signals in Hz FSK MDEViation FSK Ref Deviation The reference deviation you have set in Hz FSK RDEViation Carrier Frequency Drift The mean carrier frequency drift in Hz per symbol FSK CFDRift Common Parameters in VSA Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic lt Parameter gt R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in VSA is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings For information on the basic processing of UO data in the R amp S FSWP see the R amp S FSWP UO Analyzer User Manual e Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Drocessing 60 e Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandhawidi 67 Symbol Eer e BEE 70 e Overview of the Demodulation PEOGCOSS 1 5 tt ertt nete ttn e xen 91 e Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Error 106 e Measurement EE eco rere eri
245. annel to VSA the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Automatic refresh of preview and visualization in dialog boxes after configura tion changes The R amp S FSWP supports you in finding the correct measurement settings quickly and easily after each change in settings in dialog boxes the preview and visualization areas are updated immediately and automatically to reflect the changes Thus you can see if the setting is appropriate or not before accepting the changes Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be evaluated in VSA can not only be measured by the VSA application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Fur thermore the evaluated UO data from the VSA application can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the LI Save or EN Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FSWP User Manual e Restoring Factory Settings for Vector Signal Analyse 132 e Configuration According to Digital Standards AAA 132 e Configuration IESSEN et eda Pr c t ocu 135 e Signal Descrip
246. annelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 277 Activating Vector Signal Analysis lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 277 Example INST CRE REPL PhaseNoise PNO PNO2 Replaces the channel named PhaseNoise by a new measure ment channel of type Phase Noise named PNO2 Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Phase Noise channel is acti vated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL PhaseNoise Deletes the channel with the name PhaseNoise Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName comman
247. apping 8PSK 52 N WI 5 Fig 4 14 Constellation diagram for 8PSK including the symbol mapping for DVB S2 Symbol Mapping 4 3 2 Rotating PSK A rotating PSK modulation is basically a PSK modulation in which additional phase shifts occur These phase shifts depend on the symbol number e g for a rr 4 QPSK the third symbol has an additional phase offset of 3 1 rr 4 This offset has the same effect as a rotation of the basic system of coordinates by the offset angle after each symbol The method is highly important in practical applications because it prevents signal tran sitions through the zeros in the I Q plane This reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal and the linearity requirements for the amplifier In practice the method is used for 311 8 8PSK for example and in conjunction with phase differential coding for rr 4 DQPSK Symbol mapping The logical constellation diagram for 311 8 8PSK comprises 8 points that correspond to the modulation level see figure 4 15 A counter clockwise offset rotation of 3117 8 is inserted after each symbol transition Fig 4 15 Constellation diagram for 37 8 8PSK before rotation including the symbol mapping for EDGE Symbol Mapping Fig 4 16 I Q symbol stream after 3778 rotation in I Q plane if the symbol number 7 is transmitted six times in a row Fig 4 18 Constellation diagram for 77 4 QPSK Natural including the symbol mapping Symbol
248. arameter values see chapter 11 9 3 Retrieving Parameter Val ues on page 384 Result Summary Individual Results The Result Summary can display either all or only a single modulation accuracy parameter Only the most important parameters can be displayed individually namely those for which modulation accuracy limits can be defined see Limit Value on page 203 Individual results are selected for display by tapping the Result Summary table header only once a double tap maximizes the result summary window A Table Configura tion dialog box is displayed in which you can select the parameter to be displayed R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays Result Summary Configuration Y p ETETE a Results to be displayed g L EVM RMS L EVM Peak L i Phase Errors RMS e Phase Error Peak e Magnitude Error RMS e Magnitude Error Peak e Carrier Frequency Error E e IQ Offset By default all parameters are displayed If you select a specific parameter the Result Summary display is replaced by the individual result display EVM RMS 0 84 bc Mean Fig 3 21 Result display for individual value in Result Summary In addition to the current measurement value the statistical results see on page 48 and the peak limit value see on page 203 for the selected parameter are displayed For details on the displayed results see on page 57 Remote command on page 375 User Manual
249. art up to 2 symbols before or after the actual burst However an offset of only one symbol has the effect that none of the predefined symbol sequences in the Known Data file will be found To avoid this try one of the following Align the result range to a pattern instead of the burst Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again Continuous signals For continuous signals without a pattern the result range is aligned randomly Thus a very large number of possible sequences must be predefined Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incor rect again 9 Configuration Using the VSA application you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using predefined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the mea surement settings to your specific requirements e Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings in a file VSA application When you switch the application of a measurement ch
250. asurement channel tab to change a specific setting For step by step instructions on configuring VSA measurements see chapter 8 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis on page 215 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSWP except for the default channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 278 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes Enable the Specifics for option The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window The indicated data flow is updated for the selected data source If the Specifics for option is not enabled the overview displays the default data flow and the general settings independently of the selected window Note The Display Config button is only available in the general overview not in the window specific overview Signal Description
251. ata from the capture buffer or measurement are provided in trace1 whereas the data for the spectrum of the Real Imag data of the error are provided in trace 2 How ever the data sources for the traces can be changed see CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 344 For details on the results for real imag traces see chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Dia grams on page 383 Retrieving Parameter Values For each parameter the VSA application calculates and shows various statistical val ues Retrieving Results Current value Mean value Calculated as the average of the number of results defined by the Statistic Count Peak value e Standard deviation e 95 percentile Unlike the mean value the 95 ile is a result of all measurement results since the last start of a single or continous sweep or of all measurements since the last change of a measurement parameter For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 57 and chapter A 6 Formulae on page 433 GALCulatesmsBERale eet eere era ete eee adeste s d dana 385 CAL Gulate lt n DDEMBURSELEN Gt iced cce icit eire it e SEENEN vae eset uote civ dv vc cedrus 386 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADROOp eese 386 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL ccccccesscceeseeeseeneeees 387 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepc CFEbror 387
252. ate MSK modulated signals FREQ _ ERR FREQw Eas FREQ t with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 SSS aaa User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 34 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for chapter 3 2 13 o This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but Frequency Error Absolute on page 33 1 Freq Error Rel 49 sym Fig 3 11 Result display Frequency Error Relative Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 377 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 3 2 15 Frequency Response Group Delay The Frequency Response Group Delay of the equalizer is the derivation of phase over frequency It is a measure of phase distortion User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 35 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result
253. ation Errors Table 4 19 Amplitude transfer functions Amplitude transfer function transmitter Amplitude transfer function analyzer Mtgltbute Tanski function Ters mti Output P ower input P awer dag m 8 8 x 2 v 6 6 4 2 Tout Pamer lag Anpitude Iranefer Function Analyzer 1 TT L Rm b EI e e e ce H oc H uc tc Output P ower Input P ower lag e w 48 A 438 G 44 N W 8 D 4 2 9 heut Power log A logarithmic display of the amplitude transfer functions is shown in table 4 19 The analyzer trace is shifted against the transmitter trace by this scale factor Phase Distortion Table 4 20 Effect of nonlinear phase distortions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortion analyzer Phase Distortion Tranarntter 0 01 02 03 04 0 06 07 OB Be Phase Destomen Analyzer The effect of nonlinear phase distortions on a 64QAM signal is illustrated in table 4 20 only the first quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected These effects are caused for instance by saturation in the transmitter output stages The sig nal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is minimized The second column shows the signal after scaling Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors
254. attern does not coincide with the pattern in your signal In the R amp S FSQ K70 it is possible to search for multiple patterns at the same time For example in a GSM measurement the capture buffer can be checked for all TSCs simultaneously This is not possible in the R amp S FSWP K70 Solution Make sure that the correct pattern is specified in the Signal Description dialog mum EP EH CC ae User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 256 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement For more information see chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 137 Message Result Alignment Failed The result range alignment is not possible for the patricular capture buffer The result range needs UO data that has not been captured ectrun VSA Ref Level 10 00 dim Att 10d8 Freq 1 AEVM Length Result Range Alignment Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Reference Capture Alignment Left Offset Symbol No Burst Start O sym 1 a Start 126 sym Visualization C Mag CapBuf FERRI T LTT OO H H H 1 H 1 1 1 CU LD M 126 274 t 4 7 Je oo dem4 n y L li l Il t 7 7 Display 0 7 1 3 7 1 7 O E Config Start 0 sym Stop 500 sym 11 01 2010 115707 Fig 10 8 Example for failed alignment In this windowshot the alignment of the long result range to the burst center is not pos sible because there are not enough samples in th
255. axis displays former y values Y axis displays statistical informa tion e Trace 1 the probability of occurrence of a certain value is plotted against the value Trace 2 the cumulated probability of occurance is plotted against the value Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe on page 372 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 375 Highlight Symbols If enabled the symbol instants are highlighted as squares in the window for measured and reference signals in time normal display as well as error displays Display and Window Configuration Only evaluations that are based on symbols e g constellations or traces not eye dia grams support this function Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe SYMBol on page 377 Display Points Sym Defines the number of display points that are displayed per symbol If more points per symbol are selected than the defined Sample Rate the additional points are interpola ted for the display The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes For more information see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Sym bol on page 127 Note If the capture buffer is used as the signal source the Sample Rate defines the number of displayed points per symbol the Display Points Sym parameter is not available If Auto is enabled the Sample Rate value is used Alternatively select the number of points to be displayed pe
256. ay Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XFR DDEM IRAT to define the channel frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 CALC FORM GDEL to define the group delay result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 384 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude The frequency response magnitude of the channel indicates which distortions occurred during transmission of the input signal It is only determined if the equalizer is activa ted mum PEN CC I ee User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 23 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 2 ChanFreqResp Equalizer ei Clrw Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz The bandwidth for which the channel transfer function can be estimated is not only limi ted by the usable UO bandwidth but also by the bandwidth of the analyzed input sig nal Areas with low reception power e g at the filter edges may suffer from less accu rate estimation results Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XFR DDEM IRAT to define the channel f
257. b 1 2 H BD E 80 100 gp epniiuBejq fsymbol Frequency in CDMA2000 1X Forward D 1 wee eww pee ene D 4 D 1 D 1 D 4 D 1 D D 1 D 4 D 1 D D D e mm mm mm sl zm zm ee 1 T2 b J qp 2 4 2 2 d BR 4 2 2 2 B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2224 2 2 2 2 2p 222 24 2 eee eee eee eee ee EEN 20 eee eee eet D e mm zm mm zm mm d a mm zm mm mm e zm zm mm zm mm d a sm zm mm zm wm wk wm zm wm zm mm wm a zm zm mm zm mm alle mm zm mm zm b A22 mm wm alle zm mm zm mm mm il 40 D D D D 1 RO A A p A A A 4A AA A EELER 60 80 100 gp apnyiubeyy feymbol Frequency in Formulae CDMA2000 1X Reverse D T4 2 2 e zm mm zm mm mm P T4 T 2 2 4 Ee e mm TR eee eee eee eee ee ck eee ee eee et ee ee ees D D D D r D D H D D r D D D L DH D 2A Bp Q4 B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24 pBp 2 2 224 JLb 2 J 2 L 4 J D D 2 24 2 2 2 2 pBp 2 2 2 2 Q4 ETC EE e zm mm mm mm mm Jes T 4 TEE CEET CEET 20 r 0 20 40 ent 80 gp apnyiubeyy 100 fsymbol
258. bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate Regarding the record length the following rule applies Record length Measurement time sample rate Maximum record length for RF input The maximum record length that is the maximum number of samples that can be cap tured depends on the sample rate Table 4 2 Maximum record length Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 200 MHz 440 MSamples precisely 461373440 440 1024 1024 samples 200 MHz to 10 GHz upsampling MSRA master 200 MHz to 600 MHz 220 MSamples 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Usable UO bandwidth MHz Option B80 RF input BW 0 80 fout Without BW option 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 10000 Output sample rate fout MHz Fig 4 6 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate with and with out bandwidth extensions Symbol Mapping 4 2 1 3 R amp S FSWP without additional bandwidth extension options sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum UO bandwidth 10 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Table 4 3 Maximum I Q bandwidth Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 10 MHz proportional up to maximum 10 MHz 10 MHz to 10 GHz 10 MHz MSRA master 10 MHz to 600 MHz 4 2 1 4 R amp S FSWP with option B80 UO Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth
259. ble use a longer pattern For more information see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process on page 91 Message Result Ranges Overlap This message does not indicate an error It is merely displayed to inform you that the defined result ranges in the capture buffer overlap Thus some captured data is evalu ated more than once For example the same peak value may be listed several times if it is included in several result ranges and averaging is performed on partially dupli cate values However a negative influence on the measurement results is not to be expected 10 3 Frequently Asked Questions Problem Synchronization fails despite correct settngs ennn nnrreneeeeee 261 Problem Synchronization seems to fail for all zero all one 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit sequence RT 262 Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement window 262 Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement window the trace of the reference signal is not errem itis 262 Problem The measurement window does not show average results 262 Problem The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain 263 Problem The Vector UO result display and the Constellation UO result display look dif TORT ID cc refe aee mirc aw esd eet D uu ERO UNSER RA eege 264 Problem The Constellation UO measurement result display has a different number of c
260. borne dun dd 407 STATusOUEGtonabiel MAbRoin mmtEEVENO 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVENIt J eese 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency EVENItJ esee 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVM EVENItJ cesses 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n FSK EVENIt eese 407 STATusOUEGtonabie MODulatton nz IORHOTEVENU nnne 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaes 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe EVENItJ eee 407 STATus QUEStionable POWher EVENItJ 2 2 nidan aaaea ai 408 STATus QUEStIonable SY NSDEVENI curar e reet ge ee tha e ee euet eo benennen 408 STATusOUEzuonable ACL mmtENAb le seen enne nnn nennen nn nias 408 STATUS QUESHGnable DIG NEE 408 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle sess eene nnne nnne 408 STATusOUEGuonable LUlMit zmmzENAble 408 SGTATusOUEGtonabiel MAbRoin m ENADle nne 408 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz ENABie e eeenn nennen nnns nan 408 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency ENABle essen 408 SGTATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz EVMENADle eene 408 STATusOUEGuonable MODulation nz FSKENAbBle eene 408 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo ENABle e eere 408 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n MAGNitude ENABle cesses 408 STATusOUEzt
261. both The default result type is Magnitude Relative The following result types are available chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 chapter 3 2 23 Magnitude Relative on page 43 chapter 3 2 26 Phase Wrap on page 45 chapter 3 2 27 Phase Unwrap on page 46 chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 chapter 3 2 12 Frequency Relative on page 32 chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag I Q on page 47 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 16 Evaluation Data Sources in VSA chapter 3 2 10 Eye Diagram Real I on page 30 chapter 3 2 9 Eye Diagram Imag Q on page 29 chapter 3 2 8 Eye Diagram Frequency on page 28 chapter 3 2 5 Constellation I Q on page 25 chapter 3 2 34 Vector I Q on page 56 chapter 3 2 4 Constellation Frequency on page 24 chapter 3 2 33 Vector Frequency on page 56 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL REF see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 Symbols The detected symbols i e the detected bits displayed in a table The default result type is a hexadecimal symbol table Other formats for the symbol table are available but no other result types see chap ter 3 2 32 Symbol Table on page 54 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL SYMB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 Error Vector The modulated difference between the complex measurement signal and the complex reference signal Modulation measurement signal reference signal For example
262. calculate results for several sweeps Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual ranges and thus may not provide useful results in this result display For more information on result ranges see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 In the Magnitude Absolute result display the actual signal amplitude is displayed User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 40 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 22 Mag yas IMEAS with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the defined sample rate defined by the dis play points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal Displays the actual signal amplitude for the selected evaluation range 3 Mag CaptureBuffer 8000 sym Fig 3 12 Result display Magnitude Absolute for capture buffer data Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL CBUF to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 382 Magnitude Overview Absolute Magnitude of the source signal in the entire capture buffer the actual signal amplitude is displayed Mag mras IMEAS with t n Tp and Tp the duration
263. can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative to Answer Spectrum Reallmag Meas amp Ref calculates the FFT of the result Reall mag Meas amp Ref Reallmag Meas amp Ref has the unit none In this case none means the measured signal has been scaled such that it matches the ideal corresponding ref erence signal as well as possible The reference signal in turn is scaled such that max abs at symbol instants 1 0 Question How can I get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer in remote control Answer Use the following remote commands SENSel DDEMod PRESet GSM NB Load the GSM standard SENSel1 DDEMod RLENgth 10000 SYM Enlarge the capture buffer length such that all the bursts you want to demodulate can be seen within the capture buffer INITiatel CONTinuous OFF Go to single sweep mode User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 268 Frequently Asked Questions SENSe1 SWEep COUNCt 0 Set the Statistic Count to Auto mode INITiatel IMMediate Do single sweep SENSe1 SWEep COUNt CURRent Query the number of demodulated bursts within the capture buffer For n 1 NumberOfBursts SENSe1 DDEMod SEARCh MBURSt CALC n TRACe4 TRACel Query the result symbols in window D End Step through all bursts and query the demodulated symbols Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong Answer For an FSK modulated signal the signal process
264. can be fulfilled by signal specific filtering of the analyzer input signal receive filter or Rx filter If an RRC root raised cosine filter is used in the transmitter an RRC fil ter is also required in the analyzer to obtain ISI free points In many PSK systems RRC filters are used as transmit receive and measurement fil ters To determine the UO modulation error the measurement signal must be com pared with the corresponding ideal signal For this purpose a reference filter is required which is calculated by the analyzer by convolving the coefficient of the trans mit filter Tx filter and the meas filter see figure 4 2 If unfiltered signals have to be measured as well e g to determine nonlinear signal distortions no measurement filter is switched into the signal path and the reference filter is identical to the transmit filter see figure 4 2 In the baseband block diagrams see figure 4 2 the system theoretical transmitter and analyzer filters are shown for PSK and QAM demodulation For the sake of clearness RF stages IF filters and the filter stages of the digital hardware section are not shown For a correct demodulation the following filters have to be accurately specified for the analyzer e Transmit filter filter characteristic of transmitter e Meas filter PSK QAM UserQAM MSK The and the Q part of the measurement and the reference signal are filtered with this filter FSK The instantaneous fre
265. cannot be edited directly SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSWP Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Const I Q Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in VSA application 1 Window name 2 Result type 3 Data source type 4 Trace color 5 Displayed signal for Meas amp Ref or multi data source M Meas R Ref C Capture buffer E Error 6 Trace mode Diagram area The diagram area displays the results according to the selected result displays see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop symbols or time of the evaluation range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 Measurements and
266. carrier frequency drift for FSK modulated sig nals Query parameters type Usage lt none gt Carrier frequency drift for current sweep AVG Average FSK carrier frequency drift over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK carrier frequency drift over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK carrier frequency drift PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK carrier frequency drift Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERRor type This command queries the results of the frequency error of FSK modulated signals Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt RMS frequency error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS frequency errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS frequency error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation type This command queries the results of the measurement deviation of FSK modulated signals Query
267. ccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaa esse esaeeeeeeeaaes 332 SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE lt EvmCalc gt This command defines the calculation formula for EVM Setting parameters lt EvmCalc gt Manual operation Configuring VSA SIGNal SYMBol MECPower MACPower SIGNal Calculation normalized to the mean power of the reference sig nal at the symbol instants SYMBol Calculation normalized to the maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants MECPower Calculation normalized to the mean expected power of the mea surement signal at the symbol instants MACPower Calculation normalized to the maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants RST SIGNal See Normalize EVM to on page 184 SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet lt EVMOffsetState gt Configures the way the VSA application calculates the error vector results for offset QPSK Setting parameters lt EVMOffsetState gt Manual operation ON OFF 1 0 ON VSA application compensates the delay of the Q component with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period OFF the VSA application substracts the measured signal from the ref erence signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol
268. ccr tex eame kx ERR epe lame tee CHE Rex 122 e Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol sees 127 Capture Buller RTE EE 128 e Known Data Files Dependencies and Hesirtctons ren 129 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing This section describes the used filters in vector signal analysis with an R amp S FSWP as well as the bandwidth after each filter The relevant filters for vector signal analysis are shown in figure 4 1 IQ Demodulation Bandwidth Bandwidth i Optional IF Filter gm m goa iral Rit Measurement Filter Digi aseba aseba Baseband Analog Section f Digital Hardware Section DSP Section Fig 4 1 Block diagram of bandwidth relevant filters for vector signal analysis e After the IF Filter only for RF input operation bandwidth 40 MHz e After the digital hardware section The phase and amplitude distortions of the IF filter have been compensated for Usually the I Q data has a usable bandwidth of about 0 8 sample rate For details refer to chapter 4 1 1 I O Bandwidth on page 61 The I Q data s sample rate and bandwidth are automatically adjusted to the set symbol rate For most modulated signals even the smallest allowed value for the User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 60 4 1 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing sample rate leads to a sufficient UO data bandwidth The whole spectrum of the input signal is captured but most adjacent channels
269. ce RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk 11 7 2 11 7 2 1 Analysis Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 194 e e e uu DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 194 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 195 Working with Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Manual configuration of markers is described in chapter 6 3 Markers on page 197 e Individual Marker SelliltEs o eene e bee E E eb ed b den 346 e Marker Search and Positioning Gettings A 350 Individual Marker Settings In VSA evaluations up to 5 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time CAL CulatesmMARKersmosNDEE aida ra ttd aa deca ecd ig e baa 347 CAL Gulate mnsMARKerembs d El E 347 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe
270. ce IFPower HYSTeresis on page 311 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 310 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 312 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 310 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSWP MSRA User Manual Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 361 Signal Capture 5 6 3 Sweep Settings Access SWEEP The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated Continuous SweepiRUN CONT cendres enr Ph ert ae eee a ent rn gen 166 single Sweep RUN SINGLE rro Leere add eel ia 166 Continue Single SWegDp EE 167 Refres
271. ce the instrument was switched on or the equalizer was reset are considered to calculate the new filter To start a new averaging process use the SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet on page 328 command RST TRACe Example DDEM EQU MODE TRAC Activates the tracking mode of the equalizer Manual operation See Mode on page 182 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet This command deletes the data of the currently selected equalizer After deletion train ing can start again using the command DDEM EQU MODE TRA see SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 327 Usage Event Manual operation See Reset Equalizer on page 183 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE Name This command saves the current equalizer results to a file Setting parameters Name string File name Example DDEM EQU SAVE D MMyEqualizer Saves the current equalizer results to D MyEqualizer vae Manual operation See Store Load Current Equalizer on page 183 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the equalizer For more information on the equalizer see chapter 4 4 6 The Equalizer on page 103 Setting parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST OFF Example DDEM EQU OFF Manual operation See State on page 182 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO lt FineSyncAuto gt This command selects manual or automatic Fine Sync S
272. ch trace can be defined as error or cap ture buffer measurement depending on the result type see Multi Source on page 18 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 344 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Avg Min Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max CADAT l Min Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace R amp S9FSWP K70 l Analys is 6 2 For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only one trace is available Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 346 Trace Export Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Traces gt Trace Export The captured trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file The format of these files can be configured traces Std 3G WCDMA SR 3 84 MHz mm Traces Trace Export Mode Header Decimal Seperator Point Export Trace to ASCII File for all Windows Export Trace to ASCII File for Specific Window Ge Ca 1 Constella
273. channel distortion can only be determined if the equalizer is on see State on page 182 Thus compensation can only be disabled if the equalizer is on By default channel compensation is enabled to improve accuracy of the error results If compensation is disabled the EVM is calculated from the original input signal with channel distortions For details on these effects see chapter 4 5 1 3 Modulation Errors on page 108 Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset on page 331 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance on page 331 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop on page 330 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror on page 331 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel on page 330 Compensate for FSK If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Thus these distortions are not shown in the calculated error values Carrier Frequency Drift e FSK Deviation Error e Symbol Rate Error For details on these effects see chapter 4 5 2 3 Modulation Errors on page 121 Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift on page 330 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 330 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror on page 331 Equalizer Settings The equalizer can compensate for a distorted transmission of the input signal or improve accuracy in estimating the reference signal For details see chapter 4 4 6 The Equalizer on page 103 State Equalizer Settings A
274. cted It is recommended that you define a comment before storing the standard Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt FileName gt string The path and file name to which the settings are stored Example DDEM STAN COMM GSM AccessBurst with Pattern Defines a comment for the settings DDEM STAN SAVE C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Stores the settings in the user defined digital standard USER_GSM Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Standard on page 134 11 5 Configuring VSA E ERR dl e E 281 e input Gutput and Frontend Settings e reme rec ore edere 293 LEE Doce enaa a oe st jeedende tps dean sey aaeeees ietaiadenteepeedeteine 307 e Triggering MeasSUremMents ccccccceceeccecsieeeseccdeetedecccectesecedsheucneeedienesseceestegeecs 309 e e e E nacido etes lie teer eec v bea c EE LR eed daa 313 e Configuring Bursts and Pattems AA 314 e Defining the Result Range eeeeccceeneeees creen recepta et tena unde aeu R n dna 321 gelen e EE 324 e Measurement Filter Settings ida epe eed cede eiae aint 332 e Defining the Evaluation Ranjge eene tette tinea niteat RR dn deas 334 e Adjusting Settings Automatically sss 335 11 5 1 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optim
275. ctivates or deactivates the equalizer to compensate for a distorted channel Note for FSK modulated signals the equalizer is not available Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer STATe on page 328 Mode Equalizer Settings Defines the operating mode of the equalizer Normal Determines the filter values from the difference between the ideal reference signal and the measured signal Normal mode is sufficient for small distortions and performance remains high 5 9 2 Demodulation Settings Tracking The results of the equalizer in the previous sweep are considered to calculate the new filter until adaquate results are obtained This learning effect allows for powerful removement of larger distortions within a minimum of sweeps During the tracking phase calculation of the equalizer requires additional processing time Freeze The filter is no longer changed the current equalizer values are used for subsequent sweeps User A user defined equalizer loaded from a file is used Averaging The results of the equalizer in all previous sweeps since the instru ment was switched on or the equalizer was reset are considered to calculate the new filter To start a new averaging process select the Reset Equalizer button Calculation of the equalizer requires addi tional processing time Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 327 Filter Length Equalizer Settings Defines th
276. culated for symbol instants only Remote command CALCulate n STATistics MODE on page 375 6 6 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar lee EK D 208 Multiple LOOM EE 209 Resor Gnoma DIS lays scit coena tdeo Pede belegt eodd rece eto adde ei duae 209 X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode 209 Single Zoom ER User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 208 Zoom Functions A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 362 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 362 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 363 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 363 Restore Original Display Restores the original display that is the originally calculated displays for the entire capture buffer and closes all zoom windows Rem
277. d Example INST LIST Result for 2 measurement channels PNO PhaseNoise PNO PhaseNoise2 Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Phase Noise PNOISE Phase Noise Spectrum R amp S FSWP B1 SANALYZER Spectrum Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel Activating Vector Signal Analysis Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name UO Analyzer R amp S FSWP IQ IQ Analyzer B1 Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSWP K7 Noise Figure Measure NOISE Noise ments R amp S FSWP K30 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN PhaseNoise PNO Renames th
278. d and eval uated The goal of this section is to familiarize you with the VSA application features that are relevant specifically for the analysis of bursted signals 9 3 1 Transmitter Settings This section summarizes the necessary transmitter settings It contains a list of the parameters and step by step instructions for the R amp S SMW200A If you are interested in a more detailed description or background information refer to the user manual of the R amp S SMW200A which can be downloaded from the Rohde amp Schwarz website www rohde schwarz com downloads manuals smw200A html Frequency 1GHz Level 0 dBm Standard GSM EDGE Burst with normal symbol rate User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 241 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals To define the settings for the R amp S SMW200A 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz 3 Press the LEVEL key and enter 0 dBm 4 To define the standard a Select the Baseband A block b Under TSMA standards select GSM EDGE 5 To configure the burst type in the GSM EDGE A dialog box a Inthe Framed Single Configuration tab highlight the first slot in the frame diagram Frame Select Slot To Configure Fig 9 6 R amp S SMW200A GSM EDGE frame configuration settings Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals b In the GSM EDGE A Burst Slot0 dialog box select the Burst Type Nor
279. de Seed REESEN 380 El EE Eet e le RER 380 MMEMory STORe sn s TRAQGS ritate teri eae vta eee ha dec ipea ao eee ipaa Pau ea 380 ISENSe JDDEMod SEARCh MBURSESTAIU erat e Eoo a pe eon eee o EA netad 381 TA tt esr pretia adu a beati da anitat Ead ed ca i CU vies 381 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X ABSolute This command queries the absolute x value of the selected delta marker in the speci fied window The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Usage Query only This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches mar
280. diagram only Symbol Mapping Ter poro wr n UZ UV Pr ee df 018 012 010 07A 078 072 070 oe o 01A 073 071 o 01B 019 013 011 07B 079 e 1 DE 01D 017 045 DIE 07D 077 01E 01C 016 014 O7E 07C 076 074 e 9 o 5 LI 7 Fig 4 37 Constellation diagram for 512QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only He Ee Be Be Ee Ee Ze Eo Jo Fe Fe Fo Fe Ge xe Fo He Be Be Be Se Ze Ze Ee Se Fo Fe Fo Fo Be Fo Ge Be ge Se Ge Ze Ze Ze Ge Se Ze Se Se Ge Go Yo Se e Se Be Ee Ze De Ze Ee de Fo Yo Se de Be Be fe Be fe fe Ge Be Ge Be Be fe Fe de Be Ee Ge Se Be Be Be Be Be Be Be Be Be Ne Ue fe Re Ee Be Ee Ee Se Be Se Se Ge Ge He De Ge Ge Uo Be Ge Le Ee De Ze Be Be be de He He be de Be Ho Se Ge Eo Ee Ee Be ge de Yo Se pe Ze Se De Ge De De Be Ge Ge Se Be Be fe ge Se gogo fe Be Se De Ge Be Fe De De Bo Bo Be Se Ge fe Se Be De De De De Be De Be Ge de Be Yo be Ze Be te be Se De De be Ge Be be De Ze 3e de de Be Be Be Be Ge Ge Ge jo Ee Ee Ee Ee de Ze de de Be Be Be Ge Ue Ve De Ue Ee Ee De Ee de Je de Je Be Be Be Ee Qo De fe fle Ee Ee Ee Ee de de de 3e de Ue He Be ile Ue e be 5o Eo be te Fig 4 38 Constellation diagram for 1024QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only Symbol Mapping 4 3 9 ASK 2ASK OOK ASK stands for Amplitude Shift Keying
281. displayed at the reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition on page 305 Range per Division X Axis Scaling Defines the value range to be displayed per division on the x axis Since the display consists of 10 divisions by default the displayed range is Range 10 lt Range per Division gt Note If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in width the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision on page 305 Units Access AMPT gt Unit Config You can configure the units for both axes of the diagrams Hz Res Len E Amplitude YScale Unit X Axis Unit Sissies aim 1 MagAbs Meas amp Ref E Signal Capture o Note that unit settings are window specific as opposed to the amplitude settings POTIUS T E 159 jc iq e 159 X Axis Unit Defines the unit of the x axis in the current result diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME on page 305 Y Axis Unit Defines the unit of the y axis in the current result diagram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 307 For phase diagrams CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe on page 305 For statistics CALCulate lt n gt STATis
282. dow 1 such that it displays the EVM versus time measurement Source Error Vector Result Type EVM see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Dis play Configuration on page 238 Select the window to set the focus on it 2 To display the trace averaged over several measurements or the maximum hold trace over several measurements press the TRACE key 3 Add further traces by pressing the TRACE key and then either using the Trace 2 3 or the Trace Config softkeys Set the second trace to Average and the third trace to Max Hold Note that the configured traces appear in the window title mum EP EIN CC NI RN NUUS User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 240 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples Start 0 sym i Stop 800 sym Fig 9 5 Several traces in one window 4 Press RUN SINGLE again The current capture buffer is evaluated for this trace setup In the channel informa tion bar you can see the number of completed evaluations Stat Count Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Mod Att 24dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen SGL Stat Count 10 A EVM 1 Clrw 5 To change the number of evaluations press the SWEEP key and select Statistic Count Config Select Manual and enter the desired number of evaluations e g 12 When you press RUN SINGLE the VSA application will capture UO data until 12 evaluations are completed 9 3 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals In this measurement example a bursted GSM EDGE signal will be measure
283. dows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result At 2 1 1 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Configuring the Result Display Usage
284. dulation Query parameters type none power measurement for current sweep AVG Average of power measurement over several sweeps RPE Peak of power measurement over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of power measurement PCTL 95 percentile value of power measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset type This command queries the results of the UO offset measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type Usage none Origin offset error for current sweep AVG Average origin offset error over several sweeps RPE Peak origin offset error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of origin offset error PCTL 95 percentile value of origin offset error Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor lt type gt This command queries the results of the phase error measurement performed for digi tal demodulation Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt RMS phase error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS phase errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum phase errors over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS phase error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum phase errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum phase errors over
285. e n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK STATe sse rennen rsen CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK VALue seen eren nennen rennen CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK RESUlt sess 396 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent STATe essent 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue essent 358 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent RESUIt eese 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan RESUIft eese 396 CAlCulate cnz UM MACCuracvFERorbbptakGTATe nennen rennen 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue sessi eene 358 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak RE Gu 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent STATe essen rennen 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue n CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent RE Gu 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan STATe sese nennen rennen 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue sessi ener nnne 358 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan RESUlt seen 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak STATe s
286. e 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command specifies whether the marker search works on the real or the imag trace for all markers Analysis Setting parameters lt MarkReallmag gt REAL IMAG RST REAL Manual operation See Real Imag Plot on page 200 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the left limit of the marker search range for all markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt SearchLimit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or measure ment time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measure
287. e R amp S FSWP User Manual Performing a Measurement Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSWP User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 11 7 1
288. e capture buffer before the burst starts In this scenario the trigger settings should be changed such that the burst is in the middle of the capture buffer Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see e chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 159 Message Sync failed Check for all zero signal A prerequisite for correct synchronization is a random data sequence of an adaquate size Solution Make sure the input signal contains an adaquate number of uncorrelated random bits Noto 00 000 11 1 1 1 0r01 01 01 O1 01 for example For QAM modulation the result length the data on which synchronization is based should correspond to at least 8 times the modulation order see Result Length on page 178 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 257 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Spectrum VSA Modulation amp Signal Description Ref Level 4 00 d m Att 16 dB Modulation Signal Description SGL BURST PATTERN Signal Type A EVM Continuous Signal e Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 us Max Length 148 sym 546 462 us Run In B sym 11 077 us Run Out 3 sym 11 077 us vw Pattern Oo l 5 Start 13 sym Name L JPattem settings C Mag CapBuf w Offset 58 sym 214 154 us Description K Burst Length Run In
289. e channel with the name PhaseNoise to PNO Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt Selects the application channel type for the current channel See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 276 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt VSA VSA R amp S FSWP K70 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 136 Digital Standards 11 4 Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements Manual configuration of digital standards is described in chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 132 SENSe DBEMod FAC Tory VALue 21 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 e ri tit tre rete ovk a Re eru ra recipes ape see 279 SENSe DDEMod PRESet S TANdard cette tette 279 ISENGe IDDEMod STANdard COMMent nere enne ener enne nnne nnns 280 SE E Meggie EE eenegen tone rao ra eae cet here pe REEL 280 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue
290. e diagram of the inphase component of the measure ment signal a Select the Meas amp Ref data source from the SmartGrid selection bar and drag it over window 1 i Close the SmartGrid mode by selecting the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar c Select the Window Config softkey d Select the result type Eye Diagram Real Ur 3 Close the dialog to take a look at your new display configuration mum PEINE T QNI RN UU US User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 238 Measurement Examples R amp S FSWP K70 el 9 2 4 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer Using the R amp S FSWP VSA application you can navigate through the capture buffer i e control which part of the capture buffer is currently analyzed Note In the Spec trum application this functionality is referred to as gating 1 In the measurement display take a closer look at window 3 magnitude of the cap ture buffer The green bar shows how far the current measurement has already proceeded i e how much of the signal has been evaluated C Mag CapBuf Stop 8000 sym Start 0 sym 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key Since the signal you are currently analyzing is continuous as opposed to contain ing bursts the entire capture buffer is analyzed and hence will be marked with the green bar The last evaluated result range i e the currently evaluated result range at the time the measurement stopped is highlighted in blue C Mag CapBuf
291. e eed eed 327 ISENS amp iDDEMad EQUAalize amp MODE 2 eessen a ged EENS 327 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet iioii eret eren annee sh ane ari REENEN 328 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE 328 SENS amp 1DDEMod EQUalizer S TT 5 roro ero iieri tr diete 328 SENSe IDDEMOG FS YNOUAU O EE 328 SENSeJgDDEMad ESYNcULBEVOGl pin a het eost eode See a pati re cn a ERR ee M EATE 328 SENSe DDEMGOGS FSYNe RESUIE iuo edu eet rea nete ceder ceto ted cani eun 329 SENSe DDEMod FSYNG MODE ence ett ttn tetti 329 I SENSe IDDEMOd NIDATa STATE aacra e dee Ron Romer Rs en See 329 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME center ttt ttt ttt tents 330 SENSe DBEMod NORMalize ADROOD inci cc 2 122 enne ei trito ate dean aaa Ec eme DR SEENEN 330 I SENSe IDDEMod NORMalize GE DESIE caen z eo ra tee pr ca ne hen cu inean Rot neat Ro Ren eR seas 330 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel cessisse nennen nennen enne 330 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERT OF 22 1 222a rtt EE entr ne Ed AER 330 ISENGe IDDEModNObRMalze OiMbalance enne enne nnne 331 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOPFfset noci ETE 331 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRE RIQF 2 221 5 etnia ca bo EAR dant eoe tere erede 331 SENSe DBEMod OPTimizatioh 2 2 2 erret euet tue SEENEN eee eee tee e eu hx ed eg 331 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh PATTern S YNG AUTO nitet ere eco narret ant uana 332 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STAT 2 2
292. e g for burst search The record length is defined in time S default or symbols SYM Note that the maximum record length depends on the sample rate for signal capture see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 308 For the default value 4 the maximum is 64000 symbols For larger sample rates the maximum record length in symbols can be calculated as Recordlengthyax 256000 points per symbol 11 5 4 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt RecordLength gt numeric value RST 2 083 ms Default unit s not symbols as in manual operation Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Capture Length Settings on page 160 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded UO pairs should be swapped I gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSWP can do the same to compensate for it Parameters lt State gt ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 161 TRACe lt n gt 1Q BWIDth This command queries the bandwidth in Hz of the resampling filter Usable UO Band width Usage Query only Ma
293. e http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Q Data File Format iq tar Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files UO parameter XML file e g xyz cm Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an ig tar file UO data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file UO preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open Joar xml file in web browser xslt A 7 1 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslIqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML sch
294. e length of the equalizer in symbols The longer the equalizer the more accurate the filter becomes and the more distortion can be compensated However this requires extended calculation time The shorter the filter length the less calculation time is required during the equalizer s tracking or averaging phase Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth on page 326 Reset Equalizer Equalizer Settings Deletes the data of the currently selected equalizer After deletion averaging and tracking starts anew This is useful in the rare case that calculation takes a wrong symbol decision into con sideration and distorts the signal such that the original signal can no longer be deter mined Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet on page 328 Store Load Current Equalizer Equalizer Settings Saves the current equalizer results to a file or loads a user defined equalizer The equalizer Mode must be set to USER in order to load a file Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE on page 328 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD on page 327 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization Access Overview Demodulation Demodulation Advanced You can influence the synchronization process and calculation of error values during demodulation R amp S FSWP K70 Configuration Then switch to the Demodulation Advanced tab A live preview of the constellat
295. e lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 356 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe lt LimitState gt This command switches the limit check for the selected result type and limit type on or off
296. e number of symbols that may differ from the burst length without influencing the burst detection A search tolerance of 5 for example with a minimum and maxi mum burst length of 100 will detect bursts that are 95 to 100 symbols long The mini mum and maximum burst length is defined in the Signal Structuresettings Note Due to the fact that the VSA does not have knowledge of the ramp length there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm Thus setting this parameter to O will result in a failed burst search for most signals Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt TOLerance on page 316 Min Gap Length Burst Configuration Represents the minimum distance in symbols between adjacent bursts The default value is 1 symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other However in case the capture buffer does not contain very close bursts it is recommended that you increase the value This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted signals Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst search It should not be used to explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement For example setting the minimum gap length to 100 symbols does not ensure that the burst search does not find bursts that have a very small gap Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt GLENgth MINimum on page 315
297. e trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs 11 5 5 Configuring VSA Parameters Source IMMediate Free Run EXT EXT2 Trigger signal from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT con nectors Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 163 See Free Run on page 163 See Ext Trigger 1 2 on page 163 See IF Power on page 164 See UO Power on page 164 Configuring Sweeps The sweep commands define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated Manual configuration of the sweeps is described in chapter 5 6 3 Sweep Settings on page 166 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURStCALOC eeeseeeee eene n nennen nna nans h isnt EEN 313 SENSe SWEep COUNIt VALue eese n nnne neret tt nh idana 314 SENSeTSWEep COBNEGCBIRRGDL uat u tessa adeo D ea Fer acne bts 314 SENSe
298. ecifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 7 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 451 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an UO sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed Q Data File Format iq tar Element NumberOfChan nels Description Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the UO data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 7 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 451 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar fi
299. ect results for all evaluated data it is recommended that you reduce the reference range to the length of the pattern Pattern Replace only A detected Demodulation t4 Coarse amp symbol sh pattern with Ref signal Ref signal sync e ym correct pattern generation c decisions symbols keep P 2 other symbols E Error X2 signal E3 Fine sync using 2 pattern Fine sync a pattern Meas signal nel Measurement signal symbols synced only 4 4 6 The Equalizer A possible source of high modulation errors of the DUT with PSK and QAM signals is a non flat frequency response or ripple in frequency response within the modulation bandwidth Overview of the Demodulation Process This could be caused by the DUT s Analog filter sections Digital filter sections if a shortened filter length is used Digital arithmetic sections if a shortened bit length is used Analyzer par Meas Demodulation 8 TX Analog E mM ue Filter Filter i Signal Error of Transfer Function Fig 4 47 General processing in the modulation and demodulation stages An equalizer filter with a reverse frequency response characteristic is able to compen sate less distorted frequency responses in order to improve the modulation analysis results see figure 4 48 Analyzer PUT mm Demodulation TX i Analog
300. ect the required folder from the file system 3 Press the Delete button 4 Confirm the message to avoid unintentionally deleting a standard The standard file is removed from the folder How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements To restore standard files 1 To restore the predefined standard files do one of the following e Inthe Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey The Manage VSA Standards file selection dialog box is displayed e Inthe Meas menu select the Restore Factory Settings softkey 2 Select Restore Standard Files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery are restored to the Standards folder 8 2 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements In addition to performing vector signal analysis strictly according to specific digital standards you can configure the analysis settings for customized tasks The general process for a typical VSA measurement is described here 1 Press the MODE key and select the VSA application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics If the input data is largely known in advance define files with the known data to compare the measured data to see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 223 This can improve demodulation significantly Note Make sure the input signal contains an
301. ed by the sample rate For the I Q data acquisition digital decimation filters are used internally in the R amp S FSWP The passband of these digital filters determines the maximum usable LC bandwidth In consequence signals within the usable UO bandwidth passband remain unchanged while signals outside the usable I Q bandwidth passband are suppressed Usually the suppressed signals are noise artifacts and the second IF side band If frequencies of interest to you are also suppressed you should try to increase the output sample rate since this increases the maximum usable UO band width As a rule the usable UO bandwidth is proportional to the output sample rate Yet when the UO bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter at very high output sample rates the curve breaks e Bandwidth Extension Options cce eee rne nee a xe Re b nere p cue again 69 e Relationship Between Sample Rate Record Length and Usable UO Bandwidth 69 e R amp S FSWP without additional bandwidth extension options 70 e R amp S FSWP with option B80 UO Bandwidth Extension 70 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 68 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth 4 2 1 1 Bandwidth Extension Options Max usable UO BW Required B option 80 MHz B80 4 2 1 2 Relationship Between Sample Rate Record Length and Usable I Q Bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the following rule applies Usable LO
302. ee TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 Real Imag UO Real and imaginary part of the measurement or reference signal in separate measure ment diagrams the x axis scaled in time units or symbols is identical for both dia grams Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector Capture buffer display Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Real Imag result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 mum EP EIN CC I aaa User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 47 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for UO input Real RealImag CaptureBuffer 4 Imag RealImag CaptureBuffer ei Clrw 8000 sym Fig 3 19 Result display Real Imag I Q Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM RIMag to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DAT
303. ee e eet 37 Frequency Response Group Delay Channel result type 0 0 ceeeeeeeceeeeseceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeae 23 Result type m Frequency shift keying FSK Symbol MAPPING ed 2 ont tenet rns 80 Frontend Config latiori EE 145 Configuration remote viirin 293 FSK Calculating errors nece teres 434 V elle le 434 Deviation error formula 2 ne tents 437 Error model 5 22 0 tre t tr EES 118 lu on e 120 Measurement deviation formula 437 Modulation type neri trece 138 Reference deviation sess 140 Signal model EE 117 FSK deviation error V elle Le 182 Rn ee 121 FSK reference deviation Formula EE 437 G Gain distortion He 2 HP 114 Gain imbalance RI ue TEE 112 Effect x4 112 Formula sisian 436 Preconditions for measurement 25 112 Gall EE 239 GSM Programming example intet rna 413 H Hardware settings Displayed aininn e a a 13 High pass filter REMO DR 294 ign jte a 146 Hysteresis Lower Auto level tt tret 192 We UG 165 Upper Auto level ntt ntes 192 l UO bandwidth Url 61 161 UO correlation threshold Pattern searcli rre eiiis 171 UO data Export file binary data description 451 Export file parameter description 448 Exporting 131 211 Exporting remote Exporting Importi
304. eese 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency ENABle esses 408 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency NTRansition sees 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency PTRansition esee 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency EVEN 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulationsmn CONDIEOr niue Loci citu e deste aa ttp page rete bdo env 407 STATus QUEStionable MODu lationisn5 ENABI6 2 retra xou rope van trece cut hind erect cg 408 SGTATusOUEG gonable MODulaton nz EVMCONDitton nennen 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVM ENABle esses 408 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVM NTRansition eesssssssssssseeeeeeeeenenee nennen 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVM PTRansition sess 409 STATueOUEGionable MODulstton cnz EVMIEVENUN AAA 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition SGTATusOUEG onable MODulaton cnzFGkKENAbDle nene ener enne STATus QUESti nable MOD lationsn gt FSK NTRansitiOM nennen STAT s QUEStionable MOD lati nsn gt FSK PTRANSIION srinata annaa N tnn SGTATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz FSRITEVENON nennen 407 STATusOUEGionable MODulatton nz JObRHo CONDiton nens 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo ENABle essesessssssesseeeee eene nennen nnnn entente STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo NTRansit
305. eet EES CAL Culatecnz MGbRAALINeIVAL ue 361 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDowsn2IVAL isch acci trarre ctr easel ar NEES or eee e RE uu 361 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe i CAL Culatesm gt S TATISHCS MOB Ev c CAL Culate lt n gt S l ATistics PRESOL riore nage i Evene etg cg nre ce a dd tgp exero b qut GAL GCulate n STATistics SCAEe AUTO ONGE ince eee en nece cemere E Year EE ecu teu EE 303 CALCulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlexvBCOunt einen entren en RNS iAd stent s rn nnne sena 304 CALGCulatesn STATistics SCALe Y e E 304 CAL CulatecnzGTATietce SCALES YUNI Toenni esor a aa aaraa aa E EEES ARNEE 304 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer 304 CALCulate lt sn gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALlGnment OFF Get A 322 CALOCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment DEF au 322 CALCulate n e R IERT TEE 323 CAL Culatesn gt TRAGeste E EE 344 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME CALCulate lt n gt Y UNIT TIME DISPISVEORMSE cise ccs can E E E DISPlayEWINDowsri T EM LBINE EMAlUe cra ut fitt rto oc Pe wines dete DISPlay WINDow lt sn gt PRATE AUTO cerneret tenerent irre nr trennen rr an ee EEN ER KE TT DISPlayEWINDowsri SIZE rr rtr tere tre t er ce tne etri eee tpa DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGCe SYMBDOI ttn ttr rr khi hector enr does DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe PDlVision essen
306. efine when a pattern is detected in the analyzed sig nal SENSe JDDEMod SGEARch PDATTem CONFioure AUTO 316 SENS amp TDDEMed SEARGIUS YNGQOAU T 5 ian ni rao ern ERR Fee ey AER Xr SEENEN 317 SENSeJdDDEMod SEARcGRh SYNC IQGC Ihreshold 2 1 iere tee 317 E lee e RE EE d Le MODE EE 317 SENSeJ DDEMOd SEARCh S YNG SELQGL arte inea aaa parer een EEE 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch S YNGISTAT6 crasse ted deed EENS Ra PERRO tee 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold to its default value Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Configuring VSA Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 171 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO lt AutoPattSearch gt This command links the pattern search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as patterned pattern search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoPattSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Enabling Pattern Searches on page 171 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold lt CorrelationLev gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold for pattern matching in percent A high level means stricter matching Setting parameters lt CorrelationLev gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 100 0 RST 90 0 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 171 SENSe DDEMod SEA
307. ema For your own implementation of the ig tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt g xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt Q Data File Format iq tar lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS IQ TAR File Format The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently
308. emos Cen nde utm bi M centu apio ease e rx me ues 17 Ern ot VECON M 17 Modulation EOS EE 17 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 15 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays Modulation ACCURACY 4 cin awe et m 18 xoig PEE 18 MIS OUT E P P M 18 Capture Buffer The captured UO data In capture buffer result diagrams the result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar 3 Mag CaptureBuffer ei Clr 8000 sym Fig 3 1 Result ranges for a burst signal Note You can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges using Select Result Rng function and analyze the individual result ranges in separate windows You can change the position of the result range quickly and easily by dragging the blue bar representing the result range to a different position in the capture buffer The default result type is Magnitude Absolute The following result types are available chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 chapter 3 2 22 Magnitude Overview Absolute on page 41 chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag I Q on page 47 chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 chapter 3 2 34 Vector UO on page 56 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL TCAP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 Measurement amp Reference Signal The measurement signal or the ideal reference signal or
309. ency EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current value 1 Error in mean value 2 Error in peak value 3 15 These bits are not used 11 11 7 STATus QUESTionable MODulation n IQRHO Register This register comprises information about limit violations in UO offset or RHO evalua tion It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RHO value 1 Error in mean RHO value 2 Error in peak RHO value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current UO offset value 6 Error in mean UO offset value Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 7 Error in peak UO offset value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 8 STATus QUESTionable MODulation n FSK Register This register comprises information about limit violations in FSK evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current Frequency Error RMS value 1 Error in mean Frequency Error RMS value 2 Error in peak Frequency Error RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current Frequency Error peak value 6 Error in mean Frequency Error peak value 7 Error in peak Frequency Error peak
310. ent Time Meastime Manual on page 192 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 338 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 192 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 338 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Examp
311. eq Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue on page 358 Freq Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 358 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 359 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 359 FSK Dev Err CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 358 Carr Freq Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 357 For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 230 Check Current Mean Peak Considers the defined limit value in the limit check if checking is activated For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 230 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe on page 357 Display and Window Configuration The captured UO data can be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement As opposed to the R amp S FSWP UO Analyzer application or other applications in VSA configuring the result display requires two steps 1 Display Configuration In the first step you select the data source for the evalua tion and the window placement in the SmartGrid The SmartGrid mode is activated automatically when you select the Display Con f
312. er ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 342 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 343 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 343 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSWP application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 343 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSWP User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in th
313. er will be used as measurement filter Note that this filter is not necessarily suitable for your specific signal The filter is optimized such that the intersymbol interference is low Hence you will probably be able to see a clear eye diagram and an Vector UO diagram with a recognizable constellation How ever a filter that has low intersymbol interference might lead to noise enhancement which is commonly undesirable for a measurement filter In order to avoid noise enhancement it is recommended that you a design your own measurement filter and upload it as a user filter e b select a suitable measurement filter from the list R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics Transferring filter files to the R amp S FSWP You can transfer the vaf filter files to the R amp S FSWP using a USB memory device 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth The Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings determines how many symbols are captured and demodulated during a certain measurement time However for each symbol more than one sample may be captured so that the sample rate may be higher than the symbol rate The Sample Rate parameter in the Data Acquisition settings defines the number of samples to capture per symbol not to be confused with the estimation points per symbol or display points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 127 The resulting sample rate depending on
314. eren nr nennen CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue esses eene rennen nennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan RESult CAlCulate nz LUlMrMACCuracvEVMPPpEakGTIATe rennen rennen nnne CAL Culate nz LUIMrMACCuracyEVMPPDESKVA ue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak RESUIIt eese 396 CALCulat sn gt iLIMiIttMACCuracy EVM RCURrent STAT e nennen nennen 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue eese nennen neret 358 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent RE Gu 396 CAL Culate nz LUIMrMACCuracyEVMRMtanGTATe nennen rennen nnne 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue esses nennt nene eene nnne 358 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan RESUIIt seen 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak STATe sess nee rene nnnnen 356 CAL Culate nz LUIMrCMACCuracyEVMRPDEaKVAL ue 358 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak RESult eese 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent STATe essen nennen 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue essent 358 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent RE Gu 396 CAL Culate nz LUlMrMACCuracvFDERrorMEAN GTATe nee eeenerenrennnnnnne CAlCulate nz LUlMrMACCuracv FDERrorMEAN VAL ue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN RESult CALOCulat
315. erenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 152 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces t is irrelevant Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Configuring VSA Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 152 SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates a measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current measurement This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSWP or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Usage Event INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 300 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSWP R amp S FSWP8 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSWP26 or higher 30 dB RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preampli
316. erview of the Demodulation Process Pattern Symbol Check The I Q Pattern Search stage can only detect whether the similarity between the UO pattern and the capture buffer exceeds a certain threshold and in this way find the most likely positions where a pattern can be found Within this stage the VSA application checks whether the pattern symbols bits really coincide with the symbol decisions at the pre detected position For example if one out of 20 symbols does not coincide the I Q Pattern Search stage might detect this I Q pattern but the Pattern Symbol Check stage will decline it Note that this stage is only active if the pattern search is switched on If individual symbols do not match the pattern these symbols are indicated by a red frame in the symbol table Reference Signal Generation The ideal reference signal is generated based on the detected symbols and the specifi cations of the signal model i e the modulation scheme and the transmit filter Tx filter Optionally a predefined known data sequence or pattern can be used to generate the reference signal see chapter 4 4 5 Synchronization and the Reference Signal on page 101 Measurement Filtering Both the measurement signal and the reference signal are filtered with the specified measurement filter Synchronization In this stage the measurement signal and the reference signal are correlated For PSK QAM and MSK modulated signals an estimation
317. es if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and yo
318. es the demodulation order for QPSK Setting parameters lt QPSKformat gt NORMal DIFFerential NPI4 DPI4 OFFSet N3PI4 NORMal Demodulation order QPSK is used DIFFerential Demodulation order DQPSK is used NPI4 Demodulation order mid QPSK is used DPI4 Demodulation order rr 4 DQPSK is used OFFSet Demodulation order OQPSK is used N3PI4 Demodulation order 377 4 QPSK is used RST NORMal Example DDEM FORM QPSK Switches QPSK demodulation on DDEM QPSK FORM DPI4 Switches 11 4 DQPSK demodulation order on Configuring VSA Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 139 SENSe DDEMod SRATe lt SymbolRate gt This command defines the symbol rate The minimum symbol rate is 25 Hz The maximum symbol rate depends on the defined Sample Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 Setting parameters lt SymbolRate gt numeric value Range 25 to 250e6 RST 3 84e6 Default unit Hz Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page
319. escribed in chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 159 SENS DDEMOJ Eege eg 308 ISENSe DDEMod REENgthAD TO iiec enr Ip rore epa aene ee tata ne tae ba peur Pez AER 308 ISENSeIDDEMod RLENGDIVALuel enne 308 FNAN dE Peg 309 TRSAGesmns cEBWIDIUM EE 309 SENSe DDEMod PRATe lt CaptOverSmplg gt Defines the number of samples that are captured per symbol i e the factor by which the symbol rate is multiplied to obtain the sample rate This parameter also affects the demodulation bandwidth and thus the usable UO bandwidth The sample rate depends on the defined Symbol Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 Setting parameters lt CaptOverSmplg gt 4 8 16 32 The factor by which the symbol rate is multiplied to obtain the sample rate e g 4 samples per symbol sample rate 4 symbol rate RST 4 Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 161 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO lt RecLengthAuto gt If enabled the capture length is automatically adapted as required according to the current result length burst and pattern search settings and network specific character istics e g burst and frame structures Setting parameters lt RecLengthAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Capture Length Settings on page 160 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue lt RecordLength gt This command defines the capture length for further processing
320. ese enne rennen nenne 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue eese nennen eene 358 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak RESult eese 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent STATe sese 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue esses nennen 359 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent RESult esses 396 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan RESult eese 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak STATe sss neret nnne 356 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue sess eene nrennnnnns 359 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak RESUult esee 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent STATe essent CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent RESult essen 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan STATe sss nennen 356 CAL Culate nzLUlMt MAC Curacv MERborbRME an VAl ue 359 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan RESUult esee 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak STATe
321. eseeeeeeneeeneeenee 436 437 Magnitude Overview Absolute IResulUbyDG uice tio tore ie P PNE aas 41 128 Magnitude Relative RRESUILTY D6 e E 43 Mapping see Symbol mapping Mapping wizard mapwiz Market to Ia icone ret tn oe ia in Seni C t Markers Absolute peak ninisi ett eine EB den er itx 201 Assigned e EE 199 Configuring S elle EE BIS Tel Te BEE 199 Delta markers 24 199 General settings remote 950 Minimutm 2 2 en c 201 Next minimum 201 Next peak 201 ul m 201 POSINONING Meere EUR 200 Querying position remote Retrieving values remote aa 978 Search settings 199 Settings remote 946 Slate essct 198 Dc 199 POT em Y 198 Matched KU E 62 Max Peak ie t nti eset HORIS aaa 201 Maximizing Windows remote ge dusane 365 Mean onim g 438 Meas amp Ref Data source Result types MEAS filter Meas only if burst was found g Measurement bandwidth esses Measurement channel Creating remote A 276 Deleting remote w Duplicating remote eee 276 Querying remote Renaming remote Sie Replacing remote eeeeeeeeeee 276 Measurement example Burst GSM EDGE Signals ssssse
322. esses nennen nennen rrr rete hh nennen 347 CAL e DIE EEN e EE 347 Ee DEL E EE 348 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzAOEE mrna annai nnua a nRa a iaia aa 348 CAL Culate nz DEIL TamarkercmztSTATel nennen nnn trennen 348 Analysis CALC ulatesn DEL Tamarkersin gt TRACE iusso tot na o aec trat ena 349 GALGulate n DELTarmarkeremb X 2 22 antec ER ione pe rao atia ava etae tel pe a oa RE SEENEN EN 349 GAL GulatesmDELETAmatkerem Y EEN 349 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK lt MarkerCoupling gt With this command markers between several screens can be coupled i e use the same x value All screens can be linked with the marker x value scaled in symbols or time except those showing the capture buffer If several capture buffer measurements are visible their markers are coupled too Setting parameters lt MarkerCoupling gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Couple Windows on page 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State
323. etected data a p M ignal S Measurement signa Fine sync bait synced To improve the symbol decisions in poor signals in particular when multiple detection errors occur the reference signal can be estimated from a smaller area that includes a known symbol sequence in the input signal In this case the results for the limited ref erence area are more precise at the cost of less accurate results outside this area The reference area can be defined either using a pattern or using a known data sequence from a Known Data file If no predefined data sequences are available for the signal the detected data is used by default Fine synchronization using known data If the data sequences to be expected in the signal are known in advance they can be loaded to the R amp S FSWP VSA application and used for comparison with the measured signal The reference signal is then defined as the data sequence from the file that most closely matches the measured data Additionally you can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known sequence in reference to the measured data If the SER of the known sequence exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Thus assuming a perfect match exists in the known data which is just as long as the reference range this sequence is the ideal reference signal with no detection errors The EVM is calculated correctly and fine synchronization is very prec
324. etting parameters lt FineSyncAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 186 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel lt SERLevel gt This command sets the Fine Sync Level if fine sync works on Known Data Configuring VSA Setting parameters SERLevel numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 0 RST 10 0 Default unit PCT Manual operation See If SER lt on page 187 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult The result of this query is O if the fine sync with known data failed otherwise 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 186 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE lt FineSync gt This command defines the fine synchronization mode used to calculate results e g the bit error rate Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in refer ence to the analyzed data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed See SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 328 Setting parameters lt FineSync gt KDATa PATTern DDATa KDATa The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data PATTern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern This setting requires an activated pattern search see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 318 DDATa Default The reference signal is estimated from
325. evaluate signals from different input sources The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup Tute Sea needa aden E ee erbe E dne hn db nd toes eio c ete 145 Output SENGS unu er rede eb aie henna 147 e Preg sncy Seuls eoe eta ANNA edens retra de dnnE 150 e Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration sse 151 Input Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box e Radio Frequency Input cire tee ee eed 145 Radio Frequency Input Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input gt Radio Frequency The default input source for the R amp S FSWP is the radio frequency If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source R amp S FSWP K70 Configuration Input Frontend Radio NM off Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Preamplifier Preview Spec RealImag CaptureBuffer Radio Frequency State cicer eio Hore Dd ea dd 146 aput eege Te BEE 146 High Pass Filter E ET 146 dE EE 147 Seel E 147 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 294 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSWP can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage fro
326. evel Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSWP Getting Started man ual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT OUTPUT connector front panel Signal Capture External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector rear panel Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 312 IF Power Trigger Source The R amp S FSWP starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 312 UO Power Trigger Source Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold The t
327. ey can be set in the VSA application using Meas filter AUTO see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 188 Table 1 4 Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters Transmit filter Measurement filter Remarks analyzer RC raised cosine filter combination without intersymbol interfer ence ISI RRC root raised cosine RRC filter combination without ISI GMSK filter combination with low ISI Linearized GMSK EDGE NSR standard specific filter filter combination with ISI Gauss filter combination with low ISI Rectangular filter combination without ISI Half Sine filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X FORWARD Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X REVERSE Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 C4FM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H CPM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H DQPSK Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Narrow standard specific filter filter combination with Pulse ISI EDGE Wide Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Wide Pulse standard specific filter filter combination with ISI User Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination with low ISI AA ASCII File Export Format f
328. f a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 408 R amp S FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt NTRansition BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo
329. fic result summary table can be related to the dis tortion model parameters as follows Table 1 7 Evaluation of results in the PSK QAM and MSK result summary EVM RMS y Xen Tp Peak max EVM n T Modulation RMS error lyv T y 20 log K DIRER TY Peak min MER n T l DEV y with MER n T 20 1og x Einer ry Magnitude RMS 1 2 error FOX Peak max MAG ERR n Tp Phase error RMS 1 X PHASE _ ERR n T5 Peak max PHASE ERR n T RHO correla tion coeffi cient 3 REF n mease E KKF MEAS REF Y REF n V wEAsQ AKF REF AKF MEAS A 6 2 2 Formulae IQ Offset C 2 2 H E H Si So i71 REF k TY ES Renter C 10 log Cin faB IQ Imbalance j 8 gi 8o e B in l el lg 1 8g B 20 logig Brin faB Gain Imbal g ance G Gin eg Si G 20 10810 Gin dB Quadrature Error Min ve 180 0 On deg Amplitud Droop A K A 20 logio Ay JdB Sym FSK Modulation For FSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in section chap ter 4 5 2 FSK Modulation on page 117 The parameters of the FSK specific result summary table can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows Table 1 8 Evaluation of results in the FSK result summary Frequency Error RMS i J FREQ Eug
330. fier on page 147 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifiier hardware Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 147 Configuring VSA 11 5 2 6 Attenuation INGA WR re EE 301 INPutATTenaalon AU TO tesselen ee deus Enna atn Ee Naa 301 idu EMISIT 301 INPUEA RTA o EE 302 INPUT EAT TES TANT over teneor B ple dee te docs adlata dva a due eeu desse e qe e reel 302 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 154 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSWP determines the s
331. filtered using the following functions Prefix Displaying available patterns Shows only patterns that contain the specified prefix Show Compatible Show All Displaying available patterns Shows only patterns that are compatible to the selected modulation mode or all pat terns regardless of the selected standard Edit Opens the Edit Pattern dialog box to edit the pattern definition See chapter 5 7 4 Pattern Definition on page 175 For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 221 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 320 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 319 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 321 Save As Saves a copy of an existing pattern under a new name Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY on page 319 New Opens the Pattern dialog box to create a new pattern definition See chapter 5 7 4 Pattern Definition on page 175 Burst and Pattern Configuration For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 221 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 320 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 319 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 321 Delete Deletes the selected patterns Any existing assignments to other standards are removed Remote command
332. fter the measurement fil ter and synchronization e The Constellation UO diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a rr 4 DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interference has been removed In case the measurement filter does not remove the inter symbol interference the win dows show measurements that are significantly different Problem The Constellation UO measurement result display has a different num ber of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSWP K70 Reason In the FSQ K70 the Constellation UO measurement displays the symbol instants of the Vector UO measurement Hence this is a rotated constellation e g for a 1 4 DQPSK 8 points are displayed In the R amp S FSWP K70 the Constellation UO diagram shows the de rotated constella tion i e for a 17 4 DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol inter ference has been removed Note The result display I Q Constellation Rotated displays the rotated constella tion as the FSQ K70 does User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 264 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement IEN For details on the Constellation UO diagram in the R amp S FSWP K70 see chapter 3 2 5 Constellation HUOT on page 25 Table 10 1 Constellation UO and Vector I Q for pi 4 DQPSK modulation X SR 18 0 kHz 5 C Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref Start 5 13 D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref R amp
333. g at the second symbol which has the symbol number 1 the capture buffer starts at symbol number 1 the first symbol to be displayed is the second symbol due to the offset 141 2 Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Result Range Length Result Length 26 042 us Result Range Alignment Reference Alignment Capture C Burst Pattern Waveform e Left C center C Right Offset sym Symbol Number at Capture Start sym Visualization Fig 8 2 Example Defining the Result Range The result range is indicated by a green bar along the time axis in capture buffer result displays see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 122 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data Once the data has been stored in the capture buffer the results can be analyzed in numerous ways The following tasks are meant to make you familiar with the most How to Analyze the Measured Data common VSA application features For a description of all analysis functions and set tings see chapter 6 Analysis on page 193 1 Press the MEAS CONFIG key to display the VSA menu 2 Select the Display Config button in the Overview or the Display Config softkey and select the data sources for evaluation that are of interest to you see chap ter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 204 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences For each data source a window with the default resu
334. g the DISP WIND TRAC Y MODE command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 377 Setting parameters Format Example Manual operation Configuring the Result Display MAGNitude PHASe UPHase RIMag FREQuency COMP CONS IEYE QEYE FEYE CONF COVF RCONStellation RSUMmary BERate GDELay MOVerview NONE MAGNitude Magnitude Absolute MOVerview Magnitude Overview Absolute entire capture buffer PHASe Phase Wrap UPHase Phase Unwrap RIMag Real Imag I Q FREQuency Frequency Absolute COMP Vector UO CONS Constellation UO IEYE Eye Diagram Real I QEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q FEYE Eye Diagram Frequency CONF Constellation Frequency COVF Vector Frequency RCONstellation Constellation UO Rotated RSUMmary Result summary BERate Bit error rate GDELay Frequency Response Group Delay See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 412 See Signal Source on page 206 See Result Type on page 206 Configuring the Result Display CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the measurement of the statistical distribution of magnitude phase or frequency values on or off Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 206 CALCulate lt n
335. g transmission disturbances in the transmission channel may cause distortions in the input signal at the R amp S FSWP Such influences are included in the EVM calcula tion However if the ideal reference signal can be estimated with sufficent accuracy by the R amp S FSWP e g using the equalizer the channel distortions can be compen sated for and deducted from the EVM 4 5 2 FSK Modulation Signal Model Frequency shift keying FSK involves the encoding of information in the frequency of a transmitted signal As opposed to other modulation formats such as PSK and QAM the FSK process is a non linear transformation of the transmitted data into the trans mitted waveform A sequence of symbols sj are modulated using a frequency pulse g t to form the instantaneous frequency of the transmitted complex baseband waveform denoted by fage t and defined as face 7 h Yos iT where fsymp 1 T is the symbol rate and h is a scaling factor termed the modulation index The transmitted or reference FSK signal is formed by frequency modulation of the instantaneous frequency pee REF t e E ef vir t where pe t denotes the phase of the transmitted waveform In the VSA application a continuous phase FSK signal is assumed which is ensured by the integral in the expression for REF t A graphical depiction of the reference waveform generation is shown below in figure 4 59 Frequency Modulator Fig 4 59 Reference complex ba
336. ge and repeat section retrieving results for range specific results Programming Examples 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check In this example a user defined pattern is used to detect bursts and the calculated mea surement results are checked against defined limits The configuration settings are stored as a user defined standard RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM VSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named VSA EE Creating a pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME EDGE TSC CUST Create new pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC NST 4 DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00030001000000000003000200020001000300010001 DDEM SEAR SYNC COMM Customized pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC TEXT Special edge normal Burst DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME EDGE TSC CUST Store customized pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC PATT ADD EDGE TSC CUST Add new pattern to current standard Configuring the expected input signal DDEM FORM QPSK Set the modulation type DDEM QPSK FORM NORM Set the modulation order DDEM MAPP CAT Query the available symbol mappings for QPSK modulation DDEM MAPP WCDMA Set the symbol mapping to WCDMA DDEM SRAT 1 MHz Set the symbol rate DEM SIGN BURS Define input signal as burst signal DEM SIGN PATT ON DEM SEAR SYNC
337. ge in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 306 X Axis Scaling For statistics a histogram is displayed For these diagrams the x axis can be config ured as well Adjust Settings X Axis Scaling Adjusts the x axis scaling to the occurring statistical values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 303 Default Settings X Axis Scaling Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values for the current measurement window Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 303 Quantize X Axis Scaling Defines the number of bars to be displayed in the graph i e the granularity of classifi cations Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt on page 304 X Axis Reference Value X Axis Scaling Defines a reference value on the x axis in the current unit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue on page 306 5 5 4 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings X Axis Reference Position X Axis Scaling Defines the position of the X Axis Reference Value on the x axis The position is defined as a percentage value where 0 refers to the beginning left side 100 96 refers to the end right side of the diagram The x axis is adapted so that the reference value is
338. gnored One possible sequence of symbols that can be demodulated from the input signal Up to 6000 different sequences i e lt Data gt elements can be defined in total lt RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA_FILE gt as specified File End the exact number also depends on available memory space Sample xml file for known data lt RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE Version 01 00 gt Comment Standard EDGE 8PSK Base 16 lt ModulationOrder gt 8 lt ResultLength gt 148 lt Data gt 777 511 727 242 206 Data Data Data 7 Data 77 770 173 705 631 011 177 177 171 117 777 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 1 337 bh 3 770 17 177 17 527 04 241 26 727 242 206 705 631 011 171 117 777 104 004 106 773 1 337 VS On 1 W H 7 511 727 242 206 770 173 705 631 011 177 177 171 117 777 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 1 331 777 511 727 242 206 770 173 705 631 011 177 177 171 117 7T77 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 1 331 777 511 727 242 206 lt Comment gt lt Base gt lt ModulationOrder gt lt ResultLength gt 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 177 717 717 111 615 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 lt Data gt 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 177 717 717 111 615 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 7 Data 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 177 717 717 111 615 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 77 Data 341 366 632 073 60
339. gt FEED on page 372 CALC FORM MAGN to define the magnitude result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 384 uH CF C I RN UU User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 38 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 19 3 2 20 Impulse Response Phase The Impulse Response Phase shows the phase of the equalizer coefficients in the time domain 1 ImpRespPhas Equalizer Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 CALC FORM UPH to define the phase result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 384 Impulse Response Real Imag The Real Imag diagram of the impulse response is a stem diagram It displays the filter characteristics in the time domain for both the and the Q branches individually Using this information the equalizer is uniquely characterized and can be recreated by other applications murum PEINE C RNC NN UU User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 39
340. gt STATistics MODE lt StatisticMode gt This command defines whether only the symbol points or all points are considered for the statistical calculations Setting parameters lt StatisticMode gt SONLy INFinite SONLy Symbol points only are used INFinite All points are used RST SONLy Manual operation See Oversampling on page 207 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue lt SingleValue gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue lt SingleValue gt This commands switches between the whole Result Summary and the diagram show ing only a single value e g the EVM RMS value as a bargraph The same parameters are available as those for which modulation accuracy limits can be defined see Limit Value on page 203 Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt SingleValue gt ALL EVMR EVMP PERM PEP MERM MEP CFER RHO IQOF FERM FEP FDER ALL Complete Result Summary EVMR RMS EVM EVMP Peak EVM PERM RMS Phase error PEP Peak phase error MERM RMS Magnitude error MEP Peak magnitude error CFER Carrier frequency error RHO RHO IQOF UO offset FERM RMS frequency error FEP Peak frequency error FDER FSK deviation error RST ALL Manual operation See Result Summary Individual Results on page 51 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO lt DisplayPPSMode gt Defines the number of display points that are displayed per symbol automatically i e according to SENSe DDEM
341. gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 360 RST 3 5 RMS 1 5 Default unit deg CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean Rho limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1 0 RST 0 999 mean 0 9995 Default unit NONE Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the VSA application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 3 Signal Capture on page 307 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands Useful commands related to MSRA mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 341 INITiate n SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 341 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MS
342. h non Multistandard mode 167 Refresh MSRXA only eiecit sectetuer LIE ERE a De ERR EAD EHE REL RERO R 167 iuc fee 167 Select Result E DEE 168 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSWP User Manual Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 340 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of evaluations set in Statistics Count The mea surement stops after the defined number of evaluations has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the
343. he carrier phase offset C the timing offset n t a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power 4 5 1 2 Estimation The VSA application includes two synchronization stages The first stage has already been described in the context of the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions block see chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 97 The second stage is realized within the Synchronization block Here the measure ment signal is matched to the reference signal by minimizing the mean square of the error vector magnitude This is done by selecting the optimum parameter vector f arg nin gt MEAS REF 3 Tow d The minimization takes place at the sample instants specified by the Estimation Points Sym parameter i e t n Tr with Tg the sampling period used for estimation Subsequently the measurement signal is corrected with the determined parameter vector Note that with a subset of the parameters you can enable or disable correction see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation on page 179 Estimation ranges The estimation ranges are determined internally according to the signal description Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors e For continuous signals the estimation range corresponds to the entire result range since it can then be assumed that the signal consists of valid modulated symbols at all time instants For bursted signals the estimation range corresponds to the o
344. his information is provided for reference only Note In diagrams in the frequency domain Spectrum transformation see Result Type Transformation on page 206 the usable UO bandwidth is indicated by vertical blue lines Remote command TRACe n IQ BWIDth on page 309 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSWP can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 309 5 6 2 Trigger Settings Access Overview gt Signal Capture gt Trigger The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement R amp S FSWP K70 Configuration E trigger a Level Offset Slope Falling Holdoff Time Preview Mag CaptureBuffer Hysteresis Drop Out Time a REM U R JPe KENN CR GNE EN RS 8000 sym Trigger output is described in chapter 5 5 2 1 General Output Configuration on page 148 For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSWP User Manual uum EP EIN CC RN ae a User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 162 Signal Capture MSRA operating mode o In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal Thu
345. hted by a blue frame mum PE HN CPC RNC a aa User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 54 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays Example 4Symbols Hexadecimal FP I em CUN NET ee METRE RESTI Ome HRS eet pense NETS NIC D 208 NA 774o 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 Mie yi NJ 1 1 it GJ e IN Je 1G NJ NJ f GJ GJ QIRIIOIOIO IPO hic QN IC ODO Ic ie RO IC 2 J IO M JIN IN N e e t C HOH HOH rie yi GU IC eil OIN N N em O MI O O W W w M N I fje w GJ GJ w GJ C GJ iC mde NJ lc hole Fig 3 22 Result display for Symbols in hexadecimal mode If a pattern search is active a found pattern is indicated by a green background in the symbol table If during demodulation individual symbols do not match the pattern after all these symbols are indicated by a red frame 4 Symbols Hexadecimal 1 apn a ee ee ee ey Ww 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8D Ta 100 110 120 130 140 Pattern Not Found i O e O O es a as H O X O Bo HAN H O m Lu Led Li O Lo O 2 5352 m O j O Qo DO o dl O SO m ll et O H e B e B eo Sy S e S S 3 Bi Glen O O O O Oje e e O O O HP P m Im m Wm OG rm m m I JH 010 O C O O m le Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL XTIM DDEM SYMB to define the required source type
346. i zes pattern and burst detection and the calculation of the ideal reference signal Manual configuration of the signal description is described in chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 137 LAN uou Me 281 Signal TEE 290 11 5 1 1 Modulation The modulation settings vary depending on the selected modulation type in particular FSK modulation provides some additional settings Configuring VSA CAL Culate nzF kDEViaton REterence RE ative rener rrtrtrererererereesese 282 CAL Culate nzF kDEViaton REFerencelVAl ue 282 SENSe DDEMGG APSKINS Mates EENS carne appen iaaa Rye ca er E pense oce munus 283 SENSE IDDEMOTASK NS Eae iint oce rtt rina niece tet ex Dd dad 283 SENSe IDDEMeodFIETertALBPFla sedis ioi rione ged eiut aa Dec erp a pe rcs A cy ev PsR DR Pe dE 283 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe eccentric 283 SENSE DDEMO Q FORMAE inasnan edged outre DEED EEN AEN EE 283 SENSe DBEMod FSK NSTale 2 121 REL remake Ec SE siesta vaa eo resa veu euet La ERNST 284 SENSeTDDEMOd MAPPing CATalag cct Eoo tnr Enni e XR E RR Re x ERE ERR SNE 285 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue eene h nnne 285 I SENSe JDDEModIMSN FOTRIMal 2 2 tectae cette cp EAR 285 SENS6 le Te Re EE 286 SENSE DDEMO PSK NS Tale eaten ria e exe exert prep aiden 286 SENSe IDDEMod CAMEFOEBMl TE 286 SENSe IDBEMGOQGORAME NS Fate ie enr coe geed ege
347. iayed ysung Joy ayes Bug dem s Id3S uonenjeag yu wu iy ynsey ulayed 10 youeag J0j yoseas 1g eudiv juusueJ joquiAg uonejnpow pyepuejs Jopjo4 Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters A 3 Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters A 3 1 The most frequently required measurement and TX filters required for vector signal analysis according to digital standards are provided by the R amp S FSWP VSA applica tion For general information on the use of these filters see chapter 4 1 Filters and Band widths During Signal Processing on page 60 Transmit Filters The transmit filters required for common standards are predefined in the VSA applica tion Table 1 2 Overview of predefined Transmit filters RC Raised cosine RRC Root raised cosine Gauss Gauss filter GMSK Gauss filter convolved with a rectangular filter typically used for MSK Linearized GMSK Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE 3GPP TS 45 004 normal symbol rate EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate EDGE Wide Pulse Shape Half Sine Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate Half Sine filter APCO25 C4FM Filter for the APCO25 C4FM standard APCO25 H CPM Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H DQPSK Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2
348. ic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 336 Adjusting Settings Automatically Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 336 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 336 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 337 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically
349. ig softkey from the main VSA menu or the Display Config button in the Over Display and Window Configuration view Note however that this button is only displayed in the general Overview not for window specific configuration Specifics for must be disabled The default evaluation for the selected data source is displayed in the window Up to 16 result displays can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The VSA evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSWP Getting Started manual Result Window Configuration In a second step you can select a different eval uation method result type for the window based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Result Window Configuration Access Overview Display Config For each result window you can select a different evaluation method result type based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Further window set tings are available for some result types Some settings are only displayed after you select the More button in the dialog box To hide these settings select the Less button Signal Source Result Type Result Type Transformation on EVM om Normal L Real Imag 1 Q Spectrum Vector I Q L Statistics Display Settings Highlight Symbols mm Display Points Sym Auto el IEN 206 Re
350. igger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSWP User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSWP Trigger input parameters are available in the Trig ger dialog box Output The R amp S FSWP sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 296 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 295 Output Type Trigger 1 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSWP triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSWP is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe on page 296 Level Output Type Trigger 1 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 296 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 1 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPu
351. ignal distortions in both the magni tude and phase frequency are present as well as additive noise The measured signal model is expressed as Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors MEAS t Apysr t eich n t with n t is a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power Apisr t is the distorted magnitude model and g ST is the distorted phase model The magnitude model is given by Anerbk Ee with K is a constant scaling factor which can be interpreted as the system gain and a is the amplitude droop in Nepers per second The phase model is given by Ppisr t B Qpept t C t V D m with B is a scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error C is a carrier frequency offset in radians per second D is a frequency drift in radians per second per second Tis a timing offset in seconds and is a phase offset in radians For the above phase model an equivalent frequency distortion model may be expressed as fois B fage t 0 fo fat with B is the scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error fo C 2 77 is a carrier frequency offset in Hz fo D 2 T7 is a frequency drift in Hz per second and Tis the timing offset in seconds The measured signal model in terms of the instantaneous frequency and all distortion parameters is given by janja J Free et dur fyt ft S LA MEAS t K e e n t Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 4 5 2
352. ignal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 154 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 302 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Configuring VSA This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 154 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 154 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic at
353. ignals from different input sources The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup Manual configuration of the input and frontend is described in chapter 5 5 Input Out put and Frontend Settings on page 145 RF Dpi Ec NEEAeNSdEERS 293 E O Ec e A E E N E T A 295 e Configuring the Trigger OUfpUt uui sire pire re eene ret eene 295 e e e 297 e Amplitude Seltings ui ee teceze sepa citant ttn e e REX ANEREN Tee READ 299 E ce eterne endete ncn nas utc deat aee a n RD ERR 301 Sealg and Ulis niter rera Get HERE Ger ee PER ERE AT CERE Guo 302 RF Input INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESBIL 5 2 22 11 oio r ome dicere repe c e va Eo E HE i 293 lisse sibi eee EM 293 INPutFIETer HPASSESTATe ritiene ettet hat ioa e nne napa conpuerecesdeanavest shee 294 INPut FIb rer VIGES TAT GD EE 294 leie E 294 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSWP User Manual The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input
354. indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the standards files is C R_S Instr user vsa Standards Note Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSWP User Manual New Folder Digital Standards Creates a new folder in the file system in which you can save the settings file File Name Digital Standards Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit lines 005 For details on the file name and location see the Data Management topic in the R amp S FSWP User Manual Note Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode
355. ines how many symbols are captured during each measure ment Enable the Auto option to define the capture length automatically according to the burst and pattern length settings and the statistics count Thus a minimal capture length is used which improves performance If the capture length is not defined automatically enter the number of symbols or sec onds to be captured and select the used unit The defined number is converted to the alternative unit seconds symbols for reference Up to 64000 symbols can be captured and processed during each measurement Remote command SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO on page 308 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue on page 308 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 160 Signal Capture Sample Rate Defines the number of samples to capture per symbol The sample rate in MHz is indi cated for reference This parameter affects the demodulation bandwidth and thus the usable UO bandwidth The maximum sample rate depends on the defined Symbol Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 For details on selecting the suitable sample rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Sym bol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 308 Usable UO Bandwidth Shows the usable UO bandwidth which depends on the selected sample rate For details see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and UO Bandwidth on page 67 T
356. ines the position of the marker on the x axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 349 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 348 6 3 2 Markers Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 347 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 348 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marke
357. ing differs to an PSK QAM MSK modulated signal The estimation model does not minimize the EVM but the error of the instantaneous frequency see chapter 4 5 2 1 Error Model on page 118 There fore the measurement value that corresponds to the EVM value for FSK is the the Fre quency Error Absolute Relative Source Type Modulation Error Result Type Fre quency Error Absolute Relative 11 d 11 1 Introduction Remote Commands for VSA The following commands are required to perform measurements in VSA in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSWP has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S FSWP User Manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSWP User Manual In particular this includes Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers The following tasks specific to VSA are described here al luere mE 270 Como rt 275 e Activating Vector Signal Anahysis A 275 e Digital Starideelb uou dai ed ttd cin treten co addu b eodd raft 279 Configuiiing E 281 Performing a Measuremenl e rte Re
358. ings To load an existing Known Data file 1 In the Overview select Signal Description 2 Switch to the Known Data tab 3 Activate the usage of a Known Data file by enabling the Known Data option This enables the Load Data File function 4 Select the Load Data File button A file selection dialog box is displayed 5 Select the xml file which contains the possible data sequences of the input signal The file must comply with the syntax described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 431 The header information of the xml file is displayed in the dialog box Once a Known Data file has been loaded the Bit Error Rate result display becomes available If the Fine Synchronization setting in the Demodulation dialog box is set to Auto mode the known data is also used for synchronization Otherwise it can be selected manually Defining a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in ref erence to the analyzed data avoids using a falsely selected or unsuitable file for synchronization see also If SER lt on page 187 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 8 2 3 2 How to Create Known Data Files You must create the Known Data files yourself according to the possible data sequen ces of the input signal Use any xml editing tool you like following the rules described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 431 Before loading the file to the VSA application make
359. iolations that may occur after demodulation in any of the VSA windows It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition on page 407 and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt on page 407 The status of the STATus QUESTionable MODulation register is indicated in bit 7 of the STATus QUESTionable register It can be queried using the STATus QUESTionable EVENt command Bit No Meaning 0 Error in EVM evaluation 1 Error in Phase Error evaluation 2 Error in Magnitude Error evaluation 3 Error in Carrier Frequency evaluation 4 Error in UO offset or RHO evaluation 5 Error in FSK evaluation 6 15 These bits are not used 11 11 3 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register This register comprises information about limit violations in EVM evaluation It can be queried with commands Status Reporting System STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 4 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Register This register comprises information about limit violat
360. ion Range Configuration on page 189 GALCulate n EkINsstartstops STATe oriretur eie eon HER RR ERR Ein 334 CALOCulate n ELIN startstop VALue esses nnne renis 335 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe Auto This command restricts the evaluation range The evaluation range is considered for the following display types eye diagrams constellation diagrams modulation accuracy e statistic displays spectrum displays 11 5 11 Configuring VSA Suffix lt startstop gt 1 2 irrelevant Setting parameters lt Auto gt ON OFF 1 0 ON The evaluation range extends from the start value defined by CALC ELIN1 VAL to the stop value defined by CALC ELIN2 VAL see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 335 OFF The complete result area is evaluated RST OFF Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Evaluating the Entire Result Range on page 190 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue lt LeftDisp gt Defines the start and stop values for the evaluation range see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN startstop STATe on page 334 Suffix lt startstop gt 1 2 1 start value 2 stop value Setting parameters lt LeftDisp gt numeric value Range 0 to 1000000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example
361. ion STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo PTRansition STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz IORHOol EVEN 407 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n MAGNitude CONDiiion esses 407 SGTATusOUEG tonable MODulation nz MAChNtude ENADie 408 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe NTRansition STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe PTRansition sse SGTATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz DHAGeTEVENU tenen 407 STATus QUEStionable MODu lationn5 P TRANSOM Airiness iriaren te teer ennt AAEE 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVENIt eese nennen 407 STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDIOLE 2er tert trt teer epe dated 407 STATus QUEStIonable POWer ENABIS roseis rre epe verte con aene cas cad rte e ICI Haie qe E Ea eaa STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition sui STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansitlOn icio eoe tnter rne ttr rente hehe re riae STATus QUEStionable POWaer EVENt J iretur error ge gere eiie vibra e kr n Exe arse 408 STATUus QUEStionable S deiere TA E KE 407 STAT s QUEStionable S de TEE 408 STATus QUEStionable de CHE 409 STATus QUEStionable S YNG P TRatrisilloh oar retener rant en nte re re ed 410 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt SV Slem PRESeECHANKel FEXE CULE i erneuern anana nEn ERE EE O ENATOR S GR el dE e Le RTE RE 309 RAG eT a ueteres eremum sts acces cu ei MIS IEEE D D ee cee sae emcee eee TRIGger
362. ion with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Advanced Normalize EVM to Mean Ref Power Optimization Minimize RMS Error Estimation Points Sym Auto Coarse Synchronization Fine Synchronization Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref Normalize EVM INN reiecit ertt el tne eher tte hore LIRE fee EE 184 CO PUI ZA OM M 185 Estimation e EE 185 Coarse Sye MONZA O E 186 Re Oe TEE 186 ey ERS as E 187 Offset EVM RET 187 Normalize EVM to Normalizes the EVM to the specified power value This setting is not available for MSK or FSK modulation Max Ref Power Maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Ref Power mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Constellation Power Mean expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants e Max Constellation Power mum PE HN CPC RI RN UU US User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 184 Demodulation Settings The maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE on page 324 Optimization Determines the method used to calculate the result parameters The required method depends on the used standard and is set according to the selected standard by default Minimize RMS Optim
363. ions in Phase Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 5 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Carrier Frequency evalua tion It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQu
364. is shifted by 30 towards the left Manual operation See X Axis Reference Position on page 158 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue lt RVal gt This command defines the reference value for the x axis for statistical result displays For all other result displays this command is only available as a query Setting parameters lt RVal gt numeric value Reference value for the x axis Manual operation See X Axis Reference Value on page 157 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Range per Division on page 157 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant The R amp S FSWP
365. ise QD If the known data sequence is shorter than the reference range it is recommended that you reduce the reference range to the length of the data sequence Otherwise the EVM and synchronization results outside the known data sequence are less accurate Overview of the Demodulation Process Known data Replace Demodulation i Coarse Ch detected Ref signal da Sync gt po sym symbols with generation Ref signal gt gcisions known data S E z 3 P us Error Fine sync using co signal E3 known data 9 M signal S Measurement signal Fine sync coos synced Fine synchronization using a pattern In some cases the data sequence to be expected in the entire result range is not known in advance however a specific symbol pattern that will always occur is know In this case the reference signal can be estimated from the defined pattern where available while all data outside the pattern is estimated using the detected symbols Detection errors within the pattern are corrected The EVM is calculated using the com plete reference range it is correct only within the pattern Fine synchronization on the other hand is performed only within the pattern range which is usually much shorter than the result range The fewer the symbols on which synchronization is based the less accurate it becomes To obtain corr
366. it aetas 338 NY E MEC 344 e Configuring the Result Display ctt certet td ete tette 364 e Retrievinig Res liS onerosi cette nk ne nea RR SER REA Ra R SEEK Sen 377 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 397 e Status Reporting SyS see cene teret cet etti ent ed eed dtd 399 e Commands for Compatibility ciere teet cirea 410 Frogramiming Examples putt tree A E EE RE ER RR RR 411 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Introduction If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the
367. its The following commands are required to define limits for specific results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulat
368. izes calculation such that the RMS of the error vector is mini Error mal Minimize Optimizes calculation such that EVM is minimal EVM Remote command SENSe DDEMod OPTimization on page 331 Estimation Points Sym During synchronization the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal and various signal parameters are calculated You can define how many sample points are used for this calculation at each symbol For more information on estimation points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 127 You can set the estimation points manually or let the VSA application decide how many estimation points to use If automatic mode is enabled the VSA application uses the following settings depend ing on the modulation type Modulation Est Points PSK QAM 1 Offset QPSK 2 not shaped offset QPSK FSK MSK Capture Oversampling For manual mode the following settings are available 1 the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account 2 two points per symbol instant are used required for Offset QPSK Capture Oversampling the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture set tings is used see Sample Rate on page 161 i e all sample time instants are weighted equally Remote command SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on page 325 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue on page 326 Demodulation Settings
369. ker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt This command queries the first value of the x axis in the specified window in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note using the CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet com mand the burst is shifted in the diagram the x axis thus no longer begins on the left at 0 symbols but at a selectable value Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STOP This command queries the last value of the x axis in the specified window in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note If the burst is shifted using the CALC TRAC ALIG commands the x axis no lon ger begins at 0 symbols on the left but at a user defined value Example CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the burst as the reference for the screen display CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG CENT Position the burst at the center of the screen DISP TRAC X STOP Queries the stop value of the x axis Usage Query only Retrieving Results FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt
370. l Decisions Result Range IO Meas Result Range Pattern Start as Detected by the IQ Pattern Search IQ Meas Symbol Decisions 2T3T0T0T1T312 Passed on to 31112 12 0 113 Reference Signal Generation Fig 4 46 Pattern Symbol Check algorithm 4 4 5 Synchronization and the Reference Signal The ideal reference signal is generated based on the detected symbols and the specifi cations of the signal model i e the modulation scheme known data if available and the transmit filter Tx filter In the fine synchronization stage the measurement signal and the reference signal are correlated to obtain a more precisely synchronized refer ence signal The results of the correlation are used to calculate various results e g the EVM and BER Various methods are available to determine the reference signal and perform fine sychronization Fine synchronization using detected data By default the reference signal is estimated from the detected data However if the signal has a poor transmission quality or a high noise level false symbol decisions are Overview of the Demodulation Process more frequent which may cause spikes in the EVM results and lead to a false refer ence signal H Coarse da sync Demodulation fi amp symbol detected symbols d signal Ref sonal mE generation c decisions w g Fine sync using Or d
371. l for UO input Available for source types e Capture Buffer User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 56 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays peemm M EE EEL EEL EEL Ee U Ea e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector Capture buffer display Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Vector UO result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 1 Vector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 24 Result display for Vector HO Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM COMP to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 383 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA Depending on the modulation type you are using different signal parameters are deter mined during vector signal analysis User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 57 Common Parameters in VSA Details concerning the calculation of individual parameters can be found in chapter 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 106 and chapter A 6 For mulae on page 433 Table
372. l symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 Table 4 9 77 4 DQPSK TFTS Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 180 45 90 45 90 45 0 45 Table 4 10 1 4 DQPSK Natural Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 180 45 90 45 Table 4 11 7 4 DQPSK APCO25 and APCO25Phase2 Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 4 3 5 Offset QPSK Offset QPSK differs from normal QPSK in the fact that the Q component is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain Hence the symbol time instants of the and the Q component do not coincide The concept of Offset QPSK is illustrated in the diagrams below R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurement Basics pe nmp w S Derivation of OQPSK Table 4 12 I Q diagram and constellation diagram QPSK OQPSK delayed Q component Inphase Quadratu re Quadratur e a time 6 amb symbols symbols PSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35
373. lay 23 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude 23 Constellation Frequency ek nenne 24 Constellation VQ siansa teii 25 Constellation UO Rotated sss 26 EQUAIIZER EE 18 Error V CtOF iicet 17 Error Vector Magnitude EVM sss 27 Eye Diagram Frequency 28 Eye Diagram Imag Q 29 Eye Diagram Real I 4 30 Frequency Absolute 2 trem ferent 30 Frequency Error Absolute A 33 Frequency Error Relative 34 Frequency Relative e Frequency Response Group Delay w35 Frequency Response Magnitude ux Frequency Response Phase xf Impulse Response Magnitude sseeeseeenereeeereeee 38 Impulse Response Phase isiisirisiiisiiniinin 39 Impulse Response Real Imag m Magnit de Absol te irre moine Magnitude Ert rt eter ntis Magnitude Overview Absolute sssssse 41 Magnitude Relative tme 43 Meas amp Rel eese reote EENS 16 Modulation accuracy 18 Modulation errors zd MultiSOUFCG neret ree rne reet 18 OVEIVIEW B 19 Phase Error 44 Phase Unwtap 2 cere ett retener rne 46 Plidse ee WEE 45 REAM MAG VQ ieri er trees 47 Result S trtmiaty EE 48 SCPI parameters eere 19 Spectrum Capture Buffer Error ssss 53 Spectrum Meas Error 53 Symbol Table 54 SVMDBOIMS 1
374. lay in the window specified by the suffix n 11 9 2 11 9 2 1 Retrieving Results For details see chapter 11 9 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 382 Setting parameters Trace TRACe1 2 3 4 5 6 The complete data from the corresponding trace TRACe1R TRACe2R TRACe3R The real data from the corresponding trace The parameters are available for the Real Imaginary result types TRACelI TRACe2l TRACe3l The imaginary data from the corresponding trace The parame ters are available for the Real Imaginary result types Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation data source selected by the LAY ADD WIND command and the result type selected by the CALCulate lt n gt FORMat command also affect the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation data source and result type are provided here e Capture Buffer Results ree nne ERE R HR eXERxAS NER ERER SESS R S gut An EIS ENEE 382 e Cartesian DIGgralmis ecieeu accensis reete etna enin dre ER s EENEG KEEN 383 Eelere Dagia SS ti eene tr ba enden reete ee re a e Re ae eeh 383 LEN SUC CAMPI EE 383 e RESUME SUMI N necem neci deca RE RISE Pre e OR ese RM ee 383 Ori EE 384 M h SOGE eee
375. le It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData PreviewData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSWP For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 va
376. le For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Performing a Measurement Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 192 SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON for example Parameters State ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates a measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current measurement This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSWP or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Usage Event 11 6 Performing a Measurement When the VSA application is activated a continuous sweep is performed automatically However you can stop and start a new measurement any time Furthermore you can perform a sequence of measurements using the Sequencer see Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function on page 12 ABORT eseu 338 INITiate n CONMEOaS oiii nanain anaiai aaan naana aaa iaia aia na aiaa arahina 339 NEI Ee el Me Te
377. lity reasons only Use the SENS SWAP IQ command for new remote control programs see SENSe SWAPiq on page 309 Setting parameters lt SidebandPos gt NORMal INVerse NORMal Normal non inverted position INVerse Inverted position RST NORMal 11 13 Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to perform vector signal analysis in a remote environment These examples are meant to demonstrate the use of the most common remote com mands for vector signal analysis Note that not all commands executed here are actually necessary as they may reflect default settings e Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal Ed 412 e Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital crier ro eebe EE d 413 e Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check 417 Programming Examples 11 13 14 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continu ous QPSK Signal The following example describes a scenario similar to the one for manual operation described in RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM MyVSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named MyVSA DEM FORM QPSK Set the modulation type DEM QPSK FORM NORM Set the modulation order DEM MAPP CAT DEM MAPP WCDMA Set the symbol mapping to WCDMA DEM SR
378. log box gt To display the Output dialog box do one of the following e Select Output from the Overview e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key the Output Config softkey and the Output tab Output DC Config Signal Source IF Video Output Input Output Input Output Providing trigger signals as output is described in the R amp S FSWP Signal and Spectrum Analyzer User Manual Digital UO output settings are currently not available AMISIT OUPO Pt 148 AGG CT 149 L Output Type NITET ER 149 e BE 149 mE T i NENNEN 149 BS Eoo ERROR RETE 149 IF Video Output Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD on the rear panel of the R amp S FSWP For restrictions and additional information see the R amp S FSWP UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector VIDEO The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF signal is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequencies at the output Remote command OUTPut IF SOURce on page 295 Input Output and Frontend Settings Trigger 1 2 Access Overview Signal Capture Trigger In Out Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 1 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note Providing tr
379. low intersymbol inferference Best suited for eye diagrams or UO vector dia grams Not necessarily suited for EVM evaluation due to amplifi cation in the pass band Low Pass Narrow Pass band up to Feymbo 2 Stop band starts at Fsymboi 40dB Low Pass Wide Pass band up to Fo Stop band starts at 1 5 F symbo1 40dB Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period integrate and dump effect RRC Root Raised Cosine Filter The roll off parameter Alpha is set according to the Transmit filter if the Auto according to Trans mit filter option is enabled see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 188 Otherwise it must be set manually If the Transmit filter is also a Root Raised Cosine filter with the same roll off parameter the resulting system is inter symbol interference free USER User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For details see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Fil ters on page 218 NONE No measurement filter is used The frequency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 441 R amp S FSWP K70 Annex A 3 3 Typical Combinations of Tx and Measurement Filters Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in table 1 4 th
380. lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM PPEak RESUIt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FDERror PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent RESUIt CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy 0OFFset MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy OOFFset PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMi
381. lt type for that data source is displayed 3 Exit the SmartGrid mode 4 Select the Window Config softkey to change the result types and other display settings for the selected window To change the settings in other windows select a different window from the Specifics for list in the Window Config dialog box 5 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview Enable the Specifics for option to access the analysis functions for the selected window 6 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure special analysis settings for the individual result displays for example e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Configure the trace to display the average over a series of measurements If necessary increase the Statistics Count defined in the Sweep menu 7 Press the SWEEP key and select the Selected Result Rng softkey to select a specific burst to be evaluated The result displays are updated to show the results for the selected burst Tip You can use a capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges and analyze the individual result ranges in another window The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display 8 Optionally zoom into a diagram to enlarge an area of the displayed data 9 Optionally change the display scaling for diagrams
382. lter Fig 4 49 An equalizer filter can be activated in the reference and measurement signal path The filter coefficients are determined in such a way that the error vector magnitude EVM is minimized Averaging IQ Measure ment Signal The result range used for equalizer calculation might be quite short leading to unstable equalizer impulse responses For time invariant channels the estimation length can be extended using Averaging mode In this case the statistics from all previously deter mined reference signals and measurement signals are averaged to determine the cur rent equalizer function Thus the results of previous sweeps are continuously consid ered to calculate the current equalizer values Averaging is only restarted when the R amp S FSWP is switched off or when the user manually resets the equalizer Obviously this method requires a stable input signal for the entire duration of the measurement as otherwise the current equalizer is distorted by previous results This process requires extended calculation time so that the measurement update rate of the R amp S FSWP decreases distinctly When the distortions are compensated suffi ciently this averaging process can be stopped The current filter is frozen that means itis no longer changed Keep in mind that in Tracking and Averaging mode for sweep counts gt 1 repeated analysis of past result ranges might lead to differing readings The equalizer algorithm is
383. lters is provided in chapter A 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 428 Manual operation See Type on page 188 SENSe DDEMod MF ILter STATe lt MeasFilterState gt Use this command to switch the measurement filter off To switch a measurement filter on use the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME command 11 5 10 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF Switches the measurement filter off ON Switches the measurement filter specified by SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME com mand automatically switches the selected filter on RST 1 Manual operation See Type on page 188 SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects the user defined measurement filter For details on user defined filters see chapter 4 1 5 Customized Filters on page 65 Setting parameters lt FilterName gt Name of the user defined filter Example SENS DDEM MFIL NAME USER Selects user filter mode for the meas filter ENS DDEM MFIL USER D MMyMeasFilter Selects the user defined meas filter Manual operation See Type on page 188 See Load User Filter on page 189 Defining the Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which range of the result is to be evaluated Manual configuration of the evaluation range is described in chapter 5 11 Evaluat
384. lts and for all subsequent measurements until it is disabled The results of the limit check are indicated by red or green values in the result sum mary 8 3 3 How to Export the Trace Data to a File The measured data can be stored to an ASCII file either as raw data directly from the capture buffer or as displayed in the diagrams evaluated trace data Optionally a header can be included with additional information on the used measurement settings User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 231 How to Analyze the Measured Data 1 Press the TRACE key and select the Trace Export Config softkey 2 Define which type of data to export raw or trace By default trace data is expor ted 3 Optionally enable the header information to be included 4 To export the traces in all windows select Export Trace to ASCII File for all Win dows To export the traces only for the currently selected window select Export Trace to ASCII File for Specific Window To export the data from another window select it from the Specifics for list then export again In either case all traces of the selected window s are exported 5 Define a file name and storage location and select OK The data is stored in a file and can be analyzed in an external application Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer 9 Measurement Examples Some sample measurements for the digital GSM and EDGE standards provide a quick introduction to typical vector analyzer
385. lue 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 12 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt Channel PowerVs Min l ime lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 lt f lt f loat 134 float loat 142 float lt f loat 140 float ArrayOfFloat A 7 2 UO Data File Format iq tar lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt float 69 float float 70 float lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt lt IQ gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e c
386. lues are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Query parameters type Example Usage Retrieving Results lt none gt RMS EVM value of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS EVM values over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS EVM value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum EVM values over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of EVM values over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the FSK deviation error of FSK modulated sig nals Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt Deviation error for current sweep AVG Average FSK deviation error RPE Peak FSK deviation error SDEV Standard deviation of FSK deviation error PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK deviation error Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift type This command queries the results of the
387. m on the instrument e Documentation DVD with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSWP Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the DVD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instru ment Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion DVD delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSWP in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the software functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are described here An introduction to remote control is provided as well
388. m the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 293 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 146 Input Output and Frontend Settings This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 294 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSWP An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSWP ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSWP which may lead to image frequency display Note that the
389. m window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 209 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off SS ee ae User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 363 11 8 11 8 1 Configuring the Result Display Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 209 See Restore Original Display on page 209 See X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 209 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the result display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 204 e General Window Commandes 364 e Working with Windows in the Display 365 e VSA Window Configuration 2 2 rtr lenient e Lade RE LEER R dE RR LED 371 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n
390. mands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 3 2 25 Phase Error Displays the phase error of the measuremente signal with respect to the reference sig nal as a function of symbols over time PHASE _ERR t PHASE yras PHASE pep t with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 44 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 26 1 Phase Error Clrw Fig 3 16 Result display Phase Error Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM PHAS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 Phase Wrap The phase or argument of the signal the display is limited to the phase value range of 180 180 Phase yras Z MEAS t with t
391. mbols are checked for correctness against the pattern symbol sequence In case of a very short pattern i e a pattern length in the order of the inter symbol interference ISI duration a number of issues can arise False positive The l Q pattern is found at positions where the transmitted symbols differ from the pattern symbols Solution Try one of the following Activate Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Increase the I Q Correlation Threshold see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 170 e False negative The I Q pattern search misses a position where transmitted symbols match the pat tern symbols Solution Decrease the I Q Correlation Threshold see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 170 In case of bursted signals the pattern search finds only the first occurrence of the UO pattern within each burst If a false positive occurs in this situation cf case 1 the use of Meas only if pattern symbols correct will not provide a satisfactory sol ution In this case do the following increase the UO Correlation Threshold Specify the expected position of the pattern within the burst by adjusting the Offset parameter Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols Note Note that this message does not necessarily indicate a problem Its purpose is to inform you that you might have the opportunity to get a more stable demodulation and or better measurement results by improving your setup
392. mean and the peak value on separate tabs Note that the limits for the current and peak values are always the same For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 230 Limit Value Current Mean Peak Define the limit with which the currently measured mean or peak value is to be com pared A different limit value can be defined for each result type Depending on the modulation type different result types are available Result type Remote command PSK MSK QAM EVM RMS CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue on page 358 EVM Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue on page 358 Phase Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue on page 359 Phase Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue on page 359 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 359 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 359 6 5 Display and Window Configuration Result type Remote command Carr Freq Err CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 357 Rho CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue on page 360 IQ Offset CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue on page 359 FSK modulation only Fr
393. ment Examples 5 To view the traces in more detail enlarge the window using the Split Maximize key Ezizll and zoom into the display using the icon in the toolbar see the dot ted rectangle in figure 9 13 Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 24 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 200 BURST PATTERN D MagAbs Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 2R Clrw Start 26 sym i i i i i Stop 174 sym Fig 9 13 Zooming Now you can compare the measured and the ideal reference signal User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 249 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations the following tips may help you optimize or troubleshoot the measurement e Flow Chart for Troublesbooting nnne 250 e Explanation of Error Messages cient t bl i ce eee 252 e Frequently Asked Ouestions A 261 10 1 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting If you experience a concrete measurement problem you might want to try solving it with the help of the flow chart Troubleshooting Overview Flow Chart for Troubleshooting Press Preset in order to start from a known state Y Check the following parameters at the DUT and the K70 Demodulation Failed dications are e g Sync Failed Unstable Message in the Status Bar The EVM is really bad The measurement UO Constellation does not look at all like a constellation Y
394. ments and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 0 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 200 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the right limit of the marker search range for a markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or measure ment time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST right diagram border lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 800 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz 11 7 3 11 7 3 1 Analysis Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 200 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be a
395. meters PatternedSignal ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Name on page 143 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue lt SignalType gt This command specifies whether the signal is bursted or continuous Setting parameters lt SignalType gt CONTinuous BURSted RST CONTinuous Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Signal Type on page 142 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe lt PattOffsState gt This command de activates the pattern offset Setting parameters lt PattOffsState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Offset on page 143 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue lt PatternOffset gt This command defines a number of symbols which are ignored before the comparison with the pattern starts Setting parameters lt PatternOffset gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Offset on page 143 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 Configuring VSA Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSWP can analyze s
396. method result type based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Further window settings are available for some result types Manual configuration of VSA windows is described in chapter 6 5 1 Result Window Configuration on page 205 Useful commands for configuring the window described elsewhere LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 Configuring the Result Display Remote commands exclusive to configuring VSA windows E e DEI E DDEM SPECMUM STATE EE 372 CALCu latesn gt RE 372 CAL Culate lt me FOR Malte E 373 CALOCulate n STATistics CCDF STATe essere nennen nnns 375 EA E ER Ell 375 DISPlay WINDow n ITEM LINE VALue eese nnne 375 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztPRATe AUTO 376 bpISPlayDWINDowensEPRATe VAL int don cer notera ntt narret rre 377 DISPlay WINDowens TRAGe SYMBOl 2 ere o etes oras ou unn mk occu eu nc esee ee Yea YER ade 377 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE eese 377 CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the result type transformation to spectrum mode Spectral evaluation is available for the following result types e MAGNitude e PHASe UPHase e FREQuency e Real Imag RIMAG The result types are defined using the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC FEED
397. mines whether the signal is continuous or contains bursts Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue on page 292 Burst Settings For bursts further settings are available User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 142 Signal Description Min Length Max Length Burst Settings Shortest and longest expected burst length in symbols 32000 The symbols are con verted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAX imum on page 290 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt LENGth MINimum on page 290 tog Run In Burst Settings The number of symbols before the signal is assumed to have valid modulated symbols The symbols are converted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP RISing on page 291 Run Out Burst Settings The number of symbols before the falling edge that do not necessarily need to have a valid modulation The symbols are converted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt SKIP FALLing on page 291 Pattern Settings If the signal is expected to have a specific pattern enable the Pattern option to define the pattern settings Note The pattern search itself must be enabled separately in the Pattern Search Set tings see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 171 By default the pattern search is active if the signal description contains a pattern
398. n Burst Search Pattern Search Auto according to Signal Structure Advanced Meas only if Burst found Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 14 769 us Minimum Gap Length 3 692 us Information Expected Burst Length 148 4 sym Burst Found Preview Preview Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Enabling Burst Searches Enables or disables burst searches If Auto is selected burst search is enabled only if the signal structure defines a bursted signal in the Signal Structure tab of the Modu lation amp Signal Description dialog box see on page 142 Remote command Se DI on page 315 Measuring only if burst was found If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid burst has been found When measuring bursted signals that are averaged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous mea surements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command I on page 315 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 169 5 7 2 Burst and Pattern Configuration Burst Configuration The conditions under which a burst is detected in the captured data can be configured either manually or automatically according to the defined signal structure settings see Burst Settings on page 142 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO on page 315 Search Tolerance Burst Configuration Defines th
399. n See Search Next Minimum on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak sets the marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Max Peak on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 201 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on pag
400. n error is corrected in the reference frequency trace This ensures that the frequency deviation in the measured frequency trace corresponds to that of the originally measured signal With respect to the I Q reconstruction the mea sured magnitude is timing compensated using the timing offset estimated from the measured instantaneous frequency This ensures that the measured magnitude and frequency remain synchronized in the reconstructed UO waveform A 6 2 Result Summary Evaluations The evaluations for the result summary take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 This value can be one of the following e 1 only the symbol instant contributes to the result e 2 two samples per symbol instant contribute to the result required for offset QPSK e the Sample rate defined for data acquisition see Sample Rate on page 161 all samples contribute to the result equally The results are determined by the evaluation range The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter A 6 2 1 Formulae PSK QAM and MSK Modulation For PSK QAM and MSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in chapter chapter 4 5 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 106 The parame ters of the PSK QAM and MSK speci
401. nalyzed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 200 Configuring Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically Manual configuration of limit lines is described in chapter 6 4 1 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines on page 202 e General elen Lan Eve EE 355 e Defining H BE 356 General Commands The following commands determine the general behaviour of the limit line check CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy DEFault seeeeee eene eene nennen esent n inen nnn nnt 355 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvGTATe retten nnn nn nnns sse 355 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy DEFault Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks in all windows Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe lt LimitState gt Limits checks for all evaluations based on modulation accuracy e g Result Summary are enabled or disabled R amp S FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA Setting parameters lt LimitState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413 Manual operation See Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits on page 203 11 7 3 2 Defining Lim
402. nce Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Analysis 11 7 2 2 Marker Search and Positioning Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Useful commands for positioning markers described elsewhere CALCulatecn MARKer m TRACe on page 347 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe on page 349 Remote commands exclusive to positioning markers CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM Aimum Abt ak 350 GALCulatesn DELTamarkersm MAXIm tm LEFT necatta tn erant a 350 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee enean nni 351 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK sessi 351 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt a noaanaannnannnoannrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrennnrnnnnnnn 351 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarkercm gt MINimum LEET 351 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMiNimumcNENT 351 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee 351 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 352 CAL Culate nz M bkermmz M ANImum AbPtak 352 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiIMUM LEFT
403. nd the demodulated bits It is important to note that this comparison is only performed at posi tions that have been identified by the UO pattern search as possible pattern positions The algorithm and a simple example are illustrated in figure 4 46 First the pattern candidate bits are extracted from the whole bitstream calculated by the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions stage This means that the symbol stream is cut at the position that has been detected by the 1 Q Pattern Search as the start of the pattern The extracted sequence is then compared to the selected pattern If the demodulation has been ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position the extracted sequence needs to be compared to all possible rotated versions of the selected pattern For example in the case of QPSK modulation the rotational symme try has the order four i e there are four pattern hypotheses If the extracted sequence coincides with one of the hypotheses the pattern is declared as found and the abso lute phase corresponding to the appropriate hypothesis is passed on Both the symbol decisions and the UO measurement signal are then rotated with this pattern phase for the whole result range thus resolving the phase ambiguity For more information refer to chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 97 chapter 4 4 2 I Q Pattern Search on page 96 Overview of the Demodulation Process Pattern Symbol Check ze Symbo
404. nere Ree en P np 334 GALCulate n ELINsstartstop VALue 2 nieto tht t rre 335 CU ALS E ED e 372 CALG latesn gt el EE 373 CAL Culatesn gt FSK DEViation ee EE 410 CAL Culate nz FG DEViaton RE terencehREl ative A 282 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue m CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType STATe sese 357 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType RESUII esee 396 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent STATe CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent RE Gu 396 CAL Culate nzLUlMtMACCuracvCFERrorMEAN GTATe ener rennen 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue eese nennen rennen 357 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN RESUlt eese 396 CAL Culate nzLUlMtMACCuracvCFERrorbEAk GTATe nennen enne 356 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK VALue essere nnne ener enr snnnns CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK RESult GALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy DEFault 1 rr rrt rro rrr nth inne CAlCulate nz LUlMrMACCuracyEVM PCUbrent GTATe nennen rennen nennen CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue essent CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent RE GOIN 396 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan STATe sse
405. nes whether marker search functions are performed on the real or imaginary trace of the Real Imag measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch on page 353 Search Limits Left Right If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe on page 355 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 354 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 354 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search Overview gt Bandwidth Access MKR gt Markers Peak Sea DUNT EODD 201 ele 201 eT I 201 Search MINIMUM ee ec ee rin er tct dte ee e e dada eno c cte rev Du n E 201 Search Next MIMMO EE 201 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimun PEAK on page 353 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 351 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 352 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 35
406. ng use e iret mrt rbi Importingremote nont ttes Importing Exporting zs Maximum bandwidth esses Sample rate trn o trt ener UO imbalance elle LTE 181 Definition Formula UO offset Origin Offset Definition AAA 111 Compensating Compensation m opu er UO pattern search see Pattern Search creer rns 96 UO Power BI 164 Trigger level remote eese 312 IF frequency UN me M 148 Output remote 295 IF output ins 148 aum 295 IF Power BEI 164 Trigger level remote e ree 311 Importing VQ data 2 sierra UO data remote SOflKGy entem e rre enmt Impulse response Magnitude result type sese 38 Phase result type de Real Imag result type Input ele le Wiele TEE 145 Configuration remote sse 293 COUPLING rtt t retreat Coupling remote Overload remote ence t Settings eee Source Configuration Input sample rate ISR Deg eege deeasceenianeres de 68 Input sources Radio 1eQUONCY ET 145 Installation dacs error err rhe tren crt etes 11 Intersymbol interference ISI v1 62 Filler eet 1 62 ISBfre systel oreet ect er teet nenas 63 K Keys BW nOtUSed 2 utc eet RE Red 131 MKR gt MKR FUNCT not used
407. ng the Measurement Spectrum VSA EE Ref Level 0 00 d m Mod m el Att 20 0dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen A TRG EXT Trace Trace Mode Evaluation AEVM 1 Clw 2 Avg 3 Max p J trace EE Fiere e Meas J Ret A 9 r 3 E E SESE e gt C J Trace 4 c A Start 0 sym Stop 100 sym Traces 5 Blank d ees C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Trace 6 Blank Meas Ref Meas Ret 20 dBm Preset Select Select 40 dBm All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min 60 dBm Trace Wizard 80 dBm Trace Wizard Screen A Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 535 Measuring esate Problem The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain Solution 1 Select the measurement window 2 Press the AMPT key 3 Press the Unit softkey 4 Press the Y Axis Unit softkey 5 Select dB User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 263 R amp S FSWP K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Problem The Vector I Q result display and the Constellation UO result display look different Spectrum VSA Ref Level 1 96 dBm Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 22dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 148 SGL BURST PATTERN el Crw B Const 1 Q Meas amp Ref e 1M Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 C Mag CapBuf e1cClw D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Tt Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 91 Date 16 MAR 2010 10 08 34 Reason e The Vector UO diagram shows the measurement signal a
408. ng the Result Range The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is dis played Manual configuration of the result range is described in chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 177 Useful commands for result ranges described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst STARt on page 381 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STOP on page 379 Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to defining result ranges CALOCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment DEFault eee eene 322 CAL Culate nzTR ACectADJustAl Gnment OFF Get 322 CAL Culate nzTR ACectADJustfVAl ue 323 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz MI SCALelv ktset ennn nnr nnt 323 SENSeHDDEMOG TIME crea ob gab red caer eter eade taste dude ceu er Le sed dE 323 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault Alignment This command defines where the reference point is to appear in the result range Suffix lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt Alignment gt LEFT CENTer RIGHt LEFT The reference point is at the start of the result range CENTer The reference point is in the middle of the result range RIGHt The reference point is displayed at the end of the result range RST LEFT Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 413
409. nia E aa a 362 FORMat DEXP ort EE Te 380 e ele ER ele TEE 380 FORMat DEXPOR MOD E 380 INITiate REFMeas Jl Eeer 339 INimatesn gt CONTINUOUS ERE RE LOTES 340 INETiatesms REFS sorte rrt eee Ir Rep repere pee eter ac dp ede se RATEN 341 INITiatesmz SEQUuencer ABORE EE 342 INlflate nz GEOuencer IMMedate eene eterne nnne eene n eren nenene 342 INITiatesis SEQUeficer de E 342 INITiate ns SEQUuencerREFReSh ALL iiiter eta euer ee eo eee race core rne eria hrec reden TEES 341 ll RE RTE coo cote te tee png eye Rn on LAST EFE S CER UN CE VES Reeve E seo tert iE EERO 340 INPULAT TORU e TEE 301 MIN UE AN RE WIEST E Le eesac ie INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet INPut COUPLING C E lyguez3gee NEES LA Ipom E aT Ile GARNECH KEE INPut IN e RR KE INPut ElETer E RE AC E INPut GAIN STATe INPUEGAIIN VALU G p Tee m estat ENT ale e EI RR EE NN elt ele LE TEE INSTr ment CREate NEW oet erret ern Dn entendre NC er rr nne rec npe iR EEN INS Tr meht DEL6l6 notiert eei EEN Cn cene e e Edda Cdi e ce eed INSTrument LIST Gen INS T mMent Cl El E INSTr ment SELectl i tier rper por ri pea eric r cape x ERN Eae e ce RENE EE EYED SERERE THREE E dou sia BR VVIN Bro em
410. nit This command selects the global unit for phase results Setting parameters Unit DEG RAD RST RAD Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME Unit This command selects the unit symbols or seconds for the x axis Setting parameters Unit S SYM RST SYM Manual operation See X Axis Unit on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt Y UNIT TIME Unit This command selects the unit symbols or seconds for the y axis of equalizer group delay measurements Setting parameters Unit S SYM RST SYM Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 159 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision lt PDiv gt This command defines the scaling of the x axis for statistical result displays For all other result displays this command is only available as a query Setting parameters lt PDiv gt numeric value Defines the range per division total range 10 lt PDiv gt Manual operation See Range per Division on page 158 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition lt RPos gt This command defines the position of the reference value for the X axis Setting the position of the reference value is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt RPos gt numeric value lt numeric_value gt Example DISP TRAC X RPOS 30 PCT The reference value
411. no longer be assigned to any standard Any existing assignments to other stand ards are removed as well To restore predefined patterns Default patterns provided by Rohde amp Schwarz can be restored 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Select the Restore Factory Settings softkey 3 Select the Restore Pattern Files softkey The patterns as defined by Rohde amp Schwarz at the time of delivery are restored How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 8 2 3 8 2 3 1 Restoring user defined patterns User defined patterns can only be restored if you have a copy of the pattern file cre ated during creation In this case copy the file named Patternname xml back to the installation directory of the VSA application under vsa standards After a preset or after performing certain operations e g changing the modulation settings the pat tern will be included in the list of All Patterns again How to Manage Known Data Files You can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the VSA application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 4 42 and Fine Synchronization on page 186 e Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER see chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 How to Load Known Data Files Known Data files are loaded in the Modulation amp Signal Description sett
412. ns or evaluation ranges Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh non Multistandard mode on page 167 INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh MSRA only on page 167 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Performing a Measurement Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuenc
413. nt set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command Example INST SEL PhaseNoise INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named PhaseNoise and creates a new measurement channel named PhaseNoise 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 277 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 277 Example INST CRE PNO PhaseNoise 2 Adds an additional phase noise display named PhaseNoise 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt Ch
414. ntaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation Meas Deviation Frequency Ref Deviation Freq Ref Freq Meas 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 4 62 The reference and measured instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with reference deviation error 4 6 Measurement Ranges The VSA application contains three measurement ranges that need to be set by the user e Capture Buffer Length The length of the capture buffer specifies how many data points are captured dur ing a single VSA measurement For example if you want to measure a bursted signal it is recommended that you make the capture length long enough to ensure that in each capture buffer at least one entire burst is included The maximum capture buffer length is 50 Msymbols for a sample rate of 4 or 200 million samples Result Range The result range defines the symbols from the capture buffer that are to be demodulated and analyzed together For example bursted signals have intervals between the bursts that are not of interest when analyzing peaks or overshoots Thus the result range usually coin cides with the range of the capture buffer in which the burst is located The maximum result range length is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 samples 4 6 1 Measurement Ranges e Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines the symbols from the result range that are to be included in the evaluation of specific parameters e g error vectors
415. nter fmax SPANmin 2Z 5 5 4 5 5 4 1 Input Output and Frontend Settings fmax and Spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 297 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size of the center frequency The step size can be set to a predefined value or it can be manually set to a user defined value Auto The step size is set to the default value using the rotary knob 100 kHz Using the arrow keys 1 MHz Manual Defines a user defined step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO on page 298 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 298 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA mode thi
416. nual 1177 5685 02 01 369 Configuring the Result Display LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the windo
417. nual operation See Usable UO Bandwidth on page 161 Triggering Measurements The trigger commands define the beginning of a measurement Tasks for manual configuration are described in chapter 5 6 2 Trigger Settings on page 161 TRIGE SEQuence Ben E 310 TRIGgerE SEOuence H OL Don TIME 2 2 52 oreet revocet eire rette 310 TRIGSer SEQuence IEPowerhODbDofF 1 tcr a a a ENEE 310 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis cessere nennen 311 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port ccce 311 TRiGger SEQuence L EVelFPOWF 1 111i onn recreo tree aas ze vasa reid 311 Configuring VSA TRIGger SEQuencel E EVebIQPOWPT EE 312 TRIGger SEQuence SLORBbe 2 2 irt n eir ehe ea In gn RR ERR ARENA RR RR ERR RR YARN SES 312 TRIGgerSEQuernce S OUR teer ccd sceacescacdsteacdectosedevesisgueaanstiasaveets csaaanerettigndater 312 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 165 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters Offset The allowed range is 0 s to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset
418. o Digital Standards In order to perform vector signal analysis as specified in digital standards various pre defined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA option In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measure ments For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 420 This section provides instructions for the following tasks To perform a measurement according to a standard on page 215 Toload predefined settings files on page 216 e To store settings as a standard file on page 216 e To delete standard files on page 216 Torestore standard files on page 217 To perform a measurement according to a standard 1 Press the MODE key and select the VSA application 2 Press the MEAS key and select the Digital Standards softkey 3 Select the required settings file and then Load see To load predefined settings files on page 216 The instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard and a measurement is started immediately How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 4 Press the RUN SINGLE key to stop the continuous measurement mode and start a defined number of measurements The measured data is stored in the capture buffer and can be analyzed see chap ter 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data on page 226 To load predefined settings files
419. o and gq are the gain of the inphase and the quadrature component and 0 rep resents the quadrature error The I Q imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the I Q imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the UO imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter is referred to amplitude droop Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 1 2 0 8 0 6 0 4 Magnitude of Meas Signal relative 0 2 1 L 0 50 100 150 200 Time Symbols Fig 4 57 Effect of amplitude droop Gain Distortion Table 4 18 Effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions Nonlinear distortions amplitude distortion transmit Amplitude distortion analyzer ter Gar Distortion Transmitter Gain Distortion Analyzer 0 of 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 Real 0 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 058 Rea The effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions on a 64QAM signal are illustrated in table 4 18 only the first quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is minimized The second column shows the signal after scaling Signal Model Estimation and Modul
420. od PRATe on page 308 To define a different number of points per symbol for display use the MANual parameter and the DISPlay WINDowcn PRATe VALue command Setting parameters lt DisplayPPSMode gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 207 Retrieving Results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue lt DisplayPPS gt This command determines the number of points to be displayed per symbol if manual mode is selected see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 376 This command is not available for result displays based on the capture buffer in this case the displayed points per symbol are defined by the sample rate SENSe DDEMod PRATe command Setting parameters lt DisplayPPS gt 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 1 only the symbol time instants are displayed 2 4 8 16 32 more points are displayed than symbols RST 4 Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 207 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe SYMBol This command enables the display of the decision instants time when the signals occurred as dots on the trace Manual operation See Highlight Symbols on page 206 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABS
421. od SEARch SYNC NSTate ettet ttt ttti ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch SvNC PATTemcADD rasne nrsanrnra ne 321 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMowve ettet 321 ISENSe IDDEMod SEARch SvMC SElect nnana 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT E SENSe DDEMod SIGNAaL PATTern ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt ot SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue ttt sttis ISENSe IDDEMod SR Te thakkk tnae khena kne A a AELA AAL AAAA AAAA AAEE E LASA t anaana nanan rnant SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent ISENSe IDDEMod ST ANdard D I ee ISENSe IDDEMod ST ANdard PpEseitvV uel ettet ttis 280 ISENSe IDDEMod STANdard SAVE 280 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATC scsscssssssssessssssesssssesessssssesssssesesssteesssseeessssieessaseeessese 292 SENSe DDEMod S TANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue ttt 292 SENSe DDEMOGQ TFIEtGEAEPEIG actae esie eec a rn e oi queso eder oE Uy Lene sce saa F EI deene SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME SENSe IDDEMOG TFI ter USER piorna nA a SERGE yore MARRE RUE SENSe DDEMOQd TFIEter S TA To ottenere tni geo EES qe eei piano qedeus SiE Rare NER cavers SENSe IDDEMOGQ TIME c i ce ra tette gan eed p get te ecu da ddp rte cen e te t d RR Rc eb SENSe IDDBEMOG USER NAME ito iare EES EE ISENSE eelere MR SENSe FREQu ncy CENT er STEP zt rette ctc rt PE e pcc Eo e dad E e SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO SEN
422. ogically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 272 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of the
423. olute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL 11 9 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the calculated VSA parameters Retrieving Results d 11 9 1 All results that are not based on the capture buffer data are calculated for a single result range only see chapter 4 6 1 Result Range on page 123 To retrieve the results for several result ranges use the SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC on page 313 command to move from one result range to the next e Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values sse 378 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACEens sss 382 e Reliving HEET ertet ern o rtc e titt ee eben te edd 384 e Retrieving Limit Check Results dee ec nete eee 396 Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values In order to retrieve the trace and marker results in a remote environment use the fol lowing commands CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz XABGolute 378 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative 378 GALOulate n MARKersmo Y uiid cesussansua as x ence RN Rea Isa ESEEN SEENEN 379 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACects MI SCALelGTARt eren 379 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe STOP sssseseseseseeeee nnnm 379 FORMatDEXPortDSEPAaLralor 1 ene ro ethtn oen a Dun ERR De A e RID A RT iE i e da RETE 380 FORMat DEXPORMFEADGR i iioi aci
424. omplex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 Q Data File Format iq tar I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 O 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 QI01 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 0 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 TILLY Olly iy Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 215 QGI2 TE Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 0 2 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 LIES Gti t2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 2 1I21 QI2112 Channel 2 Complex sample 2
425. on or off via the Pattern Search dialog see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 171 Detected patterns are indicated by a green background in the symbol table If during demodulation individual symbols do not match the pattern after all these symbols are indicated by a red frame Extraction of Result Range The result range can be aligned to a burst a pattern or simply the start of the capture buffer see Reference on page 178 Within this stage the result range is cut from the capture buffer starting at a point that is specified by the user e g the start of a detected burst The VSA application automatically takes into account filter settling times by making the internal buffers sufficiently longer than the selected result range Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the extracted result range and aims at making the correct sym bol decisions Within this stage a coarse synchronization of the carrier frequency off Set the carrier phase the scaling and the timing takes place Furthermore an auto matically selected internal receive filter Rx filter is used in order to remove the inter symbol interference as effectively as possible The outputs of this stage are the coarsely synchronized measurement signal and the symbol decisions bits The symbol decisions are later used for the Pattern Symbol Check stage and for the Ref erence Signal Generation stage User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 92 Ov
426. on page 164 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSWP ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 165 Configuring VSA TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 165 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 35V RST 1
427. on page 198 See Marker Type on page 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Analysis Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See X value on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State
428. onable MODulation n CFRequency PTRansition cecus 409 STATus OUEGtonable MODulaton nz EVMP Ransiton 409 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz F kP Ransttion 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo PTRansition eese eene 409 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz M ACGhtude PD Ransition 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe PTRansition sees 410 STATusOUEGuonable POWerPD Ranstton 410 STATUs QUEStonable SYNGC PTRansitlori 5 2 9 2 90 araa n n S RON T DR AE 410 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYN
429. onable MODulaton nz DHAGeENAb le 408 STATUS QUEStionable POWerENAble sse en nnns nnns nnns saa Saai 408 STATus QUEStionable GvhNCENAble oreraa aa a aAa TEE 408 STATusOUEzuonable AC mmtNTRansition 408 STATus QUESHonable DIGN TRARSIIQRI iced one zu aia ed o ture et urna tcx nura cae redu 408 STATusOUtEGtonabie ER OuencvNTRansitlon iini 408 STATus OUEGtonable LUlMit zmmzNTRansition 409 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m NTRansition ecciesie 409 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nzNTRaneition 409 STATusOUESGtonabie MODulatton cnz CFbReouencv NTRansttlon eneren neeeeeene 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM N Ransition eene 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n FSK NTRansition lessen 409 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo NTRansition eese enne 409 STATusOUEGuonable MODulaton nz M ACGhtudeNTRansiton 409 STATus OUEGuonable MODulaton nz DHAGehTRansiton 409 STATusOUEGuonable POWerNTRansitton 409 STATusOUEzuonable GvhNcCNTbRansiton dasini idea cann ina a iaa ana 409 STATusOUEGuonable AC Immit PD Ransiton 409 STATUus QUESHomnable MAKE te DE 409 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition caos eiiis taie shes ena aan uda 409 STATusOUEGuonable LlMit zmz PD Ransition 409 STA T s QUEStionable MAbRoin m P TRANSOM saarinen riiai aariad 409 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz PD Ransition 409 R amp S FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUESti
430. onstellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSWP K70 264 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSWP K70 or Why do have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ KO amd the R amp S ESWP KTO ice ettet e eter te e ect anaes 265 Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is significantly SIRE TIU UT IEEE 265 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSWP K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR In R amp S e E KE 267 Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result display 268 Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative od 268 Question How can get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer nee e KEE 268 Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong 269 Problem Synchronization fails despite correct settings A prerequisite for correct synchronization is a random data sequence of an adaquate size Solution Make sure the input signal contains an adaquate number of uncorrelated random bits NotO 0 0 00 111 1 1 0r01 01 O1 O1 01 for example Frequently Asked Questions For QAM modulation the result length the data on which synchronization is based should correspond to at least 8 times the modulation order see Result Length on
431. or VSA Data The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on the result type which are also separated by a semico lon If several traces in several windows are exported to one file the data for each window is listed subsequently Within the data for a single window the data for the individual traces is listed subsequently User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 429 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data For details on which data is stored for which result display see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 381 Table 1 5 ASCII file format for VSA trace data export File contents Description Header Type FSWP Instrument model Version 1 40 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2012 Date of data set storage Header section for individual window Screen 1 Window name Points per Symbol 4 x Axis Start 13 sym Points per symbol Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis y per div 0 22000000000000003 Y axis range per division Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 Y axis reference position Start of ResultRange in Capture Buffer 6400 sym Number of symbol at which ex
432. ot return an error R amp S9FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Ma
433. ote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 362 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 363 for each multiple zoom window i Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 362 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 363 for each multiple zoom window d Import Export Functions IO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSWP later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSWP or an external software tool later For example you can capture UO data using
434. ource RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 146 11 5 2 2 11 5 2 3 Configuring VSA Output Settings The following commands are required to query or provide output at the R amp S FSWP connectors OUTPut IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSWP Parameters Source IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector VIDeo The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal 200mV is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequen cies at the output RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector Manual operation See IF Video Output on page 148 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSWP OUTPULTRIGgerspon gt DI REGION 2 cies temer ecu cussed a Desierto erecta dean nnt etre 295 OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel 2 2 12 oer ud octo teo e E eere rosa te ex evi o ENEE 296 DQUTPut TRIGgersport OTY PE usine reote Ene RERO tenue E e AR NEEN 296 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate seen 297 OUTPut TRICE pont PULSS LENG EE 297 OUT
435. owing purposes e Development of new networks and modulation methods for which no filters are defined yet Measurements of transmitter characteristics with slightly modified e g shortened transmitter filters An external program FILTWIZ is offered to convert user defined filters This pro gram generates filter files vaf which can be transferred to the analyzer with a USB device for example The program can be downloaded together with a detailed descrip tion as a precompiled MATLABO file MATLAB pcode on the Internet at http www rohde schwarz com search term FILTWIZ Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Rohde amp Schwarz Filter Wizard Version 1 5 10 xi File operations File name MyFilter vaf Load Save Save as Exit Description File info user specific fitter 0 035 RRC alpha 0 22 L 10 ISI_LSNR 16 5 dB 0 03 0 025 0 02 0 015 hi 0 01 0 005 tin i zg Fig 4 4 FILTWIZ filter tool for VSA It is possible to load customized transmit filters and customized measurement filters If a customized transmit filter is selected the internal receive filter coefficients are calcu lated automatically on the fly Note that this is different to the R amp S FSQ K70 where it is necessary to also transfer a user receive filter If you upload a customized transmit filter and leave the measurement filter set to auto matic the internally calculated receive filt
436. own below Fig 4 29 DMSK differential encoder in the transmitter d input symbol 0 1 of differential encoder d 4 input symbol delayed by the symbol period Ts d output symbol 0 1 of differential encoder The logical symbol mapping is then performed on the XOR coded bitstream d Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM In the case of QAM the information is represented by the signal amplitude and phase The symbols are arranged in a square constellation in the UO plane To ensure reliable demodulation symbol numbers should be distributed evenly with respect to the symbol alphabet As a rule of thumb the result length should correspond to at least 8 times the modula tion order For example with 64 QAM a result length of at least 8 64 512 symbols should be used Symbol Mapping QAM Mappings The following QAM mappings are obtained from the mapping of the 1st quadrant which is always rotated by rr 2 for the subsequent quadrants and supplemented by a GRAY coded prefix for each quadrant Table 4 15 Derivation of QAM mappings a In the following diagrams the symbol mappings are indicated in hexadecimal and binary form 0 1 3 2 1100 1101 1111 1110 1000 1001 1011 1010 Fig 4 30 Constellation diagram for 16QAM GRAY including the logical symbol mapping hexadeci mal and binary Symbol Mapping 1011 1001 0001 0011 1010 1000 0000 0010 1110 1100 0100 0110 1111 11
437. p COUNt VALue on page 314 Select Result Rng Selects the result range from the capture buffer that you want to evaluate This function is available in single sweep mode only By default the application shows the results over all result ranges that have been cap tured in the signal capturing process and are in the R amp S FSWP s memory By selecting a range number you can evaluate a specific result range e g a particular burst The range depends on the number of result ranges you have captured previously For more information refer also to chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 122 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURSt CALC on page 313 Burst and Pattern Configuration Access Overview Burst Pattern Information on known patterns and bursts in the captured signal improve the accuracy of the determined ideal reference signal and calculation of the signal parameters becomes quicker For details on burst and patterns see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Proc ess on page 91 Burst Search Access Overview Burst Pattern Burst Search The Burst Search settings define when a burst is detected in the evaluated signal A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The blue lines below the trace indicate the detec ted bursts The preview area is not editable directly R amp S FSWP K70 Configuratio
438. p edge 6 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Range Example If you want the to analyze errors greater than 95 you can define the y axis range as 5 and position the y axis to start at 9596 To do so enter the reference value 95 96 and the reference position 096 A EVM Error 1 Clrw 2 Clrw Start 151 0 sym Stop 299 0 sym Fig 8 3 Defining the y axis scaling using a reference point To define the scaling automatically 1 Focus the result window SSS ee a eae User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 228 How to Analyze the Measured Data 2 Select AMPT gt Y Axis Auto Scale The y axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynamically 8 3 1 2 How to Scale Statistics Diagrams Statistic diagrams show the distribution i e probabilities of occurrence of the values as a set of bars You can define the number of bars to be displayed i e the granularity of classifications Additionally you can specify whether absolute or percentage values are displayed For statistics measurements both the x axis and the y axis can be scaled to optimize the display The range of the displayed x axis for statistics diagrams can be defined in the following Ways manually by defining reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results The range of the displayed y axis can be defined in the following ways manually by defining the minimum and maximum value
439. page 185 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth lt FilterLength gt This command defines the length of the equalizer in terms of symbols Setting parameters lt FilterLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 256 RST 10 Default unit SYM Example DDEM EQU LENG 101 Sets the equalizer length to 101 symbols Configuring VSA Manual operation See Filter Length on page 183 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD Name This command selects a user defined equalizer The equalizer mode is automatically switched to USER see SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 327 Setting parameters Name string Path and file name without extension Example DDEM EQU LOAD D MMyEqualizer Selects equalizer named MyEqualizer in directory D Manual operation See Store Load Current Equalizer on page 183 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE Mode Switches between the equalizer modes For details see chapter 4 4 6 The Equalizer on page 103 Setting parameters Mode NORMal Switches the equalizer on for the next sweep TRACking Switches the equalizer on the results of the equalizer in the pre vious sweep are considered to calculate the new filter FREeze The filter is no longer changed the current equalizer values are used for subsequent sweeps USER A user defined equalizer loaded from a file is used AVERaging Switches the equalizer on the results of the equalizer in all pre vious sweeps sin
440. pecific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement application 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display Channel bar information In VSA application the R amp S FSWP shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in VSA application Ref Level Reference level Offset Reference level offset if not 0 Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Std Selected measurement standard or modulation type if no standard selected Res Len Result Length Cap Len Capture Length instead of result length for capture buffer display see Capture Length Settings on page 160 SR Symbol Rate Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Input Input type of the signal source see chapter 5 5 1 Input Settings on page 145 Burst Burst search active see Enabling Burst Searches on page 169 Pattern Pattern search active see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 171 Stat Count Statistics count for averaging and other statistical operations see Statis tic Count on page 167 cannot be edited directly mu CPC I RN aa User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 13 Understanding the Display Information Capt Count Capture count the current number of captures performed if several cap tures are necessary to obtain the number of results defined by Statistics Count
441. pend on the used modulation Demodulation amp Measurement Filter e p Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Compensate for I Q Offset I Q Imbalance Amplitude Droop Symbol Rate Error Channel Equalizer Mode Filter Length Reset Equalizer Preview Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 0 002 Stop 0 002 Fig 5 3 Demodulation settings for PSK MSK and QAM modulation User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 180 R amp S9FSWP K70 Configuration Demodulation amp Measurement Filter e E m Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter LS Compensate for Carrier Frequency Drift FSK Deviation Error Symbol Rate Error Equalizer State Mode Filter Length Reset Equalizer Preview Preview Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 21 888 MHz Stop 21 888 MHz Fig 5 4 Demodulation settings for FSK modulation rrr re EN CO Co Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Thus these distortions are not shown in the calculated error values Note Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM val ues e UO Offset default on User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 181 Demodulation Settings UO Imbalance Amplitude Droop default on Symbol Rate Error required to display the SRE in the Result Summary Channel default on Note that
442. plication should show good measurement results Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 20 4dB Freq 1 0GHz Cap Len 1500 BURST PATTERN A EVM 1 Clrw B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance ESTAT ROA WAE AAN EU Power MN Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw D Symbol Table H Start 0 sym Fig 9 7 Default display configuration for GSM 8PSK EDGE 8 In window 3 you see the currently evaluated burst marked with a green bar To include more bursts in the display you need to increase the capture length a Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Overview softkey b Select Signal Capture C Increase the Capture Length e g to 10000 symbols In the preview area of the dialog box you see that more bursts are now contained in the capture buffer They are all marked with a green bar meaning that they are all evaluated User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 244 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples Mag CapBuf Stop 10000 sym Fig 9 8 Preview of capture buffer 9 3 3 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer This example describes how to navigate through the capture buffer for a continuous signal This navigation feature is especially important for bursted signals Therefore we provide a further navigation example for the GSM EDGE signal 1 In order to see more details in the capture buffer close window 4 a Press the Display Config softkey or the
443. ported capture buffer range begins Header section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace Meas Result IQ Result type Meas Signal Meas Data source measurement or reference data Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 800 Data section for individual trace Number of measurement points 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Raten Measured values x value lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2 gt is only available with detector AUTOPEAK and contains the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Header section for individual trace Trace 2 Next trace in same window Meas Result IQ Result type Known Data File Syntax Description File contents Meas Signal Meas Description Data source measurement or reference data Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 800 Number of measurement points Data section for individual trace Header section for individual window Screen 2 Name of next window Header section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace
444. ption R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics The figure 4 42 provides an overview of the demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option The function blocks of the signal processing kernel can be found at the left in grey and their appropriate settings at the right in blue A more detailed description of the most important stages is given in the following sec tions Burst Search In this stage the capture buffer is searched for bursts that comply with the signal description The search itself can be switched on or off via the Burst Search dialog see Enabling Burst Searches on page 169 A list of the detected bursts is passed on to the next processing stage UO Pattern Search The I Q Pattern Search is performed on the capture buffer This means the VSA application modulates the selected pattern according to the transmit filter Tx filter and the modulation scheme Subsequently it searches the capture buffer for this UO pat tern i e the UO waveform of the pattern It is assumed that patterns can only appear within bursts i e the I Q pattern search range is limited to the bursts detected by the burst search stage If the burst search is switched off the whole capture buffer is searched for the UO pattern A list of all detected UO patterns is passed on to the next processing stage It is important to note that the VSA application can only search for one pattern at a time The pattern search can be switched
445. puejs Jopjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings e gejieAe s uuo ous e Jo SWEU pJepueis OU WO SJOYIP 11 eeu pepiwoJd si spueuJuoo ejouieiJ 104 1ejeureJed Le eu x 191092 ROOM IN Gig yoo 8 7982 Z 01jsung 0482 G0 MSINS ZHN L SIE enig yaque9 SUON IN Sug yoo GL6LOL Z 0 Jung Sach G0 SIE ZHN L SIE enig Jee ZEN IN uer uoo g 9 Z 01jsung 99 G0 SIE ZHN L SIE enig ujoojenig zZ eseud oDuei 4271 Jenuepsy Sc Ody MSdOQH jnseJ eupue eunjdeo WEI S 3NON ZH 9 MSdv Zd OOdV JejnBuejoas zZ eseud oDueiJ 19 Ndo Sc Ody WOH jnsai esque u 9 Asung 894 H S ZOOdV ZH 9 MSdv Zd OOdV JeijnBueyoes Ver W49 HUN Way S Jamde ooz GZOOdV ZH 8v MSdv O ScOOdV uer 3NON GZOOdV wen 5 eunjdeo ooz co OH ZHX8 v MSdOG FL O STOOdV GZOOdV Je SEO ISI 01 eJc LOL ye esoneH XI SdO AIA XI aandeo 008 000Z VINGO ZHIN 8822 L 1esgo 0002 viNdO ams X Jo Spo L MeCVINGO ISI 01 GM a913 Ver aMd XL d MeVWOD ama x eunjdeo 008 E 000Z VINGO ZHIN 8822 L ASdO 0002VvINdQO VINGO Jay J Seo N abuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sung Jet 9je1 Bug dem 1d9S uonenjeA3 jueuiuBi v ynsesy UuJ9jjed 10 u2ue9S 104 uoJeas l1g eudiv juusueJ joquiAs uone npoIN puepuejs Jopjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings e ge ieAe s WO4 ous e Jo euleu pJepueis OU WO sJeyllp 11 eSeuw pepiwoJd si sp
446. quency of the measurement reference signal are filtered In many applications the measurement filter is identical to the receive filter The receive filter also referred to as an SI filter is configured internally depending on the transmit filter The goal is to produce intersymbol interference free points for the demodulation User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 62 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing The reference filter synthesizes the ideal transmitted signal after meas filtering It is calculated by the analyzer from the above filters convolution operation transmit filter meas filter Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in table 1 4 they can be set in the VSA application using Meas filter AUTO see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 188 If RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and Gaussian filters are used the Alpha RC RRC filters or BT Gaussian fil ters parameters must be set in addition to the filter characteristic roll off factor Typi cally the Alpha BT value of the measurement filter should be the same as that of the transmission filter 4 1 4 Measurement Filters The measurement filter can be used to filter the following two signals in the same way e the measurement signal after coarse frequency phase and timing synchronization have been achieved e the reference signal i e the UO symbols that have been determined in the demodu la
447. queue can be queried via IEC bus In this section only the status registers bits specific to the VSA application are descri bed For details on the common R amp S FSWP status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSWP User Manual o RST does not influence the status registers Description of the Status Registers In addition to the registers provided by the base system the following registers are used in the VSA application STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt provides information on any limit violations that occur after demodulation in one of the 4 windows STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM limit violations in EVM evalua tion STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude limit violations in Mag nitude Error evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency limit violations in Car rier Frequency evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK limit violations in FSK evalua tion Status Reporting System e g bit 11 sums up the information for all STATus
448. quipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 6565 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 R amp S FSWP K70 Contents Contents MES ooo ee eee ee eee eee eee 7 Li About this Manual 5 niece niei cri i innert conaeceeessanedaneessesecreeaseeeeceiis 7 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeee eene eene nnn nnne nenne nnne nnn nennen nnn nnns 8 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene nennen 9 2 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application
449. r functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 347 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 347 Couple Windows If enabled markers in all diagrams with the same x axis time or symbols have cou pled x values except for capture buffer display i e if you move the marker in one dia gram it is moved in all coupled diagrams Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 347 Marker Search Settings Access Overview Analysis Marker Search Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings 6 3 3 Markers Markers Search Peak Search NextPeakMode teft Real Imag Plot Search Mode for Next Peak 200 Feu IMa OU CT 200 Search Limits Lem el EE 200 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 11 7 2 2 Marker Search and Positioning Settings on page 350 Real Imag Plot Defi
450. r symbol manually The available values depend on the source type 21 only the symbol time instants are displayed 2 4 8 16 more points are displayed than symbols 32 Capture Oversampling the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture set tings are displayed see Sample Rate on page 161 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue on page 377 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 376 Oversampling Defines the sample basis for statistical evaluation This setting is only available for the result type transformation Statistics R amp S FSWP K70 Analysis MultiView SS Spectrum gt VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 10dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 148 Stat Count 1 YIG Bypass BURST PATTERN 1 FreqAbs Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 0 sym 148 sym 3 Stat FreqAbs Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 2M Clrw 9Stat FregAbs Meas amp Ref 2M Clrw 101 562 kHz 101 562 kHz 101 562 kHz 101 562 kHz TT Fig 6 1 Statistics measurement window 1 measured signal symbols highlighted window 3 sta tistics for symbol instants only window 4 statistics for all trace points Symbols only Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only See window 3 in figure 6 1 Infinite Statistics are calculated for all trace points symbol instants and inter mediate times See window 4 in figure 6 1 Auto Oversampling is automatically set to Symbols only Statistics are cal
451. r the symbol rate error in the Demodulation dialog i Hard to find the origin of the problem It might be that Your DUT suffers from massive impairments Your DUT suffers from a severe symbol rate error The adjacent channel power is very high no From 1 no Explanation of Error Messages Is your signal bursted yes Does your signal contain pattern S this pattern relevant e g to align your result to the pattern or to check whether the pattern is transmitted correctly Does your signal consist of ranges with different modulation types no omm Make sure your Signal Type in the Signal Description dialog is a Burst Signal Make sure the burst search is switched on in the Burst Search dialog Is Burst Not Found displayed in the status bar Make sure your Result Range Alignment reference is Burst Range Settings dialog EDGE MSR arsi pattern coni 0 05 Make sure the pattern is indicated in the Signal Description dialog se the Offset and Result Length parameters in the Result Range dialog to move your result range to the desired point in the capture buffer Make sure the pattern search is switched on o you see a Pattern Not Found Message se an external trigger and
452. r the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 278 Be Deel ee EE 365 LAYout GATalog WINDOW I tee eit eec ee oett coe c Ego aaran iisa 367 Ree Oe Elle 367 LAY oubREMevVep WINDOW EE 367 LAYoutREPLace WINDOW io iratos eire eyed eec iaia EES 368 Beie E 368 LAYOout WINDOWS A gt ADDI TE 370 Bee uk ele CT 370 LAYO WINDOW SNS REMOVWV6 2 9 oreet d a esa tora peu cua e ave n Ped vao re Ua kae v P LE Toa aT e vow a au v 370 LAY Ut WINDOW A gt RED ace eene nennen nnn nnns enne nn arenae nin 371 wife ists DOW M gt TY PEZ E 371 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative
453. r user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export on page 211 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix n is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSWP User Manual Parameters 1 Status Reporting System lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export on page 211 11 11 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error
454. ready available in the R amp S FSWP Newly created patterns can also be added to the list 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the result range and aims to make the correct symbol deci sions The algorithm is illustrated in figure 4 45 using the example of a QPSK modula tion After timing and scaling recovery a frequency offset and phase offset estimator is employed After this coarse synchronization the VSA application makes symbol decisions i e recovers which symbols were transmitted by the device under test DUT Typically the employed estimators are non data aided NDA estimators This means that they operate on an unknown data sequence Since the local oscillators LO of the transmitter device under test and the receiver R amp S FSWP are normally not coupled User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 97 Overview of the Demodulation Process their phase offset with respect to each other is unknown The unknown transmission delay between DUT and R amp S FSWP adds a further unknown phase offset Due to this unknown phase offset the result of the demodulation can be ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position because of the rotational symmetry of e g a PSK constellation For example in the case of non differential QPSK modulation the measurement signal the reference signal and the decided I Q symbols may have a constant phase offset of 0 11 2 rr or 317 2 This offset can only be detected
455. rement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but o can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the UO plane in this case you might notice uncriti cal spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero is of limited significance but still influences the result of the instantaneous fre quency measurement 1 FreqAbs CaptureBuffer 1 Clrw 0 sym Fig 3 8 Result display Frequency Absolute SSS RN UU User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 31 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 12 Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 382 chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 Frequency Relative The instantaneous frequency of the signal source The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals FREQ ugs ZMEAS 2 z dt with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined b
456. rent Sequences number of unique sequences detected in the measured data e Last New Sequence Found time that has passed since the most recent unique sequence was detected e Throughput current data processing speed of the tool Note that while the tool is running the R amp S FSWP is set to remote mode i e the manual interface is not available As soon as the tool is closed the remote mode is automatically deactivated 5 When all known possible sequences have been detected or when a significantly large amount of time has passed so as to assume no more sequences will be detected stop the tool by selecting Stop 6 e Ifthe results are acceptable select Store for K70 to store a valid xml file with the recorded data sequences on the instrument A file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage loca tion and file name You can also add an optional comment to the file e Otherwise reset the tool to start a new recording possibly after changing the demodulation settings or input data 7 Close the tool window to return to normal operation of the VSA application The created xml file can now be loaded in the VSA application as described in chap ter 8 2 3 1 How to Load Known Data Files on page 223 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range You can define which part of the source signal is analyzed Result Range with refer ence to the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern For detail
457. requency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 372 CALC FORM MAGN to define the magnitude result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 384 3 2 4 Constellation Frequency The instantaneous frequency of the source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 24 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 9 907 MHz Fig 3 2 Result display Constellation Frequency Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM CONF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 383 3 2 5 Constellation UO The complex source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the de rotated symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 25 R amp S9FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 6
458. rigger bandwidth corresponds to the Usable UO Bandwidth setting for data acquisition see Usable UO Bandwidth on page 161 Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 312 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 311 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 312 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 311 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement The time may be entered in s or in symbols Signal Capture offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for zero span e g UO Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the measurement time pretrigger max measurement time Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 310 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuen
459. rn Search and Limit Check on page 417 Manual operation See Edit on page 174 See New on page 174 See Comment on page 177 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY Pattern This command copies a pattern file The pattern to be copied must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 320 Tip In manual operation a pattern can be copied in the editor by storing it under a new name Setting parameters Pattern string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC COPY GSM PATT Copies GSM TSCO to GSM PATT Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save As on page 174 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete This command deletes a sync sequence The sync sequence to be deleted must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 320 Usage Event Manual operation See Delete on page 175 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA lt Data gt This command defines the sync sequence of a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 320 Important The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation e g for an 8PSK modulation the value range is from 0 to 7 The degree of modulation belongs to the pattern and is set using the DDEM SEAR SYNC NST command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 320
460. ror vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet on page 325 Measurement Filter Settings Access Overview Meas Filter The measurement filter can be used to filter both the measured signal and the refer ence signal and thus the error vector You can configure the measurement filter to be used For more information on measurement filters see chapter 4 1 4 Measurement Filters on page 63 A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly R amp S FSWP K70 Configuration Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Measurement Filter Auto according to Transmit Filter Type Alpha BT Preview Preview Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 2 794 Stop 2 794 L Load User Eiter 189 EX 0 EE 189 Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto If the Auto option is enabled the measurement filter is defined automatically depend ing on the transmit filter specified in the Modulation settings see Transmit Filter Type on page 141 Note If a user defined transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO on page
461. rune casei erede odia EEN 287 SENSe IDDEMOd OPSKFORMMOl eret e etd o neu cipe eno dE RE aene eR RM RED AER 287 SENSE DDEMO SRA TO ni roe rta ce e Eger ta poete eie opaca o stueteeetstnee rec MERE Deus 288 ISENSe IDDEMod kat E e E 288 SENSe IDBEMod T EIBter NAME 2 12 22 cbs 12 priore cerro puc e cav aeu rc zx evene ER apex Gp E PBa Pr eu rin 288 SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe eerte tette ttt 289 SENSe JDDEMod TFIbler USE Rete e bes die Eruca toe taa ut erret opea inre EEN EES 289 SENSE DDEMOJ USER NAME 2 52 32 15 ftre a Pa Epp bc P cR kac rcuzR ag Dry y PS EE YE ES 289 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative FSKRefDev This command defines the deviation to the reference frequency for FSK modulation as a multiple of the symbol rate For details see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 140 Setting parameters lt FSKRefDev gt numeric value Range 0 1 to 15 RST 1 Default unit NONE Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 140 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue lt FSKRefDevAbsRes gt This command defines the deviation to the reference frequency for FSK modulation as an absolute value in Hz Setting parameters lt FSKRefDevAbsRes gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 64e9 RST 100e3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 140 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod APSK NSTate l
462. s it is usually rec ommendable to enable the equalizer once you have analyzed the original input signal on the R amp S FSWP By default the error results are calculated using the compensated values if the equalizer is enabled However you can disable the compensation for channel results in order to analyze the actual error values obtained from the distorted channel Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors This section describes the signal and error models used within the VSA application The estimation algorithms used to quantify specific modulation errors are then outlined The descriptions vary depending on the modulation type e PSK QAM and MSK Modulation rte pete iet cette AAA 106 ee d EE 117 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation Error Model i cos aprrtephL arb H Modulated Baseband RF Signal Inputs Amplitude Quadrature Inbalance Offset Lis Offset Distorsion Noise Fig 4 50 Modelling Modulation Errors Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The measured signal model for PSK QAM and MSK modulation is shown in fig ure 4 50 and can be expressed as MEAS t REF C cec j eo REF C c c lei Jel Catto a where REF t and REF t the inphase and quadrature component of the reference signal g and ga the effects of the gain imbalance c and cq the effects of an UO offset D the quadrature error a the amplitude droop fo the carrier frequency offset Q t
463. s mei ASNO 3903 wy eric o wayed srl 30d3 wvoze pezueeur zHM c amp 0 2 Weer OZE 3903 soy seo abuey y 6us UuJ9jjed sung Jet 9je1 Budde s Idd uonenjeag 3ueuiuBi v ynsey uleyged J40juojeesS Jojuojeeg 1g eudiv gusueJ joquiAg uonejnpo piepuejs JopJoJ Predefined Standards and Settings e ge ieAe s WIO ous e Jo euleu pJepueis OU WO sJeyllp 11 eeuw pepiwoJd si spueuJuJoo ejouieJ Jo 1ejeuleJed Le eu x L V NOM 9 AM4 VIN doM 9 Ven OH VWGOM v E eymdeo 008 eco OH ZHN v8 SdO NGOM 9 dd9 NMOGO N V411 E yullumoq ee S vVHl3l OH VMI3L snonugu vz 0 0 sng EE 3 vHlal Gen OH ZH 8L MSdOG vr i 00 VYLSL INAOOO _ N vil CS VHl3l yullumoq Jejuo Ou Vaal snonunuoo Vv 0 0 sng EI LS vHl3l Gen OH ZH 8L MSdOG v i SI VULSL VH o4 LOSL Wetz HSH 3904 esna 9pIM C MSH 3903 esingepiM mue 00S1 Weg adeys esind 3903 usu wv S 7A4L v Oorueped ZL YSH 3903 Spuk 3903 ZH SZE INvVOZ v 1i Oze 3903 ME asing LOSL WvOZ MOJIEN HSH 3903 YSH 3903 esind E edeus MOJIEN jeje me Wope asind wo 3903 usu wv S 7A4L v o USngd ZZ YSH 3904 eN 3903 ZH SZE INvOZ v 1i Oze 3903 Joy 4 seaw Buidde y 1d9S abuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sung Jet 9je1 uonenjeA3 jueuiuBi v yns y uled 10 u2ue9S 104 YOIeaS l1g eudiv pylusuely joquiAs uone npo N pue
464. s no trigger settings are available in the R amp S FSWP VSA applica tion in MSRA operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA Master to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis See Capture Offset For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSWP MSRA User Manual Nolet SOWIE P 163 MAT Ir CN S TIT 163 M 30 xr TNNT 163 M zi ANM UU nr 164 EU cil em 164 Tagger Levele H 164 MSG GST OS ER 164 FRY SUGROS US e 165 Drop OUt TIME E E 165 e EE 165 Tigger THOM ON EP 165 Capture en EE 165 Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 312 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely In its default state the R amp S FSWP performs free run measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 312 Ext Trigger 1 2 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger l
465. s can be configured and new patterns can be defined Manual configuration of bursts and patterns is described in chapter 5 7 Burst and Pat tern Configuration on page 168 DEB BUSES EET TERR 315 Patten Searches uei Ie ERI ER DEB E A eta 316 e Configuring P E 318 11 5 6 1 Configuring VSA Burst Search The burst search commands define when a burst is detected in the analyzed signal SENSe IDDEMod SEARcCh BURSEAUTOL iiie naii putre ek EENE cpm pe 315 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt CONFigure AUTO essen nnne 315 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURStGLENgth MINIMUM ntn 315 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSENIODE 1 EX aaa naa aA a Ea 315 SENSe DDEMoc SEARCH BURSESTAT Ge dees treads caer aaa aE Eed Add AEN 316 SENSe DDEM d SEARGA BURS TOLErANCE cininu aai 316 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO lt AutoBurstSearch gt This command links the burst search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as bursted burst search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoBurstSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Enabling Burst Searches on page 169 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the search tolerance and the min gap length to their default values Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Burst Configuration on page 170 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt GLENgth
466. s function is only available for the MSRA Master Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 298 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Access AMPT gt Amplitude Config Amplitude and scaling settings allow you to configure the vertical y axis display and for some result displays also the horizontal x axis e AMPINUDS SSN ee rere Ere ritate ri cea ti noe aret beds 151 SCI RP nies 155 AEST 158 Amplitude Settings Access AMPT gt Amplitude Config Amplitude settings affect the signal power or error levels Input Output and Frontend Settings VSA 3 Spectrum m Amplitude Scale Unit Reference Level Input Settings Input Coupling Value 0 0 dBm Offset 0 0 dB Auto Level Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Nn Value Mode Value Note that amplitude settings are not window specific as opposed to the scaling and unit settings Reference LOvel 152 L Shifting the Display Offset scnis ipa aani 152 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 153 leri ug c 153 Mu uc EE 153 Bd niv lp MI PR RIT 153 FF E Le EN 154 L Attenuation Mode Value tenete tnnt A tenant tnn 154 Using Electronic G tenaten ue cssc eeen incest etate tegunt cua E pn nena a E En ne ENEE 154 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Sign
467. s in the R amp S FSWP Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the VSA Application The VSA application adds a new application to the R amp S FSWP To activate the VSA application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSWP Understanding the Display Information 2 Select the VSA item em LE VSA The R amp S FSWP opens a new measurement channel for the VSA application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the VSA Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 3 Configuration Overview on page 135 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently acti
468. s measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSWP User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 166 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement For a statistics count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of mea surements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 166 Performing a Measurement INITiate REFMeas Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patter
469. s on the functions see chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 177 1 In the Overview select Range Settings 2 Select the Result Range tab 3 Define the Result Length i e the number of symbols from the result that are to be analyzed Note that when you use Known Data files as a reference the Result Length specified here must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element See chapter 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions on page 129 4 Define the Reference for the result range i e the source to which the result will be aligned The reference can be the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern How to Analyze the Measured Data 5 Define the Alignment of the result range to the reference source i e whether the result starts at the beginning of the reference source ends with the reference source or is centered with the reference source 6 Optionally define an offset of the result range to the reference source e g to ignore the first few symbols of the captured data 7 Optionally define the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the ref erence source to change the scaling of the x axis This offset is added to the one defined for the signal description Example Defining the result range In figure 8 2 a result range will be defined for the first 100 symbols of the capture buf fer startin
470. s referrred to as the useful part The minimum length of the useful part Min Length Run In Run Out must be 210 Remote commands A remote command is provided to determine the position of the current result range within the capture buffer SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst STARt on page 381 Evaluation Range In some scenarios the result range contains symbols that are not supposed to be con sidered for the EVM or other calculated parameters that are displayed in the Result Summary R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range See also chapter 9 3 5 Setting the Evaluation Range on page 247 The evaluation range is always equal to or smaller than the result range and defines The range over which traces that do not have a time axis are displayed e g polar diagrams The range over which the following parameters are calculated for the Result Sum mary EVM MER Phase Error Magnitude Error Power Evaluation range display In all displays over time except for capture buffer displays the evaluation range is indi cated by red lines D MagAbs MeastRef t ii on dp dB Start 26 sym i i Stop 174 sym Fig 4 66 Evaluation lines in absolute magnitude diagram
471. s to be displayed automatically according to the current results After changing the scaling you can restore the default settings To define the number of bars 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT XScale Config X Axis Quantize 3 Enter the number of bars to be displayed The diagram is adapted to display the specified number of bars To define the x axis scaling manually using a reference point and divisions With this method you define a reference value on the x axis to be displayed at the Ref Position of the y axis The reference value is determined internally according to the displayed data and cannot be changed The beginning of the diagram is at the position 096 the end is at 10096 Additionally you define the range to be displayed in each of the 10 divisions of the display which determines the total range to be displayed on the x axis 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt Scale Config gt Reference Value 3 Enter a reference value on the x axis in the current unit 4 Define the range to be displayed per division total range 10 The x axis is adapted so that it displays the defined range with the reference value at the specified position R amp S FSWP K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis Example If you want to analyze the probabilities of occurrence for errors greater than 95 enter the reference value 95 l I Start 95 0 Stop 100 0 Fig 8 4 Defining
472. se data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In VSA the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description m 1 4 Marker n 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 6 Trace 11 3 Activating Vector Signal Analysis Vector signal analysis requires a special application on the R amp S FSWP A measure ment is started immediately with the default settings INS TEE te Eessen tee tma vare ta xen t nra dex needed 276 INSTr ument CREate NEW Jinani tra acto cms ia re Sur Tae a A2 Do NEEN 276 INSTrument GREate REPL acGe iicet ran ananas nk amaR ERO n Ane aM ENEE KSE ioa 276 INS Wie EU te uer ci nazsdec aaa ehe oet oa etu tr e ER SOR eoa eto a aaraa i pn eRT 277 INS froment UST ensena ecaa deed 277 Activating Vector Signal Analysis EEN Tiet et E ETE CLE 278 INS Tren SEE WEE 278 SYSTem PRES6t CHANN EvtECutel cence keanaan nnns 278 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measureme
473. seband FSK signal generation 4 5 2 1 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Reference Deviation The transmitted symbols s are assumed to be chosen from a finite and real valued constellation of M values ec gy The maximum absolute constellation point is denoted by cy4x The maximum phase contribution of a data symbol is given by Pmax 72 2 Cua s at The reference deviation of the FSK signal is defined as duu _ 1 f A rer ERR ph smx et In the VSA application the frequency pulse filter is normalized such that IT sta 1 The constellation for M FSK is assumed to be 1 3 M 1 which implies Gmax M 1 The expression for the reference deviation in terms of the modulation index is therefore given by 1 A per Ty UD foo The above formula provides the necessary calculation for measurement of an FSK sig nal with known symbol rate and modulation index Calculation examples The GSM standard describes the transmission of binary data using MSK i e 2FSK modulation with a modulation index of h 1 2 at a symbol rate of 270 8333 KHz The reference deviation is therefore given by 1 1 Meer Ty B 2 1 270 8333 kHz 67 7083 kHz The APCO Project 25 standard phase 2 defines a H CPM signal i e 4AFSK with a modulation index of h 1 3 and a symbol rate of 6 KHz The reference deviation is Aap B H 4 1 6 kHz 3 kHz Error Model The FSK measurement model used assumes that s
474. see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 to define the symbol format TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 4 Symbols on page 383 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 55 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 33 Vector Frequency The instantenous frequency of the source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 are drawn and connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 3 Vector Freq Meas amp Ref 1M ClrW Fig 3 23 Result display for Vector Frequency Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM COVF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 383 3 2 34 Vector UO The complex source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the dis play points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 are drawn and connected The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale leve
475. settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available Configuration According to Digital Standards To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSWP User Manual Comment Digital Standards An optional description for the data file A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent on page 280 Load Standard Digital Standards Loads the selected measurement settings file Note When you load a standard the usage of a known data file if available is auto matically deactivated Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard on page 279 Save Standard Digital Standards Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 280 Delete Standard Digital Standards Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stand ard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at
476. splayed 12 Press the RUN SINGLE key to stop the continuous sweep and start a new sweep with the new configuration The measured data is stored in the capture buffer and can be analyzed see chap ter 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data on page 226 How to Select User Defined Filters The most frequently required measurement and TX filters required for vector signal analysis according to digital standards are provided by the R amp S FSWP VSA applica tion However you can also load user defined filters To load a user measurement filter 1 In the Overview select the Meas Filter button 2 In the Meas Filter tab of the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog box select Type User 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick To load a user transmit TX filter 1 In the Overview select the Signal Description button 2 In the Modulation tab of the Signal Description dialog box select Transmit Fil ter Type User 3 Select Load User Filter 5 Load your vaf file from the USB stick How to Perform Pattern Searches To configure a pattern search 1 In the Overview select Signal Description 2 Select the Signal Structure tab How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 3 Select the Burst Signal signal type 4 Enable the Pattern option 5 From the Name selection list select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard
477. standard APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard CDMA2000 1X Forward Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X forward link http www 3gpp2 org Public html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 CDMA2000 1X Reverse Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X reverse link http www 3gpp2 org Public_html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period None No filter is used USER User defined filter Define the filter using the SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER command A 3 2 Measurement Filters Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters The most frequently required measurement filters are predefined in the VSA applica tion Table 1 3 Overview of predefined measurement filters EDGE NSR Measurement filter required for the EDGE Normal Symbol Rate standard see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 6 Modulation Accuracy The resulting system is NOT inter symbol interfer ence free EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Narrow Pulse standard EDGE HSR Wide Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Wide Pulse standard Gauss Classic Gauss filter with an adjustable BT Low ISI Meas Filter Measurement filter implemented to retain a
478. sult Type reete es me ERE XY HL E RE ERR 206 Result Type Transiormaton eene enne 206 Display and Window Configuration Highligh SYMONS PE 206 Display TEE DE 207 OVERS UII E XX X 207 Signal Source Data source as selected in the Display Configuration see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 If you change the signal source setting here the default result type for the new data source is activated for the current window Remote command LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 Result Type The result type defines the evaluation method used in the current window The available result types in VSA are described in chapter 3 2 Result Types in VSA on page 19 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 Result Type Transformation For certain result types it is not only possible to see the common over time represen tation of the measurement but also the spectrum or the statistics in form of a histo gram These are the transformations of the results These settings are not available for symbol evaluation i e the following signal sources e Symbols Modulation Accuracy Equalizer Normal Evaluation in time domain X axis displays time values Spectrum Evaluation in frequency domain X axis displays frequency values The usable UO bandwidth is indica ted in the display Statistics Statistical evaluation histogram X
479. sure the syntax of your file is valid Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences 1 Import or apply input data for which stable demodulation results are available to the VSA application If necessary adapt the demodulation settings until the requested results are obtained 2 Start the R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences from the Windows task bar on the R amp S FSWP or execute the file RecordingToolforSequences EXE from the installation directory on the instrument The R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences window is displayed R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences E HR M Configuration VISA TCPIP localhost Results Analyzed Sequences 33 Modulation PSK Format NORM Order 8 ResultLength 148 Different Sequences 83 Last New Sequence Found s ago Throughput 0 72 kSymbols s Store for K70 Run Stop Reset 3 Start a measurement in the VSA application 4 Inthe tool window select Run The tool records the demodulated data sequences The following result information is provided by the tool during recording e Analyzed Sequences number of data sequences analyzed since the tool was started How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements e Diffe
480. t Scale Config Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling func tions are available to adapt the result display to the current data D Note that scaling settings are window specific as opposed to the amplitude settings Amplitude Scale Unit YScale XScale Automatic grid scaling Automatic grid scaling Adjust Settings Scaling according to min and max values Automatic grid scaling All Axes Default Settings Quantize Scaling according to reference and per div Scaling according to reference and per div Ref Value Ref Value 10 0 dBm Ref Position Ref Position Per Division Per Division Fig 5 2 Scaling settings for statistical evaluation For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 228 A visualization of the diagram scaling with the current settings is displayed at the right side of the dialog box Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window sss 156 Defining Min and Max Values eene nennen snnt 156 Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions eese enne 156 L Y Axis Reference Valte enteras rarn R 156 L Y Axis Reference Poeitlon 156 L Range per DUI RID oit etl etur basia eeben 157 PO vcl M 157 DESEN 157 air CIE re MINNIE ET ONT 157 EE 157 Input Output and Frontend Settings L
481. t MAC Curacy PERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy RHO CURRent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN RESulIt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy RHO PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt RESUIt This command queries whether the limit for the specified result type and limit type was violated For details on result types and limit types see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 396 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results Suffix lt ResultType gt CFERror EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor OOFFset PERRor RHO CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only FERRor Frequency error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset UO Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho lt LimitType gt CURRent MEAN PEAK PCURRent PMEan PPEak RCURRent RMEan RPEak For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value Return values lt LimitResult gt NONE PASS FAIL MARGIN
482. t Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements R amp S9FSWP K70 Remote Commands for VSA Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 165 11 7 5 Zooming into the Display 11 7 5 1 Using the Single Zoom BISPlay WINBewsns EZODNEPAREA ces ropes airo ora doe eo eter arte teet ta erre utentes 362 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM STATe esses a aE inane nenas esae nn nennen 362 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm EU CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt
483. t APSKNstate gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for APSK The following APSK demodulation modes are possible DDEMod APSK NSTate 16 16APSK 32 32APSK Setting parameters lt APSKNstate gt numeric value RST 16 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 139 SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate lt ASKNstate gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for ASK The following ASK demodulation modes are possible DDEMod ASK NSTate 2 OOK 4 4ASK Setting parameters lt ASKNstate gt numeric value RST 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 139 SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters MeasFiltAlphaBT numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe lt MeasFilterState gt This command defines whether the input signal that is evaluated is filtered by the mea surement filter This command has no effect on the transmit filter Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 ON SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is activated OFF The input signal is not filtered SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is deactivated RST 1 SENSe DDEMod FORMat Group This command selects the digital demodulation mode Setting parameters Group Example Example Example Manual operation Configuring V
484. t TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 297 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 1 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent 5 5 2 2 5 5 2 3 5 5 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 297 DC Power Output Configuration The configuration of the DC Power supply is the same as in the Phase Noise applica tion For a comprehensive description please refer to the R amp S FSWP User Manual Signal Source Output Configuration The configuration of the optional signal source is the same as in the Phase Noise application For a comprehensive description please refer to the R amp S FSWP User Manual Frequency Settings Access FREQ gt Frequency Config Stepsize Frequent ffset Value 0 0 Hz Center fregueliby easet Merida see euer E ated de eve dde re etnies 150 Center Frequency Gtepelze A 151 disons AME 151 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 spanmin 2 lt foe
485. t TrRefType gt This commands selects the signal to be used as the data source for a trace Suffix lt t gt 1 6 Analysis Setting parameters TrRefType MEAS Measurement signal REF Reference signal RST Depends on the current measurement Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Evaluation on page 195 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Depending on the result display not all trace modes may be available Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSWP saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSWP saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected tra
486. t een nenne DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st X SCALe RVALue esses nennen rennen nennen DlSblavt WiNDow nzTRACect XT SGCALelGTARtd rennen tenetis 379 DISPlay WiINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STOP nennen nnne eren trennen 379 DISPlay WiNDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFF Set nennen rennen 323 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t Y SPAGCing corn rentrer nt ner nre 307 RUE SEVEN Ou RRE EN d Re RE 206 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE cee cece cee eee eens tense seeeeeeeseeeesseeteeeetenees 336 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL esses 336 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DiSblavfWiN Dow cnzTR ACect lSCALelbRlEVel netten 299 DiSblavfWiN Dow cnzTR ACectvlSCALelbRlEvelOktz et ee 299 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition esses eene 306 DiSblavf WiN Dow nzTR ACectlSCALelbRVAlue ener enne 307 DISPlay WINDowsrn RACs S TATe orsi entren rre tte eub rare orbe bero on cae ne 346 DISPlay WINDow n 2 ZOOM AREA DlSblavf WiNDow cnzlZOOMMUlLTiplezzoomz AREA tenente nennen nnne nns 363 DlSbPlavWINDow nzt ZOOMMUL Tple zoomGTATe nirearen npara arini iiini ai iiaa 363 DilSblavf WiN Dow cnzlkZO0OMGTATe nennen tener tetekna endi ae n E an
487. te COhttOl s eG ens 309 ibd Trigger level External trigger remote A 311 UO Power remote A 312 IF Power ferriote e cien ee etd 311 Trigger SOUFCB cec terreni terere naa 163 External aseene gedet 163 Free RUM Cid adea cts euet Eo eh crede eie 163 VOA POWER m ds 164 e e 164 Triggers MSRA tee ed Stee cec es tds 163 Troubleshooting BU rSE Search d de Lee e edet pta 252 FIOW Chiart Ae og lee Seele 250 Frequently asked questions sssssssss 261 Inip t overload otro tenent rnnt Patt rmsearch uae Ee t ens Result display Uic x U Units Reference level sessssssesssseseeeeen 152 eom 159 X axis V aXlS scc tides eese coa ice e e deee e 158 ele eessen iix aad le totes c tees t Devas i ded 159 Updating Result display 35 ino eet eee ni 167 Result display remote sssssssssss 341 Upper Level Hysteresis seine ttt notes 192 Usable UO bandwidth Depot 3 ou oi iue eso tera it pee le out 68 Result display cot ttn in 15 161 Useful length cl C M 125 User filters Loading User manuals User QAM Modulation type io rnt ee ti n ek etn co oes 138 User sample rate Definition 2 2 3 retient sna oie ties uen caede 68 V Vector frequency ResulbtyD6 hee oo tom bsec n E debo aded ei ud 56 Vector UO Result type sscan i tot interi OS este id 56 Kl E LE
488. te that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the upper limit for the current peak or mean UO offset Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 200 0 to 0 0 RST 40 0 mean 45 0 Default unit DB CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 359 11 7 4 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean phase error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept iden tical Setting parameters lt LimitValue
489. tenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 154 11 5 2 7 Scaling and Units Useful commands for scaling described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 336 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset on page 323 Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to scaling and units CALCulatesm 5 TATISIIGSIPIRESGL tret et eter rene tet EE e Renta acted 303 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCGE ees iea ciens aar naa soa aad dad anda daa 303 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X BCOunt eee en eene n nnne natn EEN nnn 304 CAL Culate nzSTATletceGCAlevlOwer nennen nnns 304 CAL Culate lt n STAlistics SCALe ET ce oed ete eet pennae inna 304 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT e eeeeeeseeeeise einen nenne nnn nn tena nnn Ea 304 CALCulate n UNIT ANGLe iseeeeeeeeeee ENNEN anna asks ENNEN NENNEN 305 CALOulstesms oc INT UI eiecit ex e teet Geel etr ten lt setis 305 CAL Culatesne2 UNI TIME EE 305 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVISION ccceeeceeee cece ee eaeaeaeeeeeaeenenetenes 305 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RPOSition
490. ter deletion Example Defining a pattern TETRA SA Special Continuous Downlink Burst A Fig 8 1 Pattern definition How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 8 2 2 3 How to Manage Patterns To change the display for the list of patterns 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 To display all available patterns select Show All To display all patterns that are compatible to the defined standard select Show Compatible To display only patterns that contain a specific prefix enter the Prefix in the edit field To edit a predefined pattern 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns Press Edit Pattern o 2 oo w Change the settings as required as described in chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern on page 220 To delete a predefined pattern 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns 4 Press Delete Pattern The pattern is removed from the lists of available and assigned patterns and can
491. the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 In the list of All Patterns select the required pattern If the required pattern is not displayed see To change the display for the list of patterns on page 222 4 Select Add to Standard The selected pattern is inserted in the list of Standard Patterns How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 5 Select the pattern to be used for the pattern search from the list of Standard Pat terns To remove a predefined pattern from a standard 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the pattern from the list of Standard Patterns 4 Select Remove from Standard The pattern is removed from the list of Standard Patterns and is no longer assigned to the current standard but is still available for assignment from the list of All Patterns 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the New button The pattern definition dialog box is displayed 4 Define the following pattern settings Setting Description N
492. the Sym bol Rate is indicated behind the parameter The number of samples to capture per symbol was referred to as the Capture Over sampling value in previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers The resulting sample rate also referred to as the user or output sample rate is the rate at which the UO data is demodulated and analyzed The sample rate also affects the demodulation measurement bandwidth If the bandwidth is too narrow the signal is not displayed completely If the bandwidth is too wide interference from outside the actual signal to be measured can distort the result Thus for signals with a large fre quency spectrum e g FSK modulated signals a higher sample rate may be neces sary For further details see chapter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Process ing on page 60 For an indication of the required sample rate view the Real Imag I Q display of the capture buffer with a Spectrum transformation If the complete signal is displayed within the usable UO bandwidth the selected value is suitable 3 Spec RealImag CaptureBuffer 1 Clrw usable I Q Bandwidth 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz Fig 4 5 Determining the I Q bandwidth Real Imag I Q display of the capture buffer with a spectrum transformation User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 67 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics If the signal is cut off increase the sample rate if it is too small decrease the sample rate by changing
493. the Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings or the Sample Rate parameter in the Data Acquisition settings As described above the sample rate is determined by the number of samples to cap ture per symbol Thus the maximum sample rate depends on the maximum number of symbols to be captured the symbol rate and vice versa The maximum sample rate for the R amp S FSWP is 10 GHz see below Thus the maximum symbol rate is Table 4 1 Maximum symbol rate depending on sample rate parameter Sample rate parameter Max symbol rate 4 symbol rate 2500 MSymbols 8 symbol rate 1250 MSymbols 16 symbol rate 625 MSymbols 32 symbol rate 312 5 MSymbols 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable I Q Bandwidth for RF Input Definitions e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the device connected to the input of the R amp S FSWP e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or output e Usable UO Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSWP Record length Number of UO samples to capture during the specified measure ment time calculated as the measurement time multipli
494. the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM ENABle BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle lt BitDefinition gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part o
495. the detected symbol values x values are not exported with trace data Results MMEM STOR5 TRAC 1 AverageEVM Save the EVM values window 5 to an ascii file Results Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard The following example describes a scenario similar to the one for manual operation described in Note that although this example uses the settings from a predefined digital standard the configuration is changed to demonstrate the possibilities of the VSA application A measurement that is performed strictly according to the standard requires much less programming efforts Programming Examples The rising and falling edges of a GSM burst are analyzed using the following result range settings rent and Evaluation Range Result Range Evaluation Range Length TER 200 sym B 738 462 us Result Range Alignment Reference Capture Ee ities L i Pattern Waveform Alignment on Left Center k Right Offset 10 sym J Symbol Number at Burst Start H sym Visualization RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM VSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named VSA DDEM PRES EDGE NB Loads the GSM EDGE 8PSK standard file and the settings defined there DDEM RLEN 10000 sym ees Defining the result range
496. the x axis scaling using a reference point To define the x axis scaling automatically 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt XScale Config gt Auto Scale The x axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynamically To define the y axis range manually With this method you define the upper and lower limits of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 If the y axis has logarithmic scale the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Min Value 3 Enter the lower limit in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Max Value 5 Enter the upper limit in the current unit The y axis is adapted to display the specified range Probabilities of occurrence located outside the display area are applied to the bars at the left or right borders of the display 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green SS ee ee ae User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 230 R amp S FSW
497. theses The UO pattern is generated inter nally based on the specified symbol number of the pattern and the signal description R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics i e modulation scheme and transmit filter The UO pattern search can also be refer red to as the UO waveform An UO pattern is considered detected if the correlation met ric i e the correlation value between the ideal UO pattern and capture buffer exceeds a specified UO Correlation Threshold see I Q Correlation Threshold on page 171 If the burst search is switched on the UO pattern search only searches the UO pattern in bursts previously detected by the burst search Furthermore it only finds the first UO pattern within each burst If the burst search is switched off the UO pattern search searches for the UO pattern in the entire capture buffer The first detected pattern in the capture buffer for the current pattern search settings is indicated by a green line in the preview area of the Pattern Search configuration dia log box see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 170 Information Selected pattern for Search GSM_TSCO Pattern Found X Preview Preview Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Predefined Patterns Common standards usually have predefined pattern lists with standard specific pat terns Patterns required for the current measurement can be selected from this list This list can be extended by patterns that are al
498. tics SCALe Y UNIT on page 304 For equalizer group delay diagrams CALCulate lt n gt Y UNIT TIME on page 305 5 6 Signal Capture Access Overview gt Signal Capture The Signal Capture settings define how much how and when data is captured from the input signal e Data ACQUISINON EE 159 e Whdgger SODDIDS ecce ege teenage eod pr ECCE Rd t CH Re UR Eon pete e ERR RUND YS ER EUR 161 SWEEP SOMN E 166 5 6 1 Data Acquisition Access Overview gt Signal Capture gt Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how much and how data is captured from the input signal A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly The Data Acquisition settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Signal Capture button from the Overview Select the Signal Capture softkey from the main VSA menu R amp S FSWP K70 Configuration i Data Acquisition Trigger Capture Length Auto 8000 0 sym sm 2 083 ms A Sample Rate 4 Symbol Rate Ss 15 36 MHz Maximum Bandwidth Auto Usable I Q Bandwidth 12 288 MHz Swap I Q Preview Mag CaptureBuffer O sym 8000 sym Capture Length Settings uoce peii terroir tere tutari bak tic RR UL iau 160 elle NEE 161 ee in DEE 161 Swa er 161 Capture Length Settings The capture length def
499. tion Demodulation structure in which the signal is no longer influenced by adjacent symbols at the deci sion instants after signal adapted filtering System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MEAS filter Measurement Filter Weighting filter for the measure ment System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MSK Minimum Shift Keying Modulation mode Minimum Shift Keying MSK NDA Demodulator Non Data Aided Demodulator Demodulation without any knowl edge of the sent data contents Demodulation and Algorithms PSK Phase Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information lies within the phase or within the phase transitions Phase Shift Keying PSK QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted both in the amplitude and phase Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM Predefined Standards and Settings Abbreviation Meaning See section RMS Root Mean Square Averaging RMS Quantities RX filter Receive Filter System Theoretical Modulation Baseband filter in analyzer used and Demodulation Filters for signal adapted filtering Transmit filter Transmitter Filter System Theoretical Modulation Digital impulse shaping filter in and Demodulation Filters signal processing unit of transmit ter VSA Vector Signal Analysis Measurement at complex modula ted RF carriers
500. tion E 137 e Input Output and Frontend Gettngs 145 Signal Capture ERES 159 e Burstand Patten Configuration ccc tette tlt reor ce ee 168 e Result Range Configuratio uot rx extr e e D R 177 e Demodulation SOlllig6 rient nete nt rne foot Ene atr Rene artc LU n bre Cep iud eed ER e 179 5 1 5 2 Restoring Factory Settings for Vector Signal Analysis e Measurement Filter Setllid o der cerei nione E Lens 187 e Evaluation Range Cotfiguralloli mre Ere te Rein 189 e Adjusting Settings Automatically eese nennen 191 Restoring Factory Settings for Vector Signal Analysis Access MEAS Apart from the Preset Channel function see Preset Channel on page 136 the fol lowing functions are available to restore factory settings to the VSA application Restore Factory Settings niim iet c se E RII EE ee E SERERE IEEE da 132 L Restore Standard E 132 L Restore Pattern Eiles 132 Restore Factory Settings Opens a submenu that allows you to restore all standards and pattern settings on the instrument to the values predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Restore Standard Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page
501. tion I Q Meas amp Ref B Data Ne d e E 196 PAG p EE 197 Decimal Sepa e EE 197 Trace sez ie 197 Data Export Mode Defines whether raw UO data as captured or trace data evaluated is stored Remote command FORMat DEXPort MODE on page 380 HJ User Manual 1 177 5685 02 01 196 l 6 3 6 3 1 Markers Header If enabled a header with scaling information etc is included in the file Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 380 Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 380 Trace ASCII Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the traces of the captured data in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Either the traces for the selected window only see Specifics for on page 136 are exported or the traces of all windows are exported one after the other For details on the file format see chapter A 4 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data on page 429 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 380
502. tly active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event Performing a Measurement Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 167 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous State This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuou
503. tomatic scaling of the y axis is performed once in all windows then switched off again Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Scale All on page 192 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSWP performs a measure ment on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 192 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSWP performs a measure ment on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSWP deter mines the length of the measurement Configuring VSA Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSWP determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSWP uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 336 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 191 See Changing the Automatic Measurem
504. tor and have already been filtered with the Transmit filter For FSK the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of the signal not the UO signal For MSK PSK QAM and User QAM the measurement filter filters the real part and imaginary part of these signals i e not the instantaneous frequency or magnitude of the signal The VSA application defines the error signal as the difference between the reference signal and the measurement signal Thus the measurement filter also shapes the spectrum of the error signal which is used to calculate the EVM for example In many applications the measurement filter is the same as the RX filter However unlike the measurement filter the RX filter is not relevant for the measurement but is only required to create the reference signal optimally The RX filter and the transmit filter are usually chosen such that their combination results in an Inter Symbol Interference ISI free system see figure 4 2 and figure 4 3 Set by user 71 Symbols 4 DUT Transmitter Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Auto Auto Function of TX Filter fct CaptureOV sph oe j symbol rate Symbols bits naan Demodulation filter of IQ capture amp symbol with Dp decision IQ Signal REF Signal S H I Correction Parameters w Signal 2 processing correction of t Analyzer estimated as errors
505. ts Result types Modulation Error Ratio MER IST Modulation errors REI Ee FOMU GE PSK QAM MSK Res lt types e anaa Modulation order gene EE 129 Patter symbols eere tn tre ret 177 Modulation type ESI Ux ees 117 MSK Error model zc ctore tt rp Ese 106 Modulation type ue gedd terres 138 MSRA EI 163 MSRA applications Capture offset remote AAA 361 Multi Source Data SOURCE i icti Rer esci tete dese 18 Multiple Measurement channels trenes 12 Multiple ZOOM a ert rtr n etes 209 N Next Minimum oes cocansectacevcsacas asuisin mnanaa i Marker positioning Next Peak ss V Marker positloniDig uui eren te noct eene Noise laum 116 Normalization IR le TE TE 184 O Offset Analysis Interval zer oe aus retento sit teen 165 EVM m Frequency Pattern iss ei inet mee QPSK symbol mapping neni onte 78 Reference level i oss eic bites ies neri ci E n 152 Result E Te 179 On Off Keying OOK Constellation diagram sssi annenin massita 88 OOK Symbol MAPPING cioe ett he rk E et trt exeat 88 Optimization Demod ulation cid itti ei estote ree 185 Options Bandwidth extension Electronic attenuation High pass filter a ele OQPSK Constellation diagram sisinio naia 79 Output PM 295 Configuration pesin con negent i rete n t xe
506. ttern for Search Indicates which of the patterns that are assigned to the current standard is selected and will be searched for The selected pattern is indicated for information only and cannot be edited here only in the Signal Structure settings see Name on page 143 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 318 Pattern Found Indicates whether a pattern was found in the currently captured data 5 7 3 Pattern Configuration Access Meas Config Pattern Config For common signal standards the patterns to be searched for in the captured signal are predefined in the VSA application In addition new patterns can be defined and assigned to a signal standard manually Burst and Pattern Configuration Advanced Pattern Settin Is A L x Standard Patterns Pattern Details Name V EDGE TSCO MR SEA Description EDGE Norma Comment raining Sequence Code Modulation Order 5 All Patterns Prefix Show Compatible Show Al EDGE_TSCO Pattern Search On Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Standard Patterns selecting an assigned paitemm 173 Removing patterns from a standard nih aired ential 174 Adding patterns to a statdald EE 174 Displaying available pattems AA 174 e MUT H cea deae 174 L Show Compatible Show AL 174 ie SE 174 SC CP 174 INOW X
507. u need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e CERO VANES cT eH 273 le BEE 274 e Chargcter Da E 274 e Character EE 275 BTE ie Ee 275 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit E
508. ue that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 379 The eye diagram result displays are the same as the real imag result display the results for eye diagrams are merely superimposed in the display 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams For polar diagrams the command returns a pair of values for each trace point The first value is the real part the second value the imaginary part The number of returned value pairs depends on the result type Vector I Q evaluation range length display points per symbol e Constellation UO evaluation range length e Constellation Frequency and Vector Frequency one value for each trace point on the y axis 11 9 2 4 Symbols For the symbol table result diagrams the command returns one value for each num ber in the table The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected The command always returns the values in the decimal format 11 9 2 5 Result Summary For the Result Summary the command returns all values listed in the result table from top to bottom i e lt EVM_RMS gt lt EVM_Peak gt lt MER_RMS gt lt MER_Peak gt lt Phase Error RMS gt lt Phase Error Peak gt lt MagError_RMS gt lt MagError_Peak gt lt Carrier Frequency 11 9 2 6 11 9 2 7 11 9 3 Retrieving Results Error Rho I Q Offset gt lt I Q Imbalance gt lt Gain Imbalance gt lt Quadratue Error gt
509. ueuJuJoo ejouieJ 104 JejeueJed Le att M 00 w898 19 ue2 SR IeJ N Fyedd 33g E o usng OOOL R a OL OH ZH 00 KSC OIZ 3389IlZ 8 MSd uer RED O cS gud _ isd eunde5 06 n S 0 WER ZHI Oc MSdO O ZS GAG ve ASdY ce cS g a ye MH amp eze sdvz E eunjde 5 Ole 5 S GC 0 WER ZHI Oc INvOJesn ZS GAG ve ASdY 9L cS g8AG ye nas Meg sdvo aundeo O8L S S GC 0 WER ZHI Oc Wvo4esn L cS 8AA ES MS ye1 WER d8 cS HAG 7 EH eumde 06 S Seo RER ZHIN Oc MSd8 8 ZS GAG cS gAG Old I ouo eunye e Ven d dd Load N TEEN eigeuod 5 eumde vcv dd 1930 fe GO MSINO ZHW ZSV MSdc zed 1930A _ Sl dd 1030 Ven Old dd 1930 9UON IEIMEN ue Head 92662 0 mdeg vcv dd 1930 e P GO MSINO ZHW ZSV MSdc cd 1930 193d KBjou3 Jojuoj 9UON IEN MOT YOO GJ IRC 09 o sung 97 KR SC GO MSINO ZHIN L MSdc enig Joy1d seolN abuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sung Jet 9je1 Bug dem x 1d9s uonenjeA3 jueuiuBiv yns y uled 10 u2ue9S 104 YOIeaS l1g eudiv juusueJ joquiAs uone npoIN puepuejs Japjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings e ge ieAe s WO4 ous e Jo euleu pJepueis euj WO SJOYIP 31 aal pepiwoJd si spueuJuJoo JOWI Jo 1ejeuleJed Le eu x WL 219 waerd yis 49ju82 MSdO dOO 338 oi ysung 0001 euis HeH ZHW L SHO OIZ D 009 INSL6 19 ue2 SUON IeJ N Fyedd 33g 0 ysung 000L 0L ou ZH 009 sdg OIZ 19 4 Seo abuey fue w
510. ulation process see figure 4 42 and Fine Synchronization on page 186 e Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER see chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided with the R amp S FSWP free of charge The syntax for Known Data files is described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 431 When you use Known Data files as a reference some dependencies to other settings and restrictions for other functions apply Modulation Order The Modulation Order selected in the Modulation settings in the VSA application must correspond to the modulation order value specified in the xml file ModulationOr der element Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions Demodulation Demodulation using synchronization to the Known Data may increase the measure ment duration as each detected symbol must be compared to each possible sequence in the data file Result Length The Result Length specified in the Result Range dialog box in the VSA application must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element Result Range Alignment Bursted signals When you align the result range to a bursted signal due to the uncertainty of the burst search the determined result range might st
511. umber of symbols that can be captured depends on the specified num Only one capture range at a time can be displayed in the result displays based on the capture buffer except for the Magnitude Overview Absolute You can scroll through the different ranges using the Select Result Rng function When the selected result range moves outside the current capture range the right edge of the current result range is displayed in the center of the next capture range Overview vs details While the Magnitude Absolute and other result displays based on the capture buffer Real Imag UO Vector UO chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 can only display a single capture range at a time the Magnitude Overview Absolute dis plays the entire capture buffer at once However the overview trace is restricted to 25 000 points If necessary the captured samples are mapped to 25 000 display points using an autopeak detector for display in the Magnitude Overview Absolute diagram Thus this result display is not suitable to detect transient effects or analyze individual symbols closely For these purposes the Magnitude Absolute result display is suited better where one display point can be displayed for each sample taken Restrictions Trace modes that calculate results for several sweeps Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual ranges in the capture buffer diagrams and thus may not provide useful results For the Magnitude Overview
512. ummary for the current evaluation range Result CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT EVM PAVG CALC LIM MACC EVM PPE Query the value and check the limit for the largest error vector magnitude in the measurement Result CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT CFER AVG CALC LIM MACC CFER MEAN Query the value and check the limit for the mean carrier frequency offset in the result summary for the current evaluation range Result 22 Storing trace data to a file FORM DEXP HEAD ON Include a header in the trace export file FORM DEXP MODE TRAC Export the trace data not raw I Q data DISP WIND1 TRAC2 X STAR Query the first value of the x axis for the current result range x values are not exported with trace data Result MMEM STOR4 TRAC 1 Measurement signal Save the measurement signal values trace 1 in window 4 to an ascii file Results MMEM STOR4 TRAC 2 Reference signal Save the reference signal values trace 2 in window 4 to an ascii file Results MMEM STOR2 TRAC 1 Result Summary Save the result summary values window 2 for the current result range to an ascii file Results fsssssss Retrieving results for further result ranges gt DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC Query the number of result ranges current is last Use variable lt x gt to determine number of previous result range DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC x Move to next result ran
513. urce burst capture buffer or pattern The result of the current setting is dis played in the visualization area of the dialog box In effect this setting defines an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the signal structure see Offset on page 143 Note When you define the Symbol Number at Reference Start remember to take the offset defined for the signal structure into consideration see Offset on page 143 The Symbol Number at Pattern Start refers to the first symbol of the pattern offset not the first symbol of the pattern Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset on page 323 Demodulation Settings Access Overview gt Demodulation During demodulation of the vector signal some undesired effects that may occur during transmission can be compensated for Furthermore you can influence the synchroni zation process e Demodulation Compensation reri oa tec tee roe need uda 2 ERR eux e ERE aes RNN 179 e Advanced Demodulation Gvpnchrontzaton E 183 Demodulation Compensation Access Overview Demodulation Demodulation R amp S FSWP K70 Configuration o Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM values A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation settings de
514. urement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 137 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 5 5 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 145 Signal Capture including Triggering See chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 159 Burst Pattern Configuration See chapter 5 7 Burst and Pattern Configuration on page 168 Result Range Definition See chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 177 Demodulation Settings See chapter 5 9 Demodulation Settings on page 179 Measurement Filter Settings Configuration Overview See chapter 5 10 Measurement Filter Settings on page 187 8 Evaluation Range Definition See chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 189 9 Display Configuration The Display Config button is only available in the general overview not in the window specific overview see Specifics for on page 136 See chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 204 10 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 193 To configure settings gt Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the me
515. ut gt This command defines the length of the falling burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt RunOut gt numeric value Range 0 to 31990 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Run Out on page 143 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP RISing lt RunIn gt This command defines the length of the rising burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in sec onds Setting parameters Runin numeric value Range 0 to 31990 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Run In on page 143 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog Patterns This command reads the names of all patterns stored on the hard disk The file names are returned as a comma separated list of strings one for each file name without the file extension Setting parameters Patterns CURRent ALL CURRent Only patterns that belong to the current standard ALL All patterns RST ALL Example DDEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Result GSM ABO GSM AB1 GSM AB2 GSM TSC1 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 417 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern lt PatternedSignal gt This command specifies whether the signal contains a pattern or not Setting para
516. values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green 1 Result Summary Current EVM RMS e Peak MER RMS 18 00 Peak 0 28 Phase Error RMS 6 62 Peak 44 67 Magnitude Error RMS Peak 48 74 Carrier Frequency Error 201 04 Rho 0 984 404 I Q Offset 40 15 IZQ Imbalance 57 56 Gain Imbalance 0 01 Quadrature Error 0 14 Amplitude Droop 0 000 53 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 Equalizer Filter characteristics of the equalizer used to compensate for channel distortion and parameters of the distortion itself The following result types are available chapter 3 2 18 Impulse Response Magnitude on page 38 chapter 3 2 19 Impulse Response Phase on page 39 chapter 3 2 20 Impulse Response Real Imag on page 39 chapter 3 2 16 Frequency Response Magnitude on page 36 chapter 3 2 17 Frequency Response Phase on page 37 chapter 3 2 15 Frequency Response Group Delay on page 35 chapter 3 2 3 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude on page 23 chapter 3 2 2 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay on page 23 The default result type is Frequency Response Magnitude Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 Multi Source Combines two data sources in one diagram with initially one trace
517. ve channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSWP User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections R amp S FSWP K70 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application MultiView 33 Spectrum VSA 2 Ref Level 0 00 r Std J WCDMA SI 4 MHz SGL Att 10dB Frz3 1325 GHz ResLen 0 Stat Count 10 1 Const I Q D 2 i 2 Result Summary Current Ze Unit EVM RMS 100 00 Peak 100 00 MER RMS 0 00 Peak 0 00 Phase Frror RMS 103 95 Peak 179 82 Magnitude Error DMS 100 00 Peak 100 00 Carrier Frequency Error 445021 50 Rho 0 000 008 1 0 Offset 36 57 1 0 Tmbalance 0 08 Gain Tribal 46 60 Quadrature v 159 53 5 Stop 3 125 rte Droop 0 000 000 NN Capture Buffer wid Symbols Hexadecimal OP Wm A TTL D 16 32 18 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 19 208 Stop 8000 sym 2724 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram s
518. verlapping area of the detected burst and the Result Range Furthermore the Run In Run Out ranges see Burst Settings on page 142 are explicitly excluded from the estima tion range In the special case that the signal is indicated as a burst signal but is so highly dis torted that the burst search cannot detect a burst the estimation range corresponds to the pattern and if an offset of the pattern is indicated the useful part of the burst from its start to the pattern start 4 5 1 3 Modulation Errors Error vector EV Q Fig 4 51 Modulation error error vector The error vector is the difference between the measurement signal vector Meas vec tor and the reference signal vector Ref vector Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Error Vector Magnitude EVM Fig 4 52 Modulation error EVM magnitude error phase error The magnitude of the error vector in the diagram is specified as the error vector magni tude EVM It is commonly normalized to the mean reference power or alternatively to the maximum reference power or the mean or maximum constellation power power at the symbol instants see Normalize EVM to on page 184 The EVM should not be confused with the magnitude error see below Magnitude Error The magnitude error is defined as the difference between the measurement vector magnitude and the reference vector magnitude see figure 4 52 Phase Error Q
519. w is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel Configuring the Result Display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table LAY out WINDow lt n gt TYPe Queries the window type of the window specified by the index lt n gt For a list of possi ble window types see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 Example LAY WIND2 TYPE Response MACC Modulation accuracy Usage Query only 11 8 3 VSA Window Configuration For each window you can select a different evaluation
520. xample with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state l
521. y the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 3 FreqRel Meas amp Ref 1M Cla 49 sym Fig 3 9 Result display Frequency Relative mum EP EIN CC RI RN UU User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 32 Result Types in VSA Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 365 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 373 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowc n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 377 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 383 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency in Hz of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time FREQ ERR FREQ s FREQprr t with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 207 Note that this measurement does not consider a possible
522. y the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 341 Statistic Count Defines the number of measurements to be considered for statistical evaluations The behavior depends on the active sweep mode Activate Description to display a visualization of the behavior of the current settings Note If the Statistic Count is set to 1 trace averaging is not performed Max Hold and Min Hold however remain active unlike in the Spectrum application 5 7 5 7 1 Burst and Pattern Configuration Auto In single sweep mode captures the UO data once and evaluates it In continuous sweep mode captures UO data continuously for each evaluation the average is calculated over the last 10 capture sets moving average Manual In single sweep mode captures UO data until the defined number of evaluations have been performed In continuous sweep mode captures UO data continuously if trace averaging is selected the average is calculated over the defined number of capture sets moving average Remote command SENSe SWEe
523. ymbols that are to be demodulated and ana lyzed together In most common applications only the parts of the capture buffer con taining the bursts need to be analyzed Hence for bursted signals the Result Length usually coincides with the burst length However there are certain scenarios where the rising and falling edge of a burst are also of interest e g checking the power ramping of the device under test For this measurement task it is useful to choose a Result Length that exceeds the burst length 1 In order to include the rising and falling edges of the bursts in the EVM vs Time display window 1 you need to increase the Result Length In the Overview select Cut Result Range and increase the Result Length to 200 symbols 2 To evaluate the rising and falling edges further display the absolute magnitude val ues of the measured signal in window 4 Source Meas amp Ref Signal Result type Magnitude Absolute see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration on page 238 3 Press RUN SINGLE The rising and falling edges of the burst in the selected result range are displayed in window 4 You could now add an average trace to evaluate the rising and falling edges further Lum moo eue woe cc esa User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 246 R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Examples Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 d amp m Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 24 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 200 SGL Stat Count 8 BURST PATTE
524. z FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring VSA Manual operation See Center frequency on page 150 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 297 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 151 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt LinkMode gt Defines the step width of the center frequency Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Links the step width to the current standard currently 1 MHz for all standards OFF Sets the step width as defined using the FREQ CENT STEP command see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 298 RST 1 Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 151 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not O Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application
525. z the symbol rate error is SRE 999 9 1000 1000 1 000 000 ppm 100 ppm R amp S FSWP K70 Measurement Basics UO Offset Origin Offset sdrature Qua 1 0 5 o 0 5 1 Inphase Fig 4 54 Effect of an I Q or origin offset after demodulation and error compensation The effect of an UO offset in the transmitter is shown in figure 4 54 The Q offset can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the offset does not affect the EVM Example The following figures compare the results for a compensated UO offset of 2 5 and a non compensated offset UO Offset compensated for UO Offset NOT compensated for A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref b 1M Clrw Stop 2 52 1 Clrw Stop 2 52 Start O sym Stop 300 sym Start 0 sym Stop 300 sym User Manual 1177 5685 02 01 111 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Gain Imbalance Quadrature e E E eee 0 Inphase Fig 4 55 Effect of gain imbalance The gain difference in the and Q channels during signal generation in the transmitter is referred to as gain imbalance The effect of this error on the constellation diagram and the unit circle are shown in figure 4 55 In the example the gain in the channel is slightly reduced which causes a distortion of coordinates in the I direction The unit cir cle of the ideal constellation points has

R&S FSWP-K70 VSA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSWP-K70 VSA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSWP-K70 VSA User Manual